Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Controller

VNM Enterprise Controller - Controller Extron - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free VNM Enterprise Controller Extron in PDF.

📄 253 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - page 10
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Enterprise Controller for VN-Matrix Systems
Brand Extron
Model VNM Enterprise Controller
Dimensions (W x H x D) 17.0" x 1.7" x 10.5" (approximate, 1U rack mount)
Weight Approximately 10 lbs (4.5 kg)
Power Supply 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, internal power supply
Default IP Address 192.168.254.254
Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Network Interface Two Ethernet ports: eth0 (primary network), eth1 (cluster/redundancy)
Front Panel Features Power button, Reset button, CD/DVD drive (or CompactFlash), USB ports, Status LEDs (Power, Drive Activity, Network Activity, Overheat)
Rear Panel Connectors IEC power connector, VGA, PS/2 mouse/keyboard, COM1 serial, USB, two Ethernet (eth0, eth1)
Redundancy Support Dual (redundant) controller configuration with cluster IP and crossover cable
Transport Protocols Multicast RTP, Unicast RTP, Unicast TCP
Maximum Managed Devices Supports large deployments (over 10 devices recommended)
Web-Based User Interface Full device management, preset configuration, monitoring, and firmware updates
Preset Management Create, save, and recall presets with connection rules and device attributes
HLI Support High-Level Interface for third-party control via Ethernet or serial
Firmware Update Via Upgrade page in web UI; supports single and redundant controller updates
Compatible Devices VN-Matrix encoders, decoders, codecs, VNM recorders, VNR 100, VNS 104 software decoder
Operating Temperature 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) typical
Safety FCC Class A, CE; follow Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide
Warranty 3 years parts and labor

Frequently Asked Questions - VNM Enterprise Controller Extron

How do I access the VNM Enterprise Controller web interface?
Connect your PC to the same network as the controller. Open a web browser (Internet Explorer 7+ or Firefox 1.3+) and enter the controller's IP address (default is 192.168.254.254). The login page will appear. Use username admin (no password by default) for full access.
What are the default IP settings and how can I change them?
Default IP address is 192.168.254.254 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and gateway 192.168.254.1. To change, go to the Configuration > Network page. Enter new IP, netmask, gateway, and MTU (default 1500). Click Apply Changes and reconfigure your PC accordingly.
How do I set up redundant (dual) VNM Enterprise Controllers?
Connect both controllers to the same network via eth0 ports. Connect eth1 ports directly with a crossover cable. Set the primary controller role to redundant_primary and secondary to redundant_secondary under Configuration > Role. Configure a cluster IP address on the same subnet. Add both physical IPs to the controller list. Finally, pair the controllers under Cluster > Pair.
How do I update the firmware of a single VNM Enterprise Controller?
Go to Configuration > Upgrade page. Browse and select the firmware update file (downloaded from Extron website). Click Upgrade. The controller will reboot after successful update. Do not power off during the process.
What is a preset and how do I create one?
A preset is a saved configuration of connections and device attributes. Go to the Preset Manager page. Click Create Preset, give it a name. Drag and drop devices (sources, displays, recorders) and define connection rules and device attributes. Save the preset. Later you can launch it to apply the configuration instantly.
How do I update the license of the VNM Enterprise Controller?
To update the license, go to Configuration > Upgrade page. Under Controller License, upload the new license file provided by Extron. Click Apply. The controller will verify and enable the new features. Reboot may be required.
What is the default multicast address scheme and how is it configured?
The default scheme uses Class C subnet addressing. Multicast addresses are derived from encoder IP addresses. For example, for IP 192.168.0.102, video multicast becomes 239.192.1.102 with port 9720. Scheme can be changed under Configuration > System Config > Multicast Address Scheme.
How do I reset the VNM Enterprise Controller to factory defaults?
There is no dedicated hardware reset button for factory defaults. To reset, you can restore a saved configuration or re-image the unit. For full reset, contact Extron support or reload the firmware. Note that the Reset button on the front panel only reboots the system.
What is HLI and how can I control the controller via serial?
HLI stands for High-Level Interface, a command set for external control. Connect to the COM1 serial port (9-pin D-sub) using a serial cable. Open a terminal program (115200 baud, 8N1). Commands are issued as plain text. For example, getdevices lists all devices. Full command list is in the manual.
How do I connect and configure a VNS 104 software decoder?
Install the VNS 104 software on a Windows PC. Ensure the PC is on the same network as the VNM Enterprise Controller. Open the VNS 104 application and log in using the controller's IP. In the web UI, the VNS 104 will appear on the Devices page. Select it and use the Actions menu to configure decode windows, audio, and connections.

User questions about VNM Enterprise Controller Extron

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Controller in PDF format for free! Find your manual VNM Enterprise Controller - Extron and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. VNM Enterprise Controller by Extron.

USER MANUAL VNM Enterprise Controller Extron

VNM Enterprise Controller

VN-Matrix® Enterprise Controller

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - VNM Enterprise Controller - 1

natural_image Extron VNM Enterprise Controller rack with ports and connectors (no readable text or symbols beyond branding)

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions • English

WARNING: This symbol, , when used on the product, is intended to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock.

ATTENTION: This symbol, when used on the product, is intended to alert the user of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature provided with the equipment.

For information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide, part number 68-290-01, on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

© 2016-2019 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved.

Trademarks

All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners. The following registered trademarks ^® , registered service marks ^SM , and trademarks ^TM are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or Extron Electronics (see the current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com):

Registered Trademarks ^®
Extron, AVTrac, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, Flat Field, FlexOS, Global Configurator, Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, Inline, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink, MediaPort, NetPA, PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch, System INTEGRATOR, TeamWork, TouchLink, V-Lock, VersaTools, VN-Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XTP, and XTP Systems
Registered Service Mark ^(SM) : S3 Service Support Solutions
Trademarks ^(TM)
AAP, AFL (Accu-Rate Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), Auto-Image, CableCover, CDRS (Class D Ripple Suppression), DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator, DSP Configurator, DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), eLink, EQIP, FastBite, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom HelpDesk, MAAP, MicroDigital, Opti-Torque, ProDSP, QS-FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent, Scope-Trigger, ShareLink, SIS, Simple Instruction Set, Skew-Free, SpeedNav, Triple-Action Switching, True4K, Vector ^TM 4K , WebShare, XTRA, ZipCaddy, and ZipClip

FCC Class A Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.

NOTE: For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the "Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide" on the Extron website.

Battery Notice

This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide).

CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

Conventions Used in this Guide

Notifications

The following notifications are used in this guide:

CAUTION: Risk of minor personal injury.

NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.

TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.

Software Commands

Commands are written in the fonts shown here:

^AR Merge Scene,,Op1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^C [∅1] R∅004∅03∅0∅04∅0∅08∅0∅06∅0 [∅2] 35 [17] [∅3]

Esc X1 * X17 * X20 * X23 * X21 CE ←

NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses mentioned in this guide, the character "0" is used for the number zero and "0" is the capital letter "o."

Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font shown here:

Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32 C:\Program Files\Extron

Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:

ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -t SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX

Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are written in the font shown here:

From the File menu, select New. Click the OK button.

Specifications Availability

Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

Extron Glossary of Terms

A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.aspx.

Contents

Introduction 1

About this Guide....1

About the VNM Enterprise Controller .... 1

About the Web-based User Interface....2

About Dual (Redundant)

VNM Enterprise Controllers....3

Transport Protocols Used for Streaming 4

Multicast RTP — An Overview 4

Unicast RTP — An Overview 5

Unicast TCP — An Overview 5

Definitions....6

Features 6

Panels and Cabling....7

Installation Overview 7

Front Panel Features....7

Rear Panel Features 9

Controller Configuration and Operation.....10

Power Up Procedure 10

Web-based User Interface Overview......10

Accessing the Web-based User Interface ..... 11

Power Down Procedure.... 12

Single Enterprise Controller

Configuration....13

Setup Overview 13

Single VNM Enterprise Controller

Configuration....14

Configuring the Network Settings 14

Setting the Role....15

Configuring the Transport Protocol.... 16

Configuring a Single Enterprise Controller

as the System Controller 17

Adding the VNM Enterprise Controller to the Controller List .... 17

Configuring the VN-Matrix Devices 18

Advanced Controller Configuration....19

Network Page 20

Password Page 21

Role Page....22

Time Page....23

Reported Time Panel 23

Clock Synchronization Panel....24

Clock Settings Panel....25

Time Zone Panel....26

Upgrade Page 27

Version Page 27

System Config Page....28

About the System Info Page 30

About the Default Multicast Address....31

VN-Matrix Device Configuration

and Control 35

Devices Page Overview 36

About the Devices Page 36

Sorting Devices by Column....38

Sorting Devices by Group 39

About the Actions Menu Bar......40

Actions Menu Bar Overview......41

Device Configuration 42

VNM 200/225/300/325 Configuration....42

Info Menu 42

Connections Menu 43

Configure Menu 44

Format Menu (Encoders) 45

Format Menu (Decoders) 50

Compression Menu (Encoders Only)......51

Peripherals Menu....55

License Menu 57

Upgrade Menu (2xx and 3xx Devices)......58

Mode Menu (VNC Devices Only) 60

Misc Menu....61

Group Menu 63

VNM 250 Configuration 64

Info Menu (VNM 250)....64

Configure Menu....65

Connections Menu 66

Format Menu (VNE 250) 66

Format Menu (VND 250) 68

Compression Menu (VNE 250 Only)....71

Peripherals Menu....74

License Menu 76

Upgrade Menu 76

Misc Menu....77

Recorder Configuration....79

Info Menu 79

Recorder Menu....80

Configure Menu....81

License Menu 82

VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration......83

VNS 104 Decode Windows 88

About the Switcher Page....89

Hidden Devices 91

Preset Manager 92

Presets Overview....92

Preset Manager Page....93

Preset List 94

Preset List Controls 94

Matrix Devices List.... 96

Preset Design Panel 97

Preset Design – Device Icons......97

Preset Design – Connection Rules......97

Device Attributes 98

Device Attributes - Codecs.... 98

Device Attributes – Encoders....98

Device Attributes – Decoders....100

Device Attributes – VND 250 Decoder ..... 101

Device Attributes – VN-Matrix Recorder: Play Mode 103

Device Attributes – VN-Matrix Recorder: Record Mode 104

Device Attributes – VNR 100 Player ...... 105

Device Attributes – VNR 100 Recorder ..... 105

Device Attributes – VNS 104 Software Decoder: Decode Window...... 106

Recorder Directory and File Management ..... 107

Directory Management Overview ...... 107

File Management Overview....111

Completed Directory Structure.... 112

Player File Management....112

Creating Presets 113

Create a New Preset....113

Saving Presets....116

Using the VNS 104 in a Preset....117

Recorder Presets....119

Player Presets....120

Launch Behavior....121

Selecting a File for Playback 124

Transport Bar Shortcut 127

Chase-Play Feature (VNR 100 Only) ...... 128

About the Format Editor Page 130

About Custom Source and Display Formats ... 131

Creating a New Source Format (Input Mode) .. 132

Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode)....146

Deleting Formats 149

About the Source Format Editor 150

About the Display Format Editor.... 151

About Alarms 153

Overview 153

Alarms Page....153

Sorting Alarms by Column 154

Sorting Alarms by Group 154

Alarm Type Reference Tables 155

Encoders....155

Decoders....156

Encoder/Decoder 157

System Controller 157

Dual (Redundant) Controller

Configuration....158

Setup Overview 158

Configuring Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers..159

Configuring the Network Settings (Eth0)..... 159

Setting the Role of the Primary Enterprise Controller 161

Setting the Role of the Secondary Enterprise Controller 162

Configuring the Primary Enterprise Controller Time Settings 163

Configuring the Secondary Enterprise Controller Time Settings 164

Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller 165

Adding the VNM Enterprise Controllers to the Controller List 165

Configuring the Transport Protocol.... 166

Setting the Cluster IP Address 167

Setting the Crossover Subnet IP Address (Eth1)....168

Node Test Page....169

Pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers ..... 171

Configuring VN-Matrix Devices for Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers....171

About the Cluster Properties Pages...... 172

Cluster Page....172

System Control 175

HLI Overview 176

HLI Features....176

HLI Connection and Control 176

Ethernet Connection 176

Serial Port (COM) Connection 177

Using the VNM Enterprise Controller User Interface....177

HLI Command Tables 178

HLI Responses....178

Controller Firmware and License

Updates....179

Updating the VNM Enterprise Controller License....179

Updating the Firmware of a Single Enterprise Controller....181

Updating the Firmware of Dual (Redundant) Enterprise Controllers .... 181

Download the Firmware Update File ...... 182

Save the Device Configuration and Presets Files 182

Unpair the Controller Cluster....186

Update the Redundant Secondary Controller....187

Update the Primary Controller....187

Pair the Controllers 188

Restore the Device Configuration and Presets Files 189

VN-Matrix Product Variants 194

VNM Enterprise Controller with CompactFlash Overview....194

Installing and Configuring the CompactFlash Replacement Card....194

Obtain the Configuration Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller .... 195

Install the CompactFlash Card....197

Configure the Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller .... 197

Browser Configuration....200

Microsoft Internet Explorer (version 7 or above)....200

Mozilla Firefox (version 1.3 or above) ...... 202

Reference Information ......204

Default Factory Settings....204

VN-Matrix System Port Usage 204

Mounting....206 Rack Installation....206

UL Guidelines for Rack Mounting......206

Basic Rack Mounting....207

Rack Mounting Using Rack Rails 208

HLI Command Overview....211

HLI Command Examples....212

General Commands 213 analogOutputEnable 213

analogOutputMute....213

analogOutputSetLevel 214

connect 214

createdisplay 220

createsource....220

currentTime 221

deleteddevice 221

disconnectall 221

getalarmlogs....222

getcontrollers....222

getdevices 223

getDeviceLayout (VNS 104 Only) ...... 225

getFilesInFolder 225

getFolderTree....226

Stat 226

mkdir 227

pause (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)....227

play (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)....228

record (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)....229

rmdir....229

setDeviceLayout (VNS 104 only) ...... 229

scaleMode....230

stop (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)....231

userParam [1, 2 or 3]......231

walk....232

delete (VNM Recorder and VNR 100

devices only)....233

Preset Commands.... 234

presetadvance....234

presetcopy 234

presetdelete....235

presetget 235

presetgetlist....236

presetgetplayerstatus (VNM Recorder

and VNR 100 only)....236

presetgetrecorderstatus (VNM Recorder

and VNR 100 only)....237

presetlaunch....238

presetload 239

presetplay....240

presetplayerpause 240

presetplayerstart....240

presetplayerstop....241

presetrecstart 241

presetrecstop 241

presetrename 242

presetset 242

presetstep 242

presetseek....243

presetunlaunch....243

Extron Warranty 244

Contact Information 244

Introduction

This section gives an overview of the user guide and describes the Extron VNM Enterprise Controller and its features. Topics that are covered include:

  • About this Guide
    • About the VNM Enterprise Controller
  • Accessing the Web-based User Interface
  • About Dual (Redundant) VNM Enterprise Controllers
    • Transport Protocols Used for Streaming
  • Definitions
  • Features

About this Guide

This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the VNM Enterprise Controller.

In this guide:

  • The terms "controller" and "Enterprise Controller" refer specifically to the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • The term "codec" refers to a VN-Matrix device that can be configured as either an encoder or decoder.
  • The term "stream" refers to multimedia that is constantly received by (and normally presented to) an end-user while being delivered by a VN-Matrix encoding device.
  • The term "element" refers to the video/graphics, audio, (user) data, and whiteboard (annotation data) content that is contained within a stream.
  • The VN-Matrix system model prefix "VNM" is used generically to refer to the VNC (codec), VND (decoder), and VNE (encoder) models, and is used to refer to both the 2xx series and 3xx series devices. If specific models must be referenced, the exact model name is used.

NOTE: This user guide details menus that are used to configure and control VN-Matrix encoder, decoder, and codec devices, VNM recorders, and VNS software decoders. The menus on the VNM Enterprise Controller contain configuration and control menus for these devices. Where necessary, differences in the configuration and operation of controls for a specific VN-Matrix model or series is identified.

About the VNM Enterprise Controller

The VNM Enterprise Controller is a dedicated control device for VN-Matrix systems. The Controller simplifies managing a large VN-Matrix deployment allowing users to view, manage, and dynamically control multiple VN-Matrix systems and networked VN-Matrix domains from a single interface. Figure 1 on the next page shows a simple application.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the VNM Enterprise Controller - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Browser Based User Control"] --> B["Network Multicast Enabled Network"]
    C["VNM Enterprise Controller"] --> B
    D["TouchLink™ Touchpanel External User Control"] --> B
    E["VNS 104 Multi-stream Software Decoder"] --> B
    F["Multiple VNM Matrix Series Encoders (or CODECs configured as encoders)"] --> B
    G["VNR 100 Single Channel Recorder"] --> B
    H["VNM Recorder"] --> B
    B --> I["Network Multicast Enabled Network"]
    I --> J["Browser Based User Control"]
    I --> K["TouchLink™ Touchpanel External User Control"]
    I --> L["VNS 104 Multi-stream Software Decoder"]
    I --> M["Multiple VNM Matrix Series Encoders (or CODECs configured as encoders)"]
    I --> N["VNR 100 Single Channel Recorder"]

Figure 1. Single VNM Enterprise Controller System with No Redundancy

Two versions of the VNM Enterprise Controller are available:

• VNM Enterprise Controller with fixed hard disk drive
- VNM Enterprise Controller with removable CompactFlash ^® card

NOTE: Both VNM Enterprise Controllers function the same. The only difference is that one has a removable flash card. For additional information on the VNM Enterprise Controller with removable CompactFlash card, see VN-Matrix Product Variants on page 194.

The VNM Enterprise Controller is recommended when:

• More than ten VN-Matrix units are configured into a system.
- A system of VN-Matrix units are interfaced to an external control system requiring dynamic control of the units in a switching solution.
- Preset configurations must be prepared and recalled.
- Redundant system control is required.

For information on setting up a single VNM Enterprise Controller system, see the Single Enterprise Controller Configuration section page 13.

About the Web-based User Interface

Every VN-Matrix system product includes a basic embedded interface for configuration and control of itself and a few additional units. This interface is useful when control is limited to a few units that generally remain in a fixed operational state.

However, for large systems (more than ten devices) the VNM Enterprise Controller provides a more sophisticated user interface that simplifies the configuration and usability of a VN-Matrix system.

About Dual (Redundant) VNM Enterprise Controllers

For applications where it is essential to maintain system control, a second VNM Enterprise Controller can be added with both units configured as part of a redundant pair (see figure 2). In a redundant system, an internal database stores the current system configuration. The internal database is held on both units.

A crossover network cable is fitted to the eth1 port of each VNM Enterprise Controller. This connection is used to monitor the health of the system.

NOTES:

  • The crossover connection must use a subnet that is different from the main VN-Matrix network (eth0).
  • The crossover cable must be directly connected between the two VNM Enterprise Controller devices without using extra network equipment (such as a switch or router).

When the VN-Matrix system is started, the VNM Enterprise Controllers communicate with each other and one is chosen as the controller for the system. While the VN-Matrix system runs, each VNM Enterprise Controller continually monitors the health of the other. If the primary device (acting as the system controller) fails, the secondary unit takes over control of the VN-Matrix system. Transparent operation and communication within the system is maintained.

The two controllers in a redundant system are known as a "cluster". Each device has its own unique physical IP address (eth0) assigned. A third IP address, known as the cluster address, is also assigned. The cluster IP address is used as the controller IP address for all of the VN-Matrix devices in the system.

For information on setting up a dual (redundant) VNM Enterprise Controller system, see the Dual (Redundant) Controller Configuration section on page 158.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - NOTES: - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["VNM Enterprise Controller (Primary)"] --> B["ETH1 Cluster Port"]
    A --> C["Eth0 Physical Port (VN-Matrix Network) 192.168.254.254"]
    A --> D["Crossover Cable 192.168.253.0"]
    A --> E["Eth1 Cluster Port"]
    A --> F["VNM Enterprise Controller (Secondary)"]
    F --> G["Cluster Address 192.168.254.250"]
    F --> H["Eth0 Physical Port (VN-Matrix Network) 192.168.254.253"]
    G --> I["Network Multicast Enabled Network"]
    H --> I
    I --> J["TouchLink™ Touchpanel External User Control"]
    I --> K["Multiple VNM Series Devices"]
    I --> L["Browser Based User Control"]

Figure 2. Dual (Redundant) VNM Enterprise Controller System

Transport Protocols Used for Streaming

The source data from a VN-Matrix encoder can be distributed to multiple displays/decoders (one-to-many) or to a single display/decoder (point-to-point). A previously recorded stream can be distributed in the same way and may be thought of as an encoder in this context.

A stream may be transported from the source (encoder, recorded stream) to the display (decoder) using one of three methods:

• Multicast Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP)
• Unicast Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP)
• Unicast Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

These transport protocols are summarized in this section. For information on how to change the transport protocol used by the VNM Enterprise Controller see System Config Page on page 28.

Multicast RTP – An Overview

Multicast Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) allows a source to be viewed on multiple displays. This method uses a real-time variation of UDP (User Datagram Protocol).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Multicast RTP – An Overview - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["SOURCE"] -->|RTP| B["Network"]
    B -->|R| C["DISPLAYS"]
    C -->|RTP| D["Multi decoders can be part of the multicast group."]
    B -->|RTP| E["Display"]
    E --> F["Output"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Figure 3. Multicast RTP Streaming

The source encoder uses RTP to send data to a multicast group. The source does not need to know the IP address of the decoders that are using the source.

RTP provides very low latency which is important for video streaming. Unlike other protocols, RTP packets include a time stamp. If packets are received in the wrong order, they are sorted into the correct order for display or discarded if the time stamp is out-of-date.

However, because RTP is a connectionless protocol, data delivery is not guaranteed. When data packets are lost (for example, due to excessive network traffic) the VN-Matrix devices carefully manage the data stream to minimize image disruption.

Unicast RTP – An Overview

Similar to multicast RTP, this method uses a real-time variation of UDP, called unicast RTP. Unicast RTP is used where the network infrastructure does not support multicast traffic. Typically, this protocol is used for point-to-point configuration (single source to single display), but can be configured to stream to a maximum of four displays.

NOTE: The encoder sends an individual stream to each decoder. This means that the total bandwidth of the VN-Matrix system increases as more decoders are added.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Unicast RTP – An Overview - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["SOURCE"] -->|RTP (1 - 4)| B["Network"]
    B -->|RTP 1| C["DISPLAYS"]
    B -->|RTP 2| D["Display"]
    B -->|RTP 3| E["Display"]
    B -->|RTP 4| F["Display"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Figure 4. Unicast RTP Streaming

RTP provides very low latency which is important for video streaming. Unlike other protocols, RTP packets include a time stamp. If packets are received in the wrong order, they are sorted into the correct order for display or discarded if the time stamp is out-of-date.

However, because RTP is a connectionless protocol, data delivery is not guaranteed. When data packets are lost (for example, due to excessive network traffic) the VN-Matrix devices carefully manage the data stream to minimize image disruption.

Unicast TCP – An Overview

This method transports data using standard Transport Control Protocol (TCP) and should only be used for single point-to-point transfer of data.

TCP is a connection-based protocol and, therefore, data delivery is guaranteed. However, in the event of excessive network traffic, delivery can be delayed, impacting real-time performance.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Unicast TCP – An Overview - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["SOURCE VN-MATRIX (encoder)"] -->|TCP| B["Network"]
    B -->|TCP| C["D VN-MATRIX (decoder)"]
    C -->|Decoder makes a TCP connection with the specified encoder.| B

Figure 5. Unicast TCP Streaming

The decoder defines which source it connects to. Other than defining an IP address and source type (if required), no special source encoder setup is required.

Definitions

- PURE3 — PURE3 ^ is specifically designed for network transmission of real time media (such as video or graphics, audio, data, and whiteboard elements). It features both spatial and temporal image compression, which allows for efficient bandwidth usage and eliminates the need for forward error correction.

  • PURE3 streams always contain video or graphic elements.
  • PURE3 streams may contain audio, data, and whiteboard elements that are associated with the video and graphic elements.

  • Streaming media (stream) — Multimedia that is constantly received by (and normally presented to) an end-user while being delivered by a streaming provider. Internet television is a commonly streamed medium. Streaming media (stream) in this guide refers to a PURE3 media stream that is produced by a VN-Matrix encoding device.

  • Element — This term refers to the video/graphics, audio, (user) data, and whiteboard (annotation data) content that is contained within a stream.
  • Device license — This term refers to the number of licensed features that are available on a device within a VN-Matrix system. All devices contain a default license that offers a default level of functionality. For information about device licenses, see License Menu on page 57.
  • Controller license — This term refers to the license that is applied to the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Controller Firmware and License Updates on page 179 for information about controller licenses).
  • (User) Data — This term refers to the transfer of user data between an encoder and a decoder. User data is created at the encoder, placed into the PURE3 stream, and sent to the decoder. The data is received in the same form that it was transmitted. This method of data transfer is unidirectional and can only be sent from an encoder to a decoder.
  • Whiteboard (wb) data — Also known as annotation data, whiteboard data outputs text and/or simple pointer annotation onto local displays that are connected to VN-Matrix encoders or decoders. This type of data is bidirectional, which allows a decoder to send whiteboard data to an encoder.
  • Cluster — This refers to VNM Enterprise Controllers that are paired in a redundant configuration. A cluster IP address is used to access both VNM Enterprise Controllers at the same time.
  • Cluster IP address — This refers to a single IP address that is used to access paired VNM Enterprise Controllers. A unique IP address on the same subnet as assigned to the eth0 port of the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers is used as the cluster IP address.

NOTE: When configuring the controller IP address of VN-Matrix devices, use the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster IP address.

Features

• Monitor, configure, and manage all VN-Matrix units as a system.
- Supplies the network heartbeat for encoder and decoder synchronization and communication.
- High-level interface provides single point of control for external control systems.
- Manage multiple VN-Matrix systems in combined or independent domains.
- Provides redundant control in mission critical applications.

Panels and Cabling

This section provides information on:

• Installation Overview
- Front Panel Features
• Rear Panel Features

Installation Overview

  1. Turn off and disconnect the VNM Enterprise Controller and all existing devices.
  2. Mount the controller (see Mounting on page 206).
  3. Connect all devices to the controller (see Front Panel Features below and Rear Panel Features on page 9).
  4. Reconnect and power on all devices.
  5. Configure the controller.
  6. Configure all connected devices.

Front Panel Features

NOTE: Some features listed in this user guide may not be available on some units. This will not affect the overall functionality of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

The front panel of the VNM Enterprise Controller is shown in figure 6 below.

A B C D E

Figure 6. VNM Enterprise Controller Front Panel

A CD/DVD drive — Insert any compatible CD or DVD into this drive. This drive is used to update the VNM Enterprise Controller software. The drive is not required for normal operation.

A compact flash drive can replace the CD/DVD drive. For more information on the compact flash drive, see VN-Matrix Product Variants on page 194.

ATTENTION:

B Status LEDs — Five LEDs provide the status of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see figure 6 on the previous page).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 1
Overheat

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 2
Network Activity (2)

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 3
Network A

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 4
ctivity (1)

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 5
Power

Figure 7. Status LED Icons

- Overheat LED — When this LED is lit, the controller has achieved a condition which can cause it to overheat. The LED remains on for as long as the condition exists.

NOTE: If this LED is continuously lit, it can be caused by cables obstructing the airflow of the controller or the ambient room temperature. Check the routing of the cables and make sure all fans are operating normally. If necessary, move the controller to a cooler location or adjust the room temperature.

• Network Activity LED (2) — This LED flashes to indicate activity on the second network.
• Network Activity LED (1) — This LED flashes to indicate activity on the first network.
- Drive Activity LED — This LED flashes to indicate hard drive and CD/DVD drive activity.
• Power LED — This LED lights when the controller is receiving power.

C Reset button — This button reboots the system.
Power button — This is the main power button, used to apply or turn off the main power. When the main power is turned off, standby power is actively supplied to the controller.
E USB (Universal Serial Bus) ports — Insert any compatible USB device into these ports. The ports are not required for normal operation.

Rear Panel Features

NOTES:

  • Some features listed in this user guide are not available on each unit. This does not affect the overall functionality of the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • Items A, G, and H are required for normal operation. The other items are used when upgrading the VNM Enterprise Controller.

The rear panel of the VNM Enterprise Controller is shown in figure 8 below.

A B C D E F G H

Figure 8. VNM Enterprise Controller Rear Panel

Power input (IEC connector) — Plug a standard IEC power cord into this connector to connect the controller to a 100 to 240 VAC, 50 Hz or 60 Hz power source.
B PS/2 mouse connector (optional) — Connect a PS/2 mouse to this port.
PS/2 keyboard connector (optional) — Connect a PS/2 keyboard to this port.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connectors — Insert any compatible USB device into these ports.
E COM1 serial connector (optional) — Connect a compatible device to this 9-pin serial port. This port can control the VNM Enterprise Controller using HLI commands (see System Control on page 175).
F VGA connector (optional) — Connect a compatible VGA monitor to this port.
G Ethernet connector (eth0) — Connect an RJ-45 cable to this port. This port connects to a primary network and is the default network port to connect the controller to a VN-Matrix network.
H Ethernet connector (eth1) — Connect an RJ-45 cable to this port. This port connects to a second VNM Enterprise Controller and is used to monitor the status of the primary VNM Enterprise Controller in a redundant configuration. This port is also referred to as the "cluster" or "service" port.

Controller Configuration and Operation

This section provides information on:

• Power Up Procedure
• Web-based User Interface Overview
- Accessing the Web-based User Interface
• Power Down Procedure

Power Up Procedure

NOTE: Before turning on the VNM Enterprise Controller, ensure that all necessary devices are powered on and connected properly.

  1. Plug the IEC power cord into the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Rear Panel Features, A on page 9).
  2. Press the power button on the front of the unit (see Front Panel Features, D on page 7). The power LED lights indicating the unit is powered. The VNM Enterprise Controller takes about 60 seconds to boot before it is fully operational.

Web-based User Interface Overview

The web-based user interface is used to configure the controller and operate connected devices in a VN-Matrix network. It is accessed by entering the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller into a compatible web browser (see Browser Configuration on page 200). The user interface provides system level configuration, monitoring, and operation of VN-Matrix devices connected to the VNM Enterprise Controller. The following list outlines the main features of the user interface.

  • Codec device configuration includes device name, compression settings, peripheral communications, and device mode.
  • Monitor the network bit rate and active connections in a VN-Matrix system.
  • Enable and configure the on-screen display (OSD) feature for VN-Matrix devices.
  • Update the firmware of connected VN-Matrix devices.
  • Record and play back video using a connected VN-Matrix recorder.
  • Create and save presets to quickly reconfigure devices.
  • Stream to desktops with VN-Matrix software decoders.

Accessing the Web-based User Interface

To access the web-based user interface:

  1. Configure the network settings of a control PC so that it is compatible with the VN-Matrix network and connect the control PC to the VN-Matrix network.

  2. Open a compatible web browser (Microsoft ^® Internet Explorer ^® version 7 or above or Mozilla ^® Firefox ^® version 1.3 or above) running on the PC or laptop connected in step 1.

NOTE: See Configuring the Network Settings on page 14 for information on how to configure the network settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

  1. In the address bar, enter the IP address of the Enterprise Controller (default IP address is 192.168.254.254).

The login screen opens in the browser (see figure 9). The controller is security protected.

NOTE: If the web browser cannot access the web-based user interface, the security settings of the web browser may need to be configured (see Browser Configuration on page 200 for more information).

Extron Electronics Matrix Enterprise Controller

Username: Password: Login

Figure 9. VNM Enterprise Controller Login Page

  1. Enter the appropriate username and password. Two profiles are available.

NOTES:

  • The procedures detailed use the administrator username and password to configure the VNM Enterprise Controller. Extron recommends that the administrator username and password be given only to those who require it. Others should use the guest login information to access the controller ensuring that important configuration settings are not changed.
  • Username and password entries are case sensitive.
  • For information on how to change the password, see Changing the login password on page 21.

- Guest — This profile hides the Configuration and Format Editor tabs prohibiting system changes to the Enterprise controller.

  • Guest username — Default: user
    • Guest password — By default, no password is required.

- Administrator — This profile allows full access to all of the web-based user interface configuration settings and is the default configuration profile.

• Administrator username — Default: admin
- Administrator password — By default, no password is required.

  1. Click Login or press . The Devices page opens (see figure 10) and the VNM Enterprise Controller is now ready for configuration and operation.

NOTE: The Devices page only displays devices properly configured to operate with the VNM Enterprise Controller (see the user guides for individual devices for more information). The VNM Enterprise Controller must also be configured properly.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Status Mode Device Id Device Name P Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 192.199.254.254 (11 items) 1021156 60_JMP9508 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.8 1000104 60_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.33 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 1000117 60_VNM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 1000124 60_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.45 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 11211552 60_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.39 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVLA ver3.10.8 620032 60_Rack_Dell 192.168.0.49 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVIA AD ver3.10.8 620097 60_Small_Dell 192.168.0.47 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVLA ver3.10.8 720193 60_Cars 192.168.0.35 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVLA ver3.10.8 720209 60_Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 192.168.254.254 VND 200 DVI ver3.10.8 790808 60_VNM300_Decode 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VND 300 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 790841 60_VNM300_Encode 192.168.0.51 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 Controller: 192.199.254.253 (7 items) 1000101 61_VNM325_Decode_2 192.168.0.34 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 1000120 61_VNM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.42 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 1000121 61_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.43 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 1000125 61_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.48 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 620023 61_MS9508 192.168.0.50 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.8 620091 61_Remote_Decode_2 192.168.0.54 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVLA ver3.10.8 720202 61_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.56 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.8 Actions: Info Connections Configure Format Compression Peripherals License Upgrade Mode Misc Group

Figure 10. Devices Page

The Alarms, Configuration, and System Info pages, are used to configure and operate the Enterprise Controller. The remaining tabs for the Devices, Preset Manager, and Format Editor pages can configure and operate connected devices.

Power Down Procedure

To power down the VNM Enterprise Controller, press the power button on the front of the controller (see Front Panel Features, D on page 7). The power LED turns off.

NOTE: Turning off the controller using the power button removes the main power, but standby power is still supplied to the system.

Single Enterprise Controller Configuration

This section details basic information needed to configure the settings of a single VNM Enterprise Controller. For information on how to set up redundant VNM Enterprise Controllers, see Dual (Redundant) Controller Configuration on page 158.

This section provides information on:

  • Setup Overview
  • Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration
  • Configuring a Single Enterprise Controller as the System Controller
  • Configuring the VN-Matrix Devices

NOTE: For additional configuration information, see Advanced Controller Configuration on page 19.

Setup Overview

  1. Use a network switch to connect the primary VN-Matrix network to the rear panel Ethernet connector (eth0) of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Rear Panel Features on page 9).
  2. Power on the VNM Enterprise Controller, all VN-Matrix devices present in the system, and all necessary devices (see Power Up Procedure on page 10).
  3. Connect a control PC to the VN-Matrix network and navigate to the web-based user interface of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).
  4. Configure the settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration on page 14).
  5. Configure the VNM Enterprise Controller as the VN-Matrix system controller (see Configuring a Single Enterprise Controller as the System Controller on page 17).
  6. Configure the VN-Matrix system devices (see Configuring the VN-Matrix Devices on page 18).
  7. If necessary, update the license of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Controller Firmware and License Updates on page 179).
  8. Power down the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Power Down Procedure on page 12) and all configured devices. After a few seconds, power on the VNM Enterprise Controller and all necessary devices.

Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration

This section details procedures on how to set up and configure a single

VNM Enterprise Controller (see Advanced Controller Configuration on page 19 for additional configuration information).

Configuring the Network Settings

The VNM Enterprise Controller is pre-configured with the following network settings.

IP address: 192.168.254.254

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Gateway: 192.168.254.1

MTU: 1500

NOTE: With these settings, the units connected to the VN-Matrix network must use IP addresses within the range of 192.168.254.2 through 192.168.254.253 and use the same subnet mask.

Use the following procedure to change the network settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller, if necessary.

  1. Log on the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).

  2. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 11, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarma Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Network 3 - Internet Protocol IP Address: 192.168.254.254 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 192.168.254.253 MTU: 1500 Ethernet eth0 MAC address: 00:25:90:14:b0:60 eth1 MAC address: Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 11. Configuration Page — Configuring the Network Settings

  1. Under Device Properties, click the Network link (2).

NOTE: Make sure the VNM Enterprise Controller is not "paired". If it is paired, the unit must first be unpaired (see Unpairing controllers on page 174). Be aware that unpairing and then pairing a VNM Enterprise Controller deletes device files and custom input or output modes.

  1. Change the IP Address, Netmask, Gateway, and MTU fields as necessary (see figure 11, ③ on the previous page).

NOTE: The default value of 1500 in the MTU field is the correct setting in most instances.

  1. Click Apply Changes ( 4 ), to save and apply the configuration.

  2. Configure the IP address of the control PC so that it is within the address range of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

NOTE: Complete this step only if the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller is using a network prefix other than 192.168.254.xxx or subnet mask other than 255.255.255.0.

  1. If necessary, restart the control PC to save the configuration.

Setting the Role

Use the following procedure to set the role of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for login information).

  1. Click the Configuration tab. The Configuration page opens (see figure 12, ①).

Extron Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Rose Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster propertice Cluster Node test Device Mode Device Mode : sgleton Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 12. Configuration Page — Single VNM Enterprise Controller Role Setting

  1. Click the Role link (②).

  2. From the Device Mode drop-down list, select singleton (3).

NOTE: For information on the other device modes, see Role Page on page 22.

  1. Click Apply Changes (④).

NOTE: The web-based user interface returns to the login page after saving the configuration.

Configuring the Transport Protocol

Use the following procedure to configure the transport protocol that will be used throughout the VN-Matrix system (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 13, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration Protocol: multicast Multicast Address default Scheme: Clean Switch: Controllers: 192.158.254.254 192.158.0.27 192.158.0.28 192.158.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 13. Configuration Page — Configuring the Transport Protocol

  1. Click the System config link (②).
  2. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the preferred transport protocol that will be used throughout the VN-Matrix system (③).

NOTE: The default transport protocol is Unicast. For more information on transport protocols, see Transport Protocols Used for Streaming on page 4.

  1. Click Apply Changes (④), to save the configuration.

Configuring a Single Enterprise Controller as the System Controller

This section details how to assign a single VNM Enterprise Controller as the system controller. Before proceeding, make sure the procedures detailed in Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration on page 14 are completed first.

NOTE: For information on how to configure dual VNM Enterprise Controllers as system controllers, see Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller on page 165.

Adding the VNM Enterprise Controller to the Controller List

Use the following procedure to add the VNM Enterprise Controller to the controller list (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 14, ①).

Extron Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Rise Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration Protocol multicast multicast Address default Schema: Clean Switch Controllers: 192.158.254.254 192.158.0.27 192.158.0.28 192.158.0.29 Add Delete License Peer Controller Address Enter the address of a peer controller 192.158.254.254 Cancel Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 14. Configuration Page — Adding Controllers to the Controller List

  1. Click the System config link (②).
  2. Click Add (③). The Peer Controller Address (Add IP) dialog box opens.
  3. Enter the IP address of this VNM Enterprise Controller and click OK (4).

NOTE: If necessary, clear the Controllers field by highlighting the displayed IP addresses and clicking Delete.

  1. Click Apply Changes (⑤) to save the configuration.

The VNM Enterprise Controller restarts the user interface, and is assigned as the system controller.

Configuring the VN-Matrix Devices

For the VNM Enterprise Controller to function properly with connected devices:

  1. Update each VN-Matrix device with the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller and configure each device to operate on the same network as the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  2. Access the VNM Enterprise Controller web-based user interface by entering the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller into the address bar of a web browser.
  3. Use the web-based user interface to select one or more devices from the Devices page and use the Actions menu bar at the bottom of the page to configure the selected devices (see About the Actions Menu Bar on page 40, and Mode Menu (VNC Devices Only) on page 60).

For information on configuring VN-Matrix devices, see the user guide for each device.

Advanced Controller Configuration

The Configuration page contains nine additional pages to configure the general settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller. This section presents a detailed overview of each page. The following configuration pages are available.

• Network Page
- Password Page
- Role Page
• Time Page
- Upgrade Page
- Version Page
- System Config Page
• About the System Info Page
- About the Default Multicast Address

NOTE: The Cluster Page on page 172 and Node Test Page on page 169 appear only when paired VNM Enterprise Controllers are available.

Network Page

The Network page (see figure 15, ①) configures the primary physical (eth0) IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher_logout Device Properties 1 Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Network Internet Protocol 2 Address: 192.168.254.254 3 Mask: 255.255.255.0 4 Gateway: 192.168.254.253 5 MTU: 1500 Ethernet 6 eth0 MAC address: 0:30:48.FC.E7.CA 7 eth1 MAC address: Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 15. Network Page

The following fields are available for configuration.

• IP Address — Enter a valid IP address into this field (2).
- Netmask — Enter a valid subnet mask into this field (3).
• Gateway — Enter a valid gateway address into this field (4).

NOTE: The gateway address field is only required if devices are on different subnets.

• MTU — Enter a valid MTU into this field (5).

NOTE: The default value of 1500 in the MTU field is the correct setting for most systems.

  • eth0 MAC address — This field details the Media Access Control (MAC) address assigned to the primary physical (eth0) IP address (6). This field cannot be modified.
  • eth1 MAC address — This field details the MAC address assigned to the secondary (eth1) IP address (⑦). This field cannot be modified.

For information on how to change the network settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller see Configuring the Network Settings on page 14.

Password Page

The Password page (see figure 16, ①) is used to set the passwords for the administrator and user profiles.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Password ① User ② Password: ③ Password: ④ 4 My Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 16. Password Page

Changing the login password

  1. From the User drop-down list (②), select one of the following account names.

User: user user admin

  • Select user to change the user password.
  • Select admin to change the administrator password.

NOTE: The user name entries (user and admin) cannot be changed.

  1. Enter the desired password in the top Password field (③). The password can consist of letters, numbers, and the underscore character. Password entries are case sensitive.

Password: Password:

  1. Re-enter the password in the bottom Password field (③).
  2. Click Apply Changes (④), to save the password.

Role Page

The Role page is used to set the mode of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Device Mode Device Mode: singleton Logged on admin switcher logout Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 17. Role Page

The following device modes are available.

  • singleton — Select this option when a single VNM Enterprise Controller is the system controller.
  • redundant_primary — Select this option when a VNM Enterprise Controller is running as the first (primary) unit of a redundant pair.
  • redundant_secondary — Select this option when a VNM Enterprise Controller is running as the second (secondary) unit of a redundant pair.

NOTE: If the Device Mode field is set to redundant_primary or redundant_secondary, the cluster properties pages are available for configuration (see About the Cluster Properties Pages on page 172).

For information on setting the different device modes, see:

  • Setting the Role on page 15
    • Setting the Role of the Primary Enterprise Controller on page 161
  • Setting the Role of the Secondary Enterprise Controller on page 162

Time Page

The Time page (see figure 18, ①) is used to manage the clock-related functions available on the VNM Enterprise Controller.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Variable System Properties System config Time 2 Reported Time Tue May 10 13:13:43 EDT 2011 3 Clock Synchronization Enable Clock Synchronization: Sources: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete 4 Clock Settings Set time: 13:00:07 Set date: 05/13/2011 5 Time Zone Set timezone: EST5EOT Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 18. Time Page

Reported Time Panel

This panel (2) contains a read-only field that displays the current system time of the controller that is logged in to.

NOTE: When logged into a cluster, the time of the primary controller is displayed in this field.

Clock Synchronization Panel

This panel (see figure 18, ③ on the previous page) is used to determine the primary clock source for the controller.

NOTE: If there is only one VNM Enterprise Controller in the system, it is not necessary to configure clock synchronization.

All devices in a VN-Matrix system (controllers, encoders, decoders, and recorders) reference a primary system clock, sourced from the controller.

If the Enable Clock Synchronization check box is selected, the controller that is logged in offsets its own time to match the system time of the first VNM Enterprise Controller in the Sources list. If the first controller fails, the system time of the second controller in the list is used as the reference, and so on.

If the Enable Clock Synchronization check box is not selected, the controller that is logged in references its own clock for the system time (in the case of a singleton system with one VNM Enterprise Controller) or the time of the controller acting as the primary (in the case of a paired VNM Enterprise Controller cluster).

NOTES:

  • Only physical IP addresses of VNM Enterprise Controllers should be added to the Sources list. Do not use service (cluster) IP addresses.
  • The order of the controllers in the Sources list should be identical for each VNM Enterprise Controller.

Adding controllers to the Sources list

NOTE: Only IP addresses of valid controller devices can be added to this list.

  1. To add a controller to the list, click the Add button located below the Sources list.

Sources: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete

  1. The following dialog box appears.

Peer Controller Address Enter the address of a peer controller 192.168.254.254 Ok Cancel

  1. Enter the desired IP address and click OK.
  2. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each controller in the VN-Matrix system.
  3. When finished adding controllers, click Apply Changes located at the lower right corner of the web page.

Removing controllers from the Sources list

  1. To remove a controller from the list, select a controller from the Sources list.
  2. Click the Delete button located below the Sources list to remove the selected IP address.
  3. When finished, click Apply Changes located at the lower right corner of the web page.

Enabling clock synchronization

  1. Add all of the controller IP addresses to the Sources list (see Adding controllers to the Sources list on page 24). Do not add service (cluster) IP addresses.
  2. Select the Enable Clock Synchronization check box.

Clock Synchronization Enable Clock Synchronization:

  1. Click Apply Changes, located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the setting.
  2. Repeat this procedure for each controller device listed in the Sources list.

Disabling clock synchronization

  1. Deselect the Enable Clock Synchronization check box.
  2. Click Apply Changes, located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the setting.

Clock Settings Panel

This panel (see figure 18, 4 on page 23) is used to set the local time and date on the controller that is logged into.

NOTES:

  • Do not alter these fields if logged into the cluster IP address.
  • If Enable Clock Synchronization is selected in the Clock Synchronization panel (3), the values in this panel are dimmed.

- Set time — Enter the local time into this field or use the drop-down list button located at the right side of this field to select the desired time.

The time is entered as follows.

- Use the HH:MM:SS (hours:minutes:seconds) format based on the 24-hour clock. For example, 08:25:00 for AM or 20:35:10 for PM.

- Set date — Enter the current date into this field or use the calendar button located at the right side of this field to open a calendar and select the desired date.

The date is entered as follows.

• Use the MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year) format. For example, 05/14/2012.

Setting the time and date

NOTES:

  • Set the time zone before manually setting the time and date (see Setting the time zone, below).
  • Do not alter these fields if logged into the cluster IP address.

1. Make sure Enable Clock Synchronization is not selected.

Clock Synchronization Enable Clock Synchronization:

NOTE: If Enable Clock Synchronization is checked, the Set time and Set date fields are dimmed.

2. Enter the time in the Set time field.

Set time: 11:39:43

- Use the HH:MM:SS (hours:minutes:seconds) format based on the 24-hour clock. For example, 08:25:00 or 20:35:10.

3. Enter or select the date in the Set date field.

Set date: 11/05/2010

• Use the MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year) format. For example, 05/14/2016.

4. Cick Apply Changes, located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the configuration.

Time Zone Panel

This panel (see figure 18, ⑤ on page 23) is used to set the time zone.

- Set timezone — Use the drop-down list located at the right side of this field to select the desired time zone.

NOTE: Setting the time zone automatically adjusts the field in the Reported Time Panel (see Reported Time Panel on page 23).

Setting the time zone

  1. Select the desired time zone from the Set timezone drop-down list.

Set timezone: EST5EDT

  1. Click Apply Changes, located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the configuration.

Upgrade Page

The Upgrade page is used to update the firmware of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

  • For information on updating the firmware of a single VNM Enterprise Controller, see Updating the Firmware of a Single Enterprise Controller on page 181.
  • For information on updating the firmware of dual (redundant) VNM Enterprise Controllers, see Updating the Firmware of Dual (Redundant) Enterprise Controllers on page 181.

Version Page

The Version page (see figure 19, ①) details the versions of firmware running on various components of the VN-Matrix system.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System info Logged on admin svntsher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version 1 1 System Properties System config Version Component Version 2 2 enterprise controller 1.03.15 3 3 matrix controller 3.61 4 heartbeat 3.0.3-2.e5 5 pecomaker 1.0.8-0.e5 6 drod 8.3.7-1 7 linux kernel 2.6.18-194.3.1.e5

Figure 19. Version Page

The following fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

  • enterprise controller — This field ( ②) displays the version of software that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • matrix controller — This field ( 3) displays the version of firmware that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • heartbeat — This field ( 4) displays the Heartbeat clustering software version that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller. The Heartbeat and Pacemaker software work together to create a cluster.
  • pacemaker — This field (5) displays the Pacemaker clustering software version that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller. The Heartbeat and Pacemaker software work together to create a cluster.
  • drbd — This field (6) displays the Distributed Redundant Block Device (DRBD®) version that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller. DRBD is used to manage and sync a cluster of VNM Enterprise Controllers.
  • linux kernel — This field (⑦) displays the version of Linux that is running on the VNM Enterprise Controller.

System Config Page

The System Config page (see figure 20, ①) is used to configure the following sets of control options.

  • Transport protocol (multicast RTP, unicast TCP, unicast RTP)
    • Multicast addressing schemes
  • Clean switch
  • Controller listing

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration ②③④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪⑫⑬⑭⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑳⑴ ①②③④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪⑫⑬⑭⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑯⑰⑱⑲⑳⑺⑳⑮⑱⁰ 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 20. System Config Page

The following options are available for configuration.

- Protocol — This drop-down list (②) sets the default transport protocol. Three transport protocol selections are available.

  • multicast — This transport protocol supports unlimited endpoints (displays) per single stream (source) (see Multicast RTP — An Overview on page 4).
  • unicast — This transport protocol supports up to four endpoints (displays) per single stream (source) (see Unicast RTP — An Overview on page 5).
  • tcp — This transport protocol supports one endpoint (display) per single stream (source) (see Unicast TCP — An Overview on page 5).

- Multicast Address Scheme — This drop-down list (see figure 20, ③ on the previous page) selects the algorithm that calculates the multicast addresses within the VN-Matrix system.

NOTES:

  • This option needs to be set only if multicast is selected in the Protocol field.
  • Class C (255.255.255.0) subnet addresses are supported by default. Contact the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline regarding other addressing schemes.

Three multicast address schemes are available.

  • default — This setting assumes that VN-Matrix devices on the system use Class C (255.255.255.0) subnet addresses. This is the default setting (see About the Default Multicast Address on page 31).
  • octet-0-1-3 — This is specific to systems that have special addressing schemes. This scheme is not suitable for use on standard system configurations and should not be used.
  • octet-1-3 — This scheme is specific to systems that have special addressing schemes. This scheme is not suitable for use on standard system configurations and should not be used.

Select the default multicast address scheme and click Apply Changes (6), located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the setting.

- Clean Switch (VN-Matrix 2xx only) — The clean switch (4) feature allows glitch free transitions when switching between decoded streams. Select the check box to activate the clean switch option or deselect to deactivate the clean switch option. Click Apply Changes (6), located at the lower right corner of the web page, to save the setting.

NOTES:

  • The scale output feature must be activated on the decoder when using clean switch.
  • VN-Matrix 300 / 325 devices do not support Clean Switch and ignore this setting.

- Controllers — This field (5) is used to add the IP addresses of all singleton and service (cluster) controllers. This field is used to keep the VNM Enterprise Controller that is logged into aware of the devices it is controlling and the devices that are managed by the other controllers in the system. This field allows streaming between devices managed by other controllers, as well as editing configuration options of devices connected to other controllers.

NOTE: If only one controller is used in the VN-Matrix system, the IP address of the controller still needs to be added to this field. If the IP address is not added, the Devices page is empty (see About the Actions Menu Bar on page 40).

Adding and removing controllers from this field is similar to adding and removing controllers on the Time page (see page 23).

For information on how to add and remove controllers:

  • Adding controllers to the Sources list on page 24
  • Removing controllers from the Sources list on page 25

About the System Info Page

This page is accessed by selecting the System Info tab (see figure 21).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on:admin switcher logout Property 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 cluster_server singleton singleton hl.memory_usage 3% 3% hl uptime 1 minute 9 seconds server.disk_usage 13% 13% server.memory_usage 13% 14% server uptime 4 hours 4 hours time.delta 0.523090362549 ms -0.151372634888 ms time.last_mark 2015-09-07 08:08:29 2015-09-08 12:13:45 time.last_rejam 2010-10-10 14:47:47 2015-09-07 09:52:50 time.last_switch 2015-09-07 08:03:32 2015-09-08 07:02:16 time.source 192.168.254.10 192.168.254.10

Figure 21. System Info Page

The System Info page displays general information about the VNM Enterprise Controller. If the VN-Matrix system contains multiple controllers, they are displayed on this page by IP address using individual columns. The following information is displayed.

① cluster_server — This field displays the role of the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster as follows:

  • singleton for a single Controller that is NOT running as part of a redundant cluster.
  • primary for a Controller running as part of a cluster, with the unit configured as the redundant_primary unit in control of the cluster.
    • secondary for a Controller running as part of a cluster, with the unit configured as the redundant_secondary unit in control of the cluster.

② hli.memory_usage — This field displays the amount of memory the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster is currently using for the web-based user interface.
③ hli.uptime — This field displays the number of days the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster web-based user interface has been operational.
4 server.disk_usage — This field displays the amount of disk space being used by the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster to keep the VN-Matrix system operational.
⑤ server.memory_usage — This field displays the amount of memory being used by the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster to keep the VN-Matrix system operational.
⑥ server.uptime — This field displays the number of days the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster server has been operational.
⑦ time.delta — This field displays the time difference between the clock of this Controller and the reference time source. This value is normally less than one video frame.
⑧ time.last_mark — This field displays the date and time that the cluster was last updated.
⑨ time.last_rejam — This field displays the date and time that the cluster was force updated.
10 time.last_switch — This field displays the date and time that the cluster last switched roles (primary to secondary or secondary to primary).
⑪ time.source — This field displays the device being used for clock synchronization within the VN-Matrix system.

About the Default Multicast Address

When multicast is chosen as the transport protocol, the VNM Enterprise Controller assigns multicast IP addresses automatically. Three schemes are available. Each of these schemes is designed to calculate and assign a multicast address based on the IP address of an encoder device. This section details how the default multicast address scheme operates.

The default multicast address scheme is used for all VN-Matrix systems. It creates at least one and a maximum of four multicast addresses for each encoder. This is dependant on how many stream elements are selected for transport. The table below details how the IP address is derived.

Default Multicast Address Scheme
Address Type Address Format Description and Comments
VN-Matrix deviceIP addressaaa.bbb.ccc.dddaaa.bbb.ccc. is the subnet.
ddd is a host number in the range 1 to 254.
VN-Matrix devicesubnet mask255.255.255.0Subnet mask set on all devices.
Derived multicastaddress239.192.bbbxxxyy.zzzzzzzzb represents bits 8, 7, and 6.- These bits are always 0.
x represents bits 5, 4, and 3 and is the channel number in the range 0 to 4.- Encoders are always 0.- Recorder channels are 0 to 4 as appropriate.
y represents bits 2 and 1 and is the stream element number.- 00 = audio- 01 = video- 10 = whiteboard- 11 = data
z represents the value of the fourth octet in the host IP address.

An example of how video multicast addresses are created is shown in the table below.

Video Multicast Address Example for IP Address 192.168.0.102
Item Value Binary Comments
Default Value for the First Two Octets
First octet239All multicast addresses in this scheme use these values.
Second octet192
Deriving the Third Octet This is a binary valuederived as follows.
Bits 8, 7, 6 (bbb)000 xxx yy The most significant three bits are always ∅.
Channel number (xxx)bbb 000 yy The channel number for an encoder is ∅.
Video stream element (yy)1bbb xxx ∅1The value for the video stream element is ∅1.
Resulting third octet1000 000 ∅1
Deriving the Fourth Octet
Fourth octet (z)102Takes the value of the last octet in the device IP address.
Final Multicast Address
Video stream multicast address239.192.1.102

For each of the multicast group addresses, the VNM Enterprise Controller creates two port numbers. The table below details how port numbers are derived.

Default Multicast Address Port Numbers
Port Type Port Format Description and Comments
Base port number9004
Derived port number (even)9004 + xxxyyzzzzzzzzEx represents the channel number in the range 0 to 4.- Encoders are always 0.- Recorder channels are 0 to 4 as appropriate.
y represents the stream element number.- 00 = audio- 01 = video- 10 = whiteboard- 11 = data
z represents the value of the last octet in the host IP address.
E represents the last bit.- 0 makes the port number an even value.- 0 + 1 makes the port number an odd value.
Derived port number (odd)9004 + xxxyyzzzzzzzz0 + 1Derived even port number plus 1.

An example of how port numbers are created is shown in the table below.

Video Port Number Example for IP Address 192.168.0.102
Item Value Binary Comments
Base port number9004All multicast port numbers in this scheme start from this value.
Deriving the Port Number Offset
Channel number (xxx)0 000yyzzzzzzzzEThe channel number for an encoder is 0.
Video stream element (yy)1 xxx01zzzzzzzzEThe value for a video stream element is 01.
Fourth octet (zzzzzzzzz)102 xxxyy01100110ETakes the value of the last octet in the device IP address.
Last bit (E)0 xxxyyzzzzzzzzz0Always 0 to make the port number an even value.
Port number offset value716 00001011001100716 is the decimal value of the binary number.
Creating the Final Port NumberNOTE: There are two port numbers associated with each multicast address.The even port number is for RTP stream data. The odd port number is for the associated RTCP data.
Final port number (RTP, video)9720The sum of 9004 and the port offset value, 716.
Second port number (RTCP, video)9721Even port number plus 1.

VN-Matrix Device Configuration and Control

The VN-Matrix Enterprise Controller is the center of an audio and video streaming network that connects and controls VN-Matrix hardware encoders, decoders, recorders, and software decoders.

The controller can control all VN-Matrix devices residing on the same network. Each matrix device must have its system controller IP address set to the IP address of the controller.

The matrix devices are monitored and configured from the device list page. The Preset Manager page builds connections between VN-Matrix devices. The presets are saved for later use to enable rapid system configuration.

This section provides instructions on how to view VN-Matrix codecs, recorders, and software decoders on a VNM Enterprise Controller, configure the devices for proper operation, and to operate those devices in a VN-Matrix network.

Sections include:

• Devices Page Overview
• About the Devices Page
• About the Actions Menu Bar
- Actions Menu Bar Overview
• Device Configuration
• VNM 200/225/300/325 Configuration
• VNM 250 Configuration
- Recorder Configuration
• VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration
• About the Switcher Page

For the VNM Enterprise Controller to operate and control devices on the network:

  • Update each VN-Matrix device with the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller and configure them to operate on the same network as the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • Access the VNM Enterprise Controller web-based user interface from a control computer on the same network by entering the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller into the address bar of a web browser (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).
  • Use the web-based user interface to select one or more devices from the Devices page and use the Actions menu bar at the bottom of the page to configure the selected device (see About the Devices Page on the next page).

For information on the configuration of VN-Matrix devices, see the user guide for each device.

Devices Page Overview

The VN-Matrix Enterprise Controller is the center of an audio and video streaming network that connects and controls VN-Matrix hardware encoders, decoders, recorders, and software decoders. The controller provides support for third party system control using the HLI protocol.

The following VN-Matrix devices are discussed in this section:

Device Description
VNM 2xx Series DVI, HDMI, and RGB encoders, decoders and codecs
VNM 3xx Series 3G-SDI codecs
VNR 100 Single channel recorder/player
VNM Recorder Five-channel recorder/player
VNS 104 Multi-stream software decoder

To use the devices in a VN-Matrix system, the Enterprise Controller is required. The devices are added to the system, then configured for control from the EC. The controller connects the devices together in smaller systems to support specific operations and tasks using the Preset Manager (see Preset Manager on page 92).

About the Devices Page

The Devices page lists all VN-Matrix devices detected on the network and is the main page for configuring and managing devices. This is also the default page opened after logging in (see figure 22).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Status Mode Device U a Device Name IP Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 192.168.254.254 (11 items) ● 1021158 69_JVP0600 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNE 200 DVI var3.10.8 ● 1080164 69_VMM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.33 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 1080117 69_VMM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 1080124 69_VMM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.45 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 11211552 69_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.39 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 ● 620032 69_Rack_Dell 192.168.0.49 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI-AD var3.10.8 ● 620097 69_Smat_Dell 192.168.0.47 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 ● 720103 69_Cara 192.168.0.35 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 ● 720200 69_Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 192.168.254.254 VND 200 DVI var3.10.8 ● 790038 69_VMM300_Decode 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VND 300 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 790841 69_VMM300_Encode 192.168.0.51 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI var4.6.8 Controller: 192.168.254.253 (7 items) ● 1080101 61_VMM325_Decode_2 192.168.0.34 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 1080120 61_VMM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.42 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 1080121 61_VMM325_Encode_3 192.168.0.43 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 1080125 61_VMM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.48 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 ● 620023 61_MSS500 192.168.0.50 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVI var3.10.8 ● 620091 61_Remote_Decode_2 192.168.0.54 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 ● 730302 61_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.56 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DVI var3.10.

Figure 22. Devices Page

NOTE: If devices are added after the page has opened, they might not automatically appear in this list. Refresh the page or click the Devices tab to update the list.

When a VN-Matrix device is detected and listed on the Devices page, an entry is always displayed even if the device is subsequently disconnected. All valid devices are listed by device name and followed by their current IP address.

NOTE: Some listed devices will not show an IP address. These devices are inactive. A device is considered inactive if it is disconnected from the network or powered down.

The columns on the devices page detail important information about VN-Matrix devices. Each recognized device is listed.

A Status Icons — The status of a device is indicated by a colored icon.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 2

A device under active control and connected to the VN-Matrix network.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 3

A device that is not under active control (not online in the VN-Matrix network).

B Mode Icons — The current configuration status of each device is identified by an icon.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 4

An undefined device. This icon is shown when a codec device is connected to the VN-Matrix system for the first time and before it has been configured as a source or a display.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 5

A VN-Matrix 200 / 225 device configured as an encoder (source).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 6

A VN-Matrix 200 / 225 device configured as a decoder (display).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 7

A VN-Matrix 300 / 325 device configured as an encoder (source).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 8

A VN-Matrix 300 / 325 device configured as a decoder (display).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 9

A VNE 250 encoder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 10

A VND 250 decoder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 11

A VNR 100 recorder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 12

A VN-Matrix 5-channel recorder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 13

A single sub-channel of a VN-Matrix 5-channel recorder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 14

A VNS 104 software decoder.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 15

A single VNS 104 window. The lit window indicates the position of the window with active streaming (example icon indicates window 1).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About the Devices Page - 16

NOTE: A warning triangle over the device icon represents an issue or a problem with the device (such as the device not having an active source or display connection). Search for the device on the Alarms Page (see page 153) to see if the device contains an active alarm.

Device ID — The devices unique identifier is shown in this column.
Device Name — The device name is shown in this field. To change the name of the device, see Device Name in the Configure Menu on page 44.
E IP Address — The IP address of the device is shown in this column.

NOTE: The IP address of a device is shown only if the device is currently present on the network and configured to use the VNM Enterprise Controller.

F Controller — This column shows the IP address of the device acting as the system controller.

G Device Type — This column shows the type of device connected to the VN-Matrix system.
Version — This column shows the current firmware version installed on each device.

NOTE: To avoid compatibility issues, all devices of the same model must have the same version of firmware installed on each device.

Sorting Devices by Column

Columns can be sorted by clicking directly on any of the column names. Click a column name to sort the list in ascending or descending order. Figure 23 shows the devices sorted by device ID number. The Device Id column (1) is darkened and contains an ▲ icon to indicate the devices are sorted by the Device ID number in ascending order.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuratio 1 Devices Format Editor System Info Status Node Device Id ▲ Device Name IP Address Control Controller: 10.100.245.00 (11 Items) ... 501 ... 1021158 60_JMP9600 10.100.245.42 10.100 ... 301 ... 1080104 60_VNN325_Encode_2 10.100.245.34 10.100 ... 201 ... 1080117 60_VNN325_Decode_1 10.100.245.26 10.100

Figure 23. Sort by Device ID

Hovering over the right side of a column name reveals a drop-down arrow that, when clicked, accesses the advanced column sorting menu (see figure 24). Use this menu to sort columns in ascending or descending order and populate the page with necessary information by adding or removing columns. A checkmark indicates the column is visible.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Controller: 192.168.254.254 (10 Items) 1021158 60_JMP9600 1080104 60_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.33 1080117 60_VNM325_Decode_1 1080124 60_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.33 11211552 60_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.34 620032 60_Rack_Dell 192.168.0.35 620097 60_Small_Dell 192.168.0.36 720193 60_Cars 192.168.0.37 720200 60_Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 790008 60_VNM300_Decode 192.168.0.39 Status Serial Num Device Name IP Address Controller Device Type Version Source Source Mode userParam1 userParam2 userParam3 Locale Stream Source Stream Dest on:admin switcher logout Type Version Group

Figure 24. Advanced Column Sorting

Sorting Devices by Group

Devices can be sorted in groups using the Group By menu (see figure 25, A).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged oncadms switcher logout Status Mode Device Id Device Name IP Address Controller Device Type Version Mode display (3 items) 1080125 VM325_Decode 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI 720200 Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 192.168.254.254 VNO 200 DV 790041 VM300_Decode 192.168.0.39 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI Mode source (6 items) 1021150 JMP9000 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-A 1080124 VM325_Encode 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI 620032 Rack_Del 192.168.0.35 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-AD 720153 Cars 192.168.0.37 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV 790068 VM300_Encode 192.168.0.33 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI None Status Mode Type Controller Version Source userParam1 userParam2 userParam3 Expand All Group AI http:// Local Intranet 100%

Figure 25. Grouping Devices

The following group options are available.

NOTES:

  • After selecting a grouping option, groups can be further sorted using column sorting. Figure 25 shows the devices grouped by mode and sorted by device ID in ascending order.
  • Grouped devices can be expanded and collapsed by clicking on the square icon located next to the group name (see figure 25, B).

- None — Removes group sorting.

• Status — Organizes the devices into the following groups.

- Active - No device

• Mode — Organizes the devices into the following groups.

  • Display - Recorder
  • Source - None

  • Type — Groups the devices by their description (type). For example, all VN-Matrix 200/225/250/300/325 codec devices are grouped together, all VN-Matrix decoder devices are grouped together, all VN-Matrix encoder devices are grouped together, and so on.

  • Controller — Groups the devices by system controller. When a VN-Matrix system contains more than one system controller, use this option to link the devices to each system controller.
    • Version — Groups the devices by firmware version.
  • Source — Groups each source by device ID. Displays or connections associated with each source are also grouped together. Similar devices that are not connected to a source are also grouped together.
  • Expand All — Reveals all the devices. The devices are displayed under the appropriate group name.
  • Collapse All — Hides all devices. Only the group names are displayed on the page.

About the Actions Menu Bar

The Actions menu bar, located at the bottom of the Devices page when a device is selected, is used to check information, configure, license, and upgrade controlled devices. Actions menu items change with the selected device (see figure 26).

Encoder

Actions:InfoConnectionsConfigureFormatCompressionPeripheralsLicenseUpgradeMode▼Misc▼Group▼
Decoder
Actions:InfoConnectionsConfigureFormatPeripheralsLicenseUpgradeMode▼Misc▼Group▼
VN-Matrix Recorder
Actions:InfoRecorderConfigureLicenseUpgradeMisc▼Group▼
VN-Matrix Recorder Sub-channel
Actions:InfoRecorderLicenseMisc▼Group▼
VNS 104
Actions:InfoConnectionsConfigureAudioMisc▼Group▼
VNS 104 Decode Windows
Actions:InfoFormatMisc▼Group▼

Figure 26. Actions Menu Bar

Using the Actions menu bar, the following sections provide individual configuration and connection details for the various VN-Matrix devices.

Click a device on the Devices page (see figure 27, ①) to open its action bar. Click an action bar menu item to open a dialog box with configuration options for its intended operation.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System info Logged on admin switcher logout Status Mode Device Id Device Name IP Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 10.180.245.64 (11 items) 1 1821156 50_IMP900 10.100.245.42 10.100.245.60 VNE 200 DVI var3.10.8 1 1850164 50_VNM325_Encode_2 10.100.245.34 10.100.245.60 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 1 1850117 50_VNM325_Decode_1 10.100.245.26 10.100.245.60 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 1 1850124 50_VNM325_Encode_1 10.100.245.71 10.100.245.60 VNC 325 3G-SDI var4.6.8 1 112T1552 50_Ramole_Dcode_1 10.100.245.56 10.100.245.60 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 1 520632 50_Rack_Del 10.100.245.43 10.100.245.60 VNC 200 DVI-AD var3.10.8 1 520697 50_Small_Del 10.100.245.31 10.100.245.60 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 1 720193 50_Cars 10.100.245.44 10.100.245.60 VNC 200 DVI-A var3.10.8 1 720200 50_Rack_Dcode 10.100.245.45 10.100.245.60 VND 200 DVI var3.10.8 1 790698 50_VNM300_Decode 10.100.245.39 10.100.245.60 VND 300 3D-SDI var4.6.8 1 790641 50_VNM300_Encode 10.100.245.52 10.100.245.60 VNC 300 3D-SDI var4.6.8 Controller: 10.180.245.64 (7 items) 1 1850161 51_VNM325_Decode_2 10.100.245.25 10.100.245.61 VNC 325 3D-SDI var4.6.8 1 1850129 51_VNM325_Decode_1 10.100.245.37 10.100.245.61 VNC 325 3D-SDI var4.6.8 1 1850121 51_VNM325_Encode_2 10.100.245.24 10.100.245.61 VNC 325 3D-SDI var4.6.8 1 1850125 51_VNM325_Encode_1 10.100.245.22 10.100.245.61 VNC 325 3D-SDI var4.6.8 1 820673 51_MS95999 10.100.245.49 10.100.245.61 VNC 209 DVI var3.10.8 1 820691 B1_Remole_Decode_2 10.100.245.39 10.100.245.61 VNC 209 DVLA var3.10.8 1 79ZQ99 B1_Remole_Decode_1 10.100.245.48 10.100.245.61 VNC 299 DVI var3.10.8 Actions: Info Connections Configure Format Compression Peripherals License Upgrade Mode Misc Group By

Figure 27. Encoder Actions Bar

The VNM 325 is selected in the example in figure 27 (outlined in red). Notice the check in the device selection box. When a device is selected, the Actions: bar at the bottom of the page enables all options, connections, and configuration for the device.

Actions Menu Bar Overview

The Actions menu bar buttons perform similar functions regardless of the device selected. The following is an overview of each button and the devices they are associated with.

  • Info (all devices) — The Info button provides information about the device including the Device ID, Device Name, IP address (control and streaming), current status (active, inactive), and the network link status (poor, good). These items change depending on the selected device.
  • Connections (Encoders, Decoders, VNS 104) — The Connections button provides a real-time display of the device connections.
  • Configure (Encoders, Decoders, VNS 104) — The Configure button opens a dialog that provides the ability to name the device and enable the text overlay on the local display.
  • Format (Encoders, Decoders, VNS 104) — The Format button opens a dialog that shows the current status of the device and allows selection and control of the input or output format, video and audio properties, and other configuration options depending on the selected device.
  • Compression (Encoders and Decoders) — The Compression button opens a dialog used to configure the audio and video compression of the encoder and set the bitrate.
  • Peripherals (Encoders and Decoders) — The Peripherals button configures the serial control port of the selected device.
  • License (Encoders, Decoders, and Recorders) — The License button opens a dialog that shows information about the features that are enabled on the device.
  • Upgrade (Encoders, Decoders, and VNR 100) — The Upgrade button opens a dialog that allows a firmware upgrade file to be downloaded to the selected device.
  • Mode (Encoders, Decoders) — The Mode button opens a drop-down list used to set a selected codec device to either encoder or decoder operation.
  • Misc (All) — The Misc button drop-down list has five options that include a real-time bandwidth monitor, a delete device function to remove the selected device from the device list, a multiple device licensing upgrade application, an OSD ID editor, and an application to issue HLI commands to the selected device.
  • Recorder (Recorders only) — The Recorder button opens the recording browser to allow a user to select previously recorded streams. The browser provides information for each recording and allows users to manage the recordings of a selected device.
  • Audio (VNS 104 only) — The Audio button opens the Configure Audio Settings dialog. This dialog sets the level for the audio stream and also allows it to be muted.

NOTE: Only one of the connected video streams is able to decode audio.

Device Configuration

The next section describes the general configuration of VN-Matrix devices and applies to VN-Matrix hardware encoders, decoders, and codecs.

  • For details on the configuration of the VNM-250 see VNM 250 Configuration on page 64.
    • For VN-Matrix recorders see Recorder Configuration on page 79.
  • For software decoders see VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration on page 83.
  • For a full description of a specific function, see the user guide for the device.

The menus change slightly between the encoders, decoders, and codecs. Where differences exist, they are noted.

VNM 200/225/300/325 Configuration

Info Menu

Click Info (see figure 26 on page 40) to open the Device Information dialog box to display basic information for the selected VN-Matrix device (see figure 28).

Device Information (1021150) Device Summary Device ID: 1021150 Device Name: device1021150 IP Address: 192.168.0.31 Device Status: Active Good Link Status:

Figure 28. Device Information (Encoder or Decoder Shown)

The following fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

• Device ID — Displays the device ID number of the selected device.
• Device Name — Displays the name of the selected device.
• IP Address — Displays the IP address of the selected device.
- Device Status — The status of the selected device. Normally it shows Active and the quality of the link is indicated in the Link Status field. If the device is missing or cannot be contacted on the network, it shows No Device.
- Link Status — A link status of Good indicates little or no management packet loss. A link status of Fair indicates a small amount of packet loss. A link status of Poor indicates a bad link; investigate whether the link to the device has sufficient bandwidth to carry the data and management traffic.

Connections Menu

When devices are part of an active (launched) preset, the columns populate with the connection details of the selected VN-Matrix device (see figure 29). Click Connections to open the Connections dialog box.

VNM 200/225

Connections
ViceAudioWhiteboardData
Description id Source Destination Locale Slot61_Decode2.videwindow 620023.1.0 0 239.192.1.42:5600 ext 061_Decode2.audiowindow 620023.0.0 0 239.192.0.42:9088 ext 061_Decode2.wbWindow 620023.2.0 0 239.192.2.42:10112 ext 061_Decode2.dataWindow 629023.5.0 0 239.192.3.42:10824 ext 0
Description id Source Destination Locale Slot61_Decode3.videwindow 620009.1.0 0 239.192.1.42:5600 ext 061_Decode3.audiowindow 620009.0.0 0 239.192.0.42:9088 ext 0

VNM 300/325

Connections
VideoAudioFEC RowsFEC Cols
Description id61_VNM300_Decode.videowindow 79008.1.061_VNM300_Decode.audiewindow 79008.0.061_VNM300_Decode.rowfscWindow 79008.5.061_VNM300_Decode.cefscWindow 79008.4.0
Source010010
Destination239.192.1.52:9620239.192.0.52:9108239.192.2.52:10132239.192.3.52:10644
Locale slotext 0 ext 0ext 0ext 0ext 0

Figure 29. Connections Dialog Box

NOTE: The VN-Matrix 3xx connections dialog changes the Whiteboard column to FEC Rows and the Data column to FEC Cols.

The following fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

• Description — For a source, this field is the name of devices receiving a stream from the selected source. For a display, it has the name of the device providing the stream.
- id — Displays the device ID of the connected device.
- Source — For unicast transports, displays the IP address and port number of the source stream. For multicast transports this value is zero on an encoder.
- Destination — Displays the IP address and port number of the stream receiver device.
- Locale — This field displays loc when the data streaming between source and display are controlled by the same controller (loc). It displays ext if the data stream is exported across two different controllers or if the transport protocol is multicast RTP.
- Slot — This field displays information depending on the type of transport protocol used.

- For unicast RTP, the stream number is displayed. Four streams are available, numbered 0, 1, 2, and 3.

- For multicast RTP, this field displays for a source and -1 for a display.

Configure Menu

Click Configure to open the Configure Device Settings dialog box to set global parameters specific to the VN-Matrix 200/225 and 3xx devices (see figure 30).

Encoder Decoder
Configure Device Settings (11211570) Device Setup Device Name: VNE300_3 Mode: enable Identify Source: User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3: Networking Multicast TTL: 2

Configure Device Settings (11211558) Device Setup Device Name: VND300_3 Mode: enable Enable Splash ✓ Screen: Identify Display: ✓ Identify Source: ✓ User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3: Networking Multicast TTL: 2

Figure 30. Configure Device Settings

Device Setup panel

  • Device Name — Enter a name for the device in this field. This name appears in the device list and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and the underscore character. Spaces are not allowed.
    • Mode — A device can be configured using one of four modes.

- enable — This is normal operation.

  • disable — Use this mode on a source device to stop streaming to the network, but still show pass-through output. A display device outputs a splash screen.
  • standby — Use this mode on a source device to stop streaming and also disable pass-through output. On a display device this mode disables all output.
  • test — Use this mode on a device (source or display) to show a splash screen with the words "Test Mode". Normal streaming is suspended.

  • Enable Splash Screen (Decoder Only) — Check this box to display a splash screen on the video output when no video stream is available.

  • Identify Display (Decoder Only) — Check this box to show the device name on the connected display. The position and appearance of the label can be modified (see OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders) on page 62).
  • Identify Source (Encoder) — Check this box to display the name of the device on the image output to the loop-through connector. The source resolution and frame rate are displayed on the image that is otuput to the loop-through connector. The position and appearance of the label can be modified (see OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders) on page 62).
  • Identify Source (Decoder) — Check this box to display the name of the currently connected encoder on the connected display. The position and appearance of the label can be modified (see OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders) on page 62).
  • User Param [1, 2, 3] — These fields are used to enter user defined parameter names. When entering HLI or CLI commands into a control program from an external control system, the parameter names identify devices. The names can be comprised of letters, numbers, and the underscore character. Spaces are not allowed.

Networking panel

- Multicast TTL — This field specifies the number of hops multicast traffic can make between routed domains when it exits a source. It is not used for TCP or unicast RTP traffic.

Format Menu (Encoders)

Click Format to open the Source Format dialog box used to view information about the incoming source. It is also used to make adjustments to the signal and set the EDID options (see figure 31). The menu differs between the VN-Matrix 200/225 and VN-Matrix 3xx series.

Source Format (720000) Status Source: active Stream: (1, 1) Lock: 1 Measured Video Properties Current Node: 1600 x 1200 Bits DMT Type: analog Line Count: 1250 Active Points: 1600 First Point: 488 Phase: 10 Measured Audio Properties Status: 46kHz Input Node: auto Phase: 12 Color Space: 0238 Macrovision Defect: Blocking Blocking: auto Plots: Lines: END From Monitor: MDC-CCS070G-DVI To Source: transparent

VN-Matrix 200/225 Series VN-Matrix 3xx Series

Source Format (P9044) Status Source: active Stream (1, 1) Lock 1 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1520 x 1006.25p SWPE Type: mini Line Count: 1125 Line Period (ms): 35.555 Active Pixels: 1820 Active Linear: 1680 First Plant: 236 First Unit: 42 Phase: 0 Measured Audio Properties Status Auxiliary Audio Audio Channels: 8 Audio Type: none Transport Mode: transparent Compression: none Groups: 1 2 3 4 FEC Mode: non-Column FEC Overloaded: 50% (16 Mbps) FEC Frames: 4 FCC Column: 4

Figure 31. Source Format Dialog Box

NOTES:

  • The Status panel and Measured Video Properties panel contain fields that are read-only (cannot be edited).
  • This menu works differently when a decoder or a display device is selected. For information on how to use the menu for decoders and display devices, see Format Menu (Decoders) on page 50.

Status panel

  • Source — This field details the video input connection. Active means a video source is recognized at the input. Unplugged means no source is connected or there is no active video.
  • Stream — When this field displays (1, 1) the source is recognized and ready to stream. When this field displays (0, 1) the source is either not connected or not recognized.
  • Lock — If this field displays a value of 0, the VN-Matrix device has not locked on to the incoming source. A value of 1 indicates the VN-Matrix device has locked on to the source.

Measured Video Properties panel

This panel provides information about currently connected sources. The following fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

- Current Mode — This field details the current video resolution of the connected source. A complete list of supported resolutions is available in the VN-Matrix 200, VN-Matrix 225, VN-Matrix 250, VN-Matrix 300, and VN-Matrix 325 User Guides.

- Type — This field details the type of video format that is connected to the source.

NOTE: The VN-Matrix 200/225 reports DVI or analog. The VN-Matrix 3xx reports SDI.

• Line Count — This field details the total number of lines used in the connected source.
- Line Period (ms) — This field details how often the lines of information are updated in milliseconds (ms).
- Active Pixels — This field details the number of active pixels used in the connected source.
- Active Lines — This field details the number of active lines used in the connected source.
- First Pixel — This field details the position of the first active pixel in a line.
- First Line — This field details the position of the first active line in a frame.
- Phase — This field details the current waveform phase setting. The phase setting can be adjusted in the Input panel (see below).

Measured Audio Properties panel (VN-Matrix 200/225 only)

This panel provides the sampling rate of the incoming audio source for the VN-Matrix 200/225. The line is blank for the VN-Matrix 3xx (see Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only) on page 48 for audio details of the VN-Matrix 3xx).

Input panel (VN-Matrix 200/225 only)

This panel is only active for VN-Matrix 200/225 models and provides timing information for the connected analog sources.

NOTE: This panel is only active when configuring analog source types.

  • Mode — VN-Matrix codecs support automatic video format detection for most standard source types. However, if a non-standard source type is used, the video format can be manually specified using this drop-down list.
  • Phase — This drop-down list is used to adjust the waveform phase setting. This value should normally be set to auto. However, if a waveform suitable for automatic detection is not available, manually select a phase value to provide better image quality. Automatic phase adjustment maximizes the contrast between pixels. A good image for phase adjustment should have adjacent black and white pixels.

NOTE: Phase adjustment is only required on analog sources.

- Color Space — This drop-down list selects between RGB and YPbPr video source types.

NOTES:

  • When auto is selected from the Mode drop-down list, the color space cannot be determined.
  • Component sources are detected as an RGsB video type.

- Macrovision Defeat — Macrovision copy protection is often applied to commercially produced videos and DVDs. This adds additional sync level pulses to the waveform which must be ignored for proper video detection.

  • Select this check box if the source contains content protected with Macrovision copy protection.
  • Deselect this check box for all other sources. Selecting this check box for non-Macrovision sources may result in tearing at the top of the image.

Blanking panel (VN-Matrix 200/225 Only)

- Blanking — This drop-down list adjusts the blanking setting. This value is normally set to auto. However, if it is important that pixels on the very edge of the display are visible, setting this value to manual activates the Pixels and Lines fields so that offsets can be entered. The offsets are made relative to the First Pixel and First Line values of the source format selected on the Format Editor page (see Format Menu (Encoders) on page 45).

NOTE: Blanking adjustment is only required on analog sources.

  • Pixels — This field is used to enter an offset to adjust the horizontal blanking. The value is entered as a positive (for example, 6) or negative (for example, -6) integer.
  • Lines — This field is used to enter an offset to adjust the vertical blanking. The value is entered as a positive (for example, 6) or negative (for example, -6) integer.

EDID panel (VN-Matrix 200/225 Only)

  • From Monitor — This field reports the EDID of the locally connected display. If no display is present or the display does not support EDID, No Device is reported. This is a read-only field (cannot be edited).
  • To Source — This drop-down list specifies the EDID device type the VN-Matrix unit identifies itself as when connected to a source. Values are chosen from any of the stored EDID codes used on previously connected devices.

NOTE: If the transparent option is selected, the EDID of the last display or the currently connected display is reported.

Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only)

The VN-Matrix 3xx models replace the Input, Blanking, and EDID panels with an Ancillary Audio panel for audio configuration (see figure 32). Configuration options change depending upon the model and the transport mode selection. The differences are noted in the following descriptions.

Ancillary Audio Audio Channels: 16 none Transport Mode: transparent Groups 1 2 3 4 FEC Mode: none FEC Rows: 0 Audio Type: Compression: none FEC Overhead: 0% (0 Mbps) FEC Columns: 0

Transparent Mode

Ancillary Audio Audio Channels: 2 Transport Mode: stereo Stereo Pairs 1 2 3 FEC Mode: none FEC Rows: 0 Audio Type: no data Compression: pack20 FEC Overhead: FEC Columns: 0

Stereo Mode (VNM 325 Only)
Figure 32. Ancillary Audio Menus

• Audio Channels — This field reports the number of available audio channels.

• VN-Matrix 300: 4, 8, 12, or 16 depending on the number of licensed groups.
• VN-Matrix 325: Reads 16 when the transport mode is set to Transparent. Reads 2 when the transport mode is set to Stereo.

- Transport Mode — A drop-down list with two selections:

- Transparent: Audio is transported in groups of 4 channels. Multiple groups (see Selection Boxes below) can be selected for transport with payloads depending on the data: SDI (8 Mbps) or HDSDI/3G-SDI (16 Mbps).

Transparent mode is supported on both the VN-Matrix 300 and 325.

- Stereo: Audio is transported in stereo pairs. Only one pair can be selected at a time. Stereo pairs have a payload of 2.4 Mbps.

Stereo mode is supported on the 325 only.

- Selection Boxes — These boxes (Groups or Stereo Pairs), when checked, indicate different items depending on the selected transport mode.

- Transparent: Each box, when selected, indicates the number of audio groups that are transported with the video stream.

- VN-Matrix 300: The number of groups depends on the license of the connected device. The VN-Matrix 300 series can be licensed for up to four groups (see Audio Channels above).

• VN-Matrix 325: Up to four groups can be selected.

- Stereo: The selection boxes indicate the stereo pair selected for transport with the video stream. Only one stereo pair can be selected at a time.

- Audio Type (Stereo mode only) — This field reports the format of the audio data stream.

• PCM 24, 48 KHz: HDSDI and 3GSDI (typical)
• PCM 20, 48 KHz: SDI (typical)

- Compression (Stereo mode only) — This drop-down list selects the compression to apply to the stereo audio signal. The normal bitrate for a stereo pair is 2.4 Mbps.

  • Pack 24: Sends all audio (20 or 24 bits) without compression and sends audio control data once per second.
  • Pack 20: Same as Pack 24 except the least significant 4 bits of audio data are removed and set to zero. The bit rate is 1.92 Mbps.
  • Pack 16: Same as Pack 24 except the least significant 8 bits of audio data are removed and set to zero. The bit rate is 1.54 Mbps.
  • Decimate 2: Same as Pack 16 except the sample rate is reduced to half. The bit rate is 768 Kbps.
  • Decimate 4: Same as Pack 16 except the sample rate is reduced to one-quarter. The bit rate is 384 Kbps.

- FEC Mode (Transparent mode only) — FEC (Forward Error Correction) can be applied to the ancillary audio to protect against errors caused by packet loss when the data is transported over a network. FEC enables the decoder to recreate data that has been lost or corrupted without the need for retransmission. The FEC data is sent separate from the image and ancillary data. The level of FEC can be set to protect against different levels of data loss. This produces a corresponding change in the amount of data that is transported and thus, the bit rate is increased or decreased in proportion to the amount of FEC applied.

- FEC Overhead (Transparent mode only) — This field reports the calculated overhead as a percentage of the signal bitrate.

- FEC Rows (Transparent mode only) — Row FEC protects against the loss of a single packet. It is the simplest method of protection and results in the lowest overhead in terms of bitrate and latency. However, it is not able to handle consecutive (burst) packet loss. Refer to the VN-Matrix 3xx Series User Guide for details on how to configure this setting.

- FEC Columns (Transparent mode only) — Column FEC protects against burst packet losses, providing that the burst of packet losses are not in the same row. Column FEC is known as 1D (dimension) FEC, as correction data is only calculated on one dimension. Refer to the VN-Matrix 3xx Series User Guide for details on how to configure this setting.

NOTES:

  • The values set in the FEC row and column drop-down lists depend on the quality of the network link in use.
  • The FEC data can add a large overhead to the overall bit rate. Some settings, while providing a high level of reliability, are inefficient.
  • Settings that add little overhead may not provide a sufficient level of protection on networks with a poor Quality of Service (QoS).
  • The recommended starting point for the FEC row and column error correction is 5,5.

Format Menu (Decoders)

When a decoder device is selected, click Format to open the Display Format dialog box used to configure the output format of a decoder (see figure 33 and figure 34). The menu differs slightly depending on the selected VN-Matrix device.

NOTES:

• The Current Format field is read-only (cannot be edited).
- This menu works differently when an encoder or a source device is selected. For information on how to use the menu for encoders and source devices, see Format Menu (Encoders) on page 45.

VN-Matrix 200/225 Display Format
Display Format (11211560) Current Format: splash_screen 1024 x 768 60p DMT Output Format: auto Scale To Output Format: Sync on Green: Playback Delay (s) 0.1

Figure 33. VN-Matrix 200/225 Display Format Dialog Box

- Current Format — This read-only field displays the current output video format of the selected VN-Matrix device.

  • When the Output Format field is set to auto, this field displays the resolution of the decoded stream. If an exact match is not possible, then this field displays Special followed by the available resolution closest to the decoded stream.
  • When the Output Format field is not set to auto, this field displays the chosen resolution.
  • If the Enable Splash Screen check box is selected and the device is not connected to a stream (or not decoding), this field displays splash screen 1024x768.

- Output Format (VN-Matrix 200/225 only) — This drop-down lists contain preset output video formats, plus an additional auto option. Selecting a preset format forces the output of the VN-Matrix device to the selected format. Selecting auto matches the output video format to the native resolution of the decoded stream.

NOTE: When a preset output format is selected, the Scale to Output Format check box must be selected.

- Scale to Output Format (VN-Matrix 200/225 only) — When selected, this check box enables scaling of the decoded stream to the resolution selected in the Output Format drop-down list. Upscaling and downscaling are supported.

NOTES:

  • For smooth playback, select an output format with approximately the same frame rate as the source.
  • Scaling adds two frames of latency to the delay between source capture and display output.
  • Scaling is disabled when auto is selected in the Output Format drop-down list or when the scaling ratio is 1:1

- Sync on Green (SoG) (VN-Matrix 200/225 only) — This check box, when selected, enables Sync on Green on the output analog waveform. When SoG is enabled, separate horizontal and vertical syncs are present on the analog output.

NOTE: SoG is currently limited to the output of progressive modes. If an interlace mode is selected, the SoG request is ignored.

- Playback Delay (s) — This field is used to enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the display waits before playing back the source stream.

VN-Matrix 3xx Display Format
Display Format (1080123) Current Format: 1920 x 1080 25p SMPTE Genlock: Payback Delay (s): 0.1

Figure 34. VN-Matrix 3xx Series Display Format Dialog Box

The VN-Matrix 3xx series display format dialog box shares two configuration options with the VN-Matrix 200/225:

  • Current Format
  • Playback Delay (s)

These configuration options function identically to those on the VN-Matrix 2xx series Display Format menu.

Genlock is added to the VN-Matrix 3xx menu, selected with the check box:

- Genlock — When selected, enables a local SDI source with the same refresh rate as the streamed video to act as a digital genlock signal to synchronize the decoder.

Compression Menu (Encoders Only)

When an encoder device is selected, click Compression to open the Compression Settings dialog box used to set the amount of compression on the encoded source (see figure 35).

Compression Settings (5400847) Video Compression Transform: graphics Luma Compression: 5 Chrome Compression: Luma/Chrome Lock: ✓ Temporal Compression: Refresh Rate: 1 Threshold: 1 Chrome Threshold: Motion: 0 - No motion compression Audio Compression Compression: No compression (~3 Mbps) Bitrate Limit Mode: None Target Rate (Mbps): 0 Frame Drop (%): 1

VNx 200/225 Series VNx 3xx Series

Compression Settings (1000104) Video Compression Luna Compression: 4 Chroma Compression: Luna/Chrome Loci: ✓ Temporal Compression: Refresh Rate: 1 Threshold: 1 Chroma Threshold: Bitrate Limit Mode: None Target Rate (Mbps): 0 Frame Drop (%): 0

Figure 35. Compression Dialog Box

The configuration options have a direct effect on the network bandwidth required for the encoded stream.

  • Increasing compression decreases the network bandwidth requirements for the stream.
    • Decreasing compression increases the network bandwidth requirements for the stream.
    Alternatively, the desired bandwidth can be set using the Bitrate panel (see page 53) and the VN-Matrix adjusts compression and frame rate to meet the specified bandwidth limit.

NOTE: This menu is only available when an encoder device is selected.

Video Compression panel

• Transform (VN-Matrix 2xx only) — Two transform types are supported.

  • graphics — Optimizes the video to support text and sharp lines, such as are present on most computer screens.
  • video — Optimizes the video to support smooth tone changes such as are present in movies and other video content.

  • Luma Compression — This drop-down list sets the amount of compression on the luma (black and white) portion of the signal. A value of 1 is the minimum amount of compression available; a value of 10 is maximum compression.

  • Chroma Compression — This drop-down list sets the amount of compression on the chroma (color) portion of the signal. A value of 1 is the minimum amount of compression available; a value of 10 is maximum compression.

NOTE: This field is available only when the Luma/Chroma Lock is not selected.

- Luma/Chroma Lock — Selecting this check box automatically sets the chroma compression value higher than the Luma Compression setting.

When the check box is selected, the Chroma Compression field tracks the Luma Compression field by a fixed value of +1 (Luma Compression = 1) or +2 (Luma Compression > 1).

- Temporal Compression — Selecting this check box causes areas of the screen to refresh only when a change between frames is detected. Enabling temporal compression can significantly reduce network bandwidth.

NOTE: For all normal operation, Temporal Compression should be enabled.

  • Refresh Rate — This field controls how frequently static parts of the screen are updated when the Temporal Compression check box is selected. This is useful when connecting new displays to a temporally encoded source and fills in gaps in the data when using a lossy network transport (such as RTP). A value of 1 refreshes the screen once a second; a value of 10 refreshes the screen once every ten seconds. A value of 0 disables the refresh. Valid settings are 1 though 17.
  • Threshold — This drop-down list controls the sensitivity of the temporal change detection algorithm. A value of 0 means any screen changes will be sent. Increasing the value increases the send threshold and reduces the network bandwidth. A setting of 0 is suitable for DVI computer generated sources. Sources with more noise or video-type motion should use a setting between 1 and 4. Camera sources should always use values greater than 0.

- Chroma Threshold — This check box controls whether the temporal algorithm should consider changes in the color (chrominance) of the image. Selecting this check box provides better results when using digital simulation type sources. However, this can increase the transmit bandwidth by up to 200%, so it should be disabled on bandwidth sensitive systems.

NOTE: This option is normally not required for video or camera type sources.

- Motion (VN-Matrix 2xx only) — This drop-down list is used to adjust motion compression. The value can be set from to 15, where is no additional motion compression and 15 is full motion compression. When enabled, motion detected on the area of the screen is heavily compressed. This reduces bandwidth when the eye cannot perceive significant detail due to the motion. When motion stops, the video is resent at the standard resolution preserving screen integrity.

Audio Compression panel (VN-Matrix 200/225 only)

NOTE: The audio compression settings for the VNM 3xx series are located in the source format menu (see Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only) on page 48).

- Compression — VN-Matrix supports limited compression of S/PDIF audio sources. This is controlled by the Compression setting. The S/PDIF digital data bus can carry two types of data: 2-channel uncompressed audio and encoded digital data, the latter often in AC-3 (Dolby Digital) format. The following compression values are supported.

Available Compression Settings
Compression StereoAudio Tracks AC-3 Data TrackTrack
No compression24 bit native data (2975 kbps)24 bit native data (2975 kbps)
24-bit to 16-bit16 bit data, full sample rate (1517 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)
44 kHz to 22 kHz16 bit data, 1/2 sample rate (784 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)
44 kHz to 11 kHz16 bit data, 1/4 sample rate (418 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)

Bitrate panel

The Bitrate panel sets a specific bandwidth limit for the encoded stream.

- Limit Mode — This drop-down list contains management modes that limit the instantaneous traffic on the network and drops traffic when the bandwidth rate is exceeded. This is useful when the network connection between the source and display has limited bandwidth.

NOTE: Rapidly changing content may produce instantaneous peaks in bandwidth rate when using PBR-F management mode.

Six bandwidth management modes are supported.

  • None — This mode does not use bandwidth management. Only the underlying compression settings are managed.
  • Manual Frame Drop — This mode allows the user to specify the precise fraction of frames to drop. This mode does not manage the bandwidth rate at a fixed level, but does result in a smoother display update when using rapidly changing video content types.

  • Shared Flowrate (FD) — This mode limits the total video network traffic for the source. Frames are dropped if the instantaneous data rate is higher than the flowrate entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field.

  • Peak Flowrate (FD) — This mode limits the video network traffic for a single source stream. Frames are dropped if the instantaneous data rate is higher than the flowrate entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field. Using N output streams increases the bandwidth N times unless the multicast RTP transport protocol is used.
  • PBR-F — This mode dynamically modifies the compression settings to limit the transmitted bandwidth depending on the specified value entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field. The specified Compression setting is used as the minimum compression value. This control mode averages the bit rate over a period of two frames.
  • PBR-F (FD) — This mode is the same as PBR-F except frames are dropped when a larger bandwidth reduction (such as a reduction that cannot be achieved with compression settings alone) is required.

- Target Rate (Mbps) — This field is used in all bandwidth management modes (except Manual Frame Drop) to specify the network bandwidth used by the source. This value is specified in Megabits per second (Mbps).

- Frame Drop (%) — This field is used in Manual Frame Drop mode and specifies the percentage of frames to discard. A value of 95% discards 19 out of every 20 frames reducing a 60 frames per second (fps) video signal to 3 fps. 1 fps is the minimum frame rate. A value of 99% results in all frames being dropped due to rounding.

Peripherals Menu

Click Peripherals to open the Peripherals Settings dialog box to manage remote keyboard and mouse communications on a VN-Matrix 200/225 (see figure 36).

NOTE: Mouse and keyboard functions are supported by VN-Matrix 2xx series devices only. For a complete description, see the device user guide at www.extron.com.

Peripheral Settings (11211568) Serial Port Mode: None Baud Rate: 115200 Data Bits: 5 Stop Bits: 1 Parity: none Handshake: none Destination: Data Channel UDP Data TX: Enable Disable UDP Data Port: Pointer Overlay Overlay: Enable Disable Mouse and Keyboard Mode: enable P address: Status: Local

Peripheral Settings (11211560) Serial Port Mode: None Baud Rate: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits: 1 Parity: none Handshake: none Destination: Data Channel UDP Data: Enable Disable UDP Dest IP: UDP Dest Port: 9002 Pointer Overlay Annotation Port: 9997 Mouse and Keyboard Mode: Keyboard P address: Status: Local Inactivity: 3811326

Encoder Decoder

Figure 36. Peripherals Dialog

Serial Port

The serial port panel configures the RS-232 port on VN-Matrix encoder and decoder devices. For a full description of the serial port configuration, including server/client setup, see the User Guide for the device. Default settings are shown in figure 36.

• Mode: — The serial port can operate in one of three modes:

• None: The serial port is not used.
• Pass-through server: The serial port acts as a destination for serial port clients.
• Pass-through client: The serial port connects to server serial ports on other devices

A point to point link can be established by setting the serial port of one VN-Matrix device to pass-through server mode and a second device to pass-through client mode. The destination of the second device is set to the pass-through port on the first (server) device.

A server can accept multiple client connections. Under these conditions the data input by the server serial port is duplicated to all connected clients. The data received from the clients is multiplexed (in order of arrival) and output through the server serial port.

  • RS-232 Settings: Basic configuration of the serial port includes baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, and handshake.
  • Destination: — This option can only be modified when the serial port is in client mode. The dropdown list allows a passthrough connection request from each VN-Matrix device in the network, regardless of whether the device is currently configured as a server.

Data Channel

The data channel panel configures the UDP data stream.

  • UDP Data Tx (encoder) — Enables or disables UDP data transport through the dataport.
  • UDP Data Port (encoder) — The port number to receive UDP traffic on. This setting must match the port number defined by the external device or system that generates the UDP data.
  • UDP Data RX (decoder) — Enables or disables the UDP data.
  • UDP Dest IP (decoder) — The IP address of the external device or system that receives UDP traffic. UNICAST or MULTICAST addresses are valid.
  • UDP Dest Port (decoder) — This is the port number used by the (external) device or system to receive the UDP data.

Pointer Overlay

• Overlay (encoder) — Enable the overlay pointer on the local loop-through display.
- Annotation Port (decoder) — Read-only value of the annotation port.

Mouse and Keyboard

• Mode: — Device specific.

  • Encoder: Enabled, allows mouse and keyboard forwarding.
    • Decoder: This control has four options:

  • Disable: The decoder does not forward mouse and keyboard information.
    • Keyboard: The decoder forwards mouse and keyboard information.

  • Keyboard + keepalive: The link is automatically established if broken.
    • Force: Mouse and keyboard forwarding + keepalive is permanently enabled.

- IP Address: —

  • Encoder: Not Required.
  • Decoder: Used to specify the IP address of the target encoder when the transport is multicast or when the encoder exists on a different controller domain.

NOTE: Leading zeros are not allowed.

- Status: — Read-only, is the current status of the Link.

  • Encoder: Disabled, local, or remote keyboard and mouse is displayed.
  • Decoder: Disabled, local, or forwarding is displayed. In case of a connection error, a reason is shown in brackets.
  • Inactivity: Read-only, (decoder only). Displays the number of seconds since the mouse or keyboard reported a change

License Menu

Click License to open the Device License Management dialog box. This dialog displays the enabled features on the selected unit and also enables optional features (see figure 37).

Device License Management Licensed Features Video: DVIRGB Audio: 2 channels Video Scaler: enabled Whiteboard: disabled Data: disabled Current Structure Structure: V1,A1,D1,m4,mH,oS,c0,2 Checksum: 20PBQ-C6BY7-MV27F-VC7CV-5C2W3 Change Device Structure Structure: Checksum: Update License

VN-Matrix 200/225 VN-Matrix 3xx

Device License Management Licensed Features Video: 3Q-SDI Audio: 4 groups Current Structure Hardware ID: 702f4c1b080000e8 Structure: V1,D1,N1,mA,mH,cS,eD,S3,U16 Checksum: 3V0WH-3D9GR-MVKCV-OT40J-T90JX Change Device Structure Structure: Checksum: Update License

Figure 37. License Menu

NOTE: The Licensed Features panel and Current Structure panel contain fields that are read-only (cannot be edited).

Licensed Features panel

The Licensed Features panel details the features currently enabled on the device.

• Video (all) — Details the input signal format type.
• Audio (all) — Details the number of supported audio channels.
• Video Scaler (VNM 200/225) — Details if video scaling is enabled or disabled.
- Whiteboard (VNM 200/225) — Details if whiteboard data streaming is enabled or disabled.
• Data (VNM 200/225) — Details if data streaming is enabled or disabled.

Current Structure panel

  • Hardware ID (VNM 3xx only) — Displays the hardware ID of the device.
    • Structure (all) — Details the current structure key used by the selected device.
  • Checksum (all) — Details the current checksum used by the selected device.

Change Device Structure panel

NOTE: See Update a device license below for information on updating the structure key and checksum.

ATTENTION:

• Structure — This field is used to update the structure key used by the device.

- Checksum — This field is used to update the checksum used by the device.

Update a device license

To obtain and install a new device license, follow the procedure below.

  1. Contact the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline and provide the following information.

  2. The device ID of the VN-Matrix device. This can be obtained from the back of the device.

  3. The order number of the VN-Matrix device.

  4. The Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline provides a structure key and a checksum.

• Enter the structure key into the Structure field.
- Enter the checksum into the Checksum field.

  1. Click Update License to save the new license.

Upgrade Menu (2xx and 3xx Devices)

Click Upgrade to open the Upgrade Device Firmware dialog box used to upgrade the firmware of one or more VN-Matrix devices (see figure 38, on the next page).

ATTENTION:

Figure 38. Upgrade FW Dialog

  • Select a Version — This drop-down list contains previously uploaded firmware versions that are available.
  • Upload New Version — Click Browse to upload new firmware versions. New firmware versions uploaded to the VNM Enterprise Controller are added to the Select a Version drop-down list.

To upgrade the firmware:

  1. Select a device or multiple devices from the Devices page (see About the Devices Page on page 36).
  2. Click Upgrade on the Actions toolbar.
  3. Select the desired version from the Select a Version drop-down list and click Upgrade.

If the desired version is not available in the Select a Version drop-down list:

  1. Select a device or multiple devices from the Devices page (see About the Devices Page).
  2. Click Upgrade on the Actions toolbar.
  3. Click Browse and navigate to the appropriate location of the firmware. When the firmware is selected, it is uploaded to the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  4. After the proper firmware is uploaded, select the version from the Select a Version drop-down list and click Upgrade.

NOTES:

  • If a VN-Matrix device selected for upgrade already contains the latest version of firmware, the upgrade status displays "Wait". If multiple devices are selected for upgrade, the devices already containing the firmware upgrade display "Wait" while the other devices are upgraded (see figure 39).
  • See Update a device license on page 58 for information on updating the structure key and checksum.
  • The firmware for the VN-Matrix 2xx series differs from the firmware for the VN-Matrix 3xx series. Upgrading multiple devices is possible only when selected devices are either all VN-Matrix 2xx series or all VN-Matrix 3xx series.
  • The VNM Recorder can not be upgraded from this page (see the VNM Recorder User Guide at www.extron.com).

Upgrade Device Firmware Device Vers Up Vers Status 11212090-ver4.6.9-ver4.6.9 Done 11212068-ver4.6.9-ver4.6.9 Done 11212094-ver4.6.9 Chatel none WAIT 11212093-ver4.6.9 Chatel none WAIT

Figure 39. Device Firmware Upgrade Status

Mode Menu (VNC Devices Only)

The mode menu assigns VN-Matrix codec devices as decoders or encoders.

NOTE: Choosing a mode or toggling a device between an encoder and a decoder can take a few seconds after the selection is made.

To configure a codec device as a decoder or encoder:

  1. Select a codec device or multiple codec devices from the Devices page (see About the Devices Page on page 36).

  2. On the action toolbar, click Mode (①).

The Mode menu opens.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Mode Menu (VNC Devices Only) - 1

  1. Select Decoder to set the codec as a display device or select Encoder to set the codec as a source device.

Misc Menu

This menu contains five selections (see figure 40).

• Real-time Bandwidth Monitor
- Delete Device
• Multiple Device Licensing
- OSD Identifier Editor
- Send HLI command

Real-time Bandwidth Monitor Delete Device Multiple Device Licensing OSD ID Editor Send HLI command Misc

Figure 40. Misc Menu

Real-time Bandwidth Monitor

Select the real-time bandwidth monitor to open a new dialog box that monitors the bandwidth (measured in Mbps) used by the selected device or devices (see figure 41).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Real-time Bandwidth Monitor - 1

line | Bandwidth | Value | | --------- | ----- | | VNM325_Dec | 59 Mbps |

Figure 41. Bandwidth Monitor

NOTE: Bandwidth data is displayed only for decoder devices. A graph is displayed for an encoder, but the data always shows ∅ Kbps.

Delete Device

Select this option to delete the selected device or devices.

NOTES:

  • Be certain the appropriate devices are selected when using this menu option. The selected devices are deleted right away; no notification or warning is given when the option is selected.
  • A device can only be deleted when it is offline. Active devices can not be removed from the device list.

Multiple Device Licensing

Select this option to open a dialog box to upgrade the feature sets of multiple devices simultaneously.

NOTE: This option is not available on the VND 250.

OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders)

Select this option to customize the appearance of the on-screen display for the selected device or devices (see figure 42).

OSD Identifier Editor (11211560) Foreground Color: Background Color: Font: X: Y: Show Time: 0 Reset Defaults

OSD Identifier Editor (2001367) Foreground Color: White Background Color: Transparent Font: Arial 24pt Justify: Bottom Left Show Time: 5 Reset Defaults

VNM 200/225/300/325 VNE 250, VND250, VNS 104

Figure 42. OSD Identifier Editor

• Foreground Color — This drop-down list selects the color of the text box font.
• Background Color — This drop-down list selects the text box background color.
- Font — This drop-down list selects the type of font used in the text block.
- X — This field selects the X (horizontal) position for the text block. The value is a percentage of the screen width and references the center of the text block.
- Y — This field selects the Y (vertical) position for the text block. The value is a percentage of the screen height and references the center of the text block.
- Justify — This drop-down list places the text block in one of nine fixed positions.
• Show Time — Sets the length of time (in seconds) the name of the source device is visible after a connection is made. A value of keeps the name visible indefinitely.

NOTES:

  • This control option only functions when the Identify Source check box is selected on the Configure menu (see Configure Menu on page 44).
    • The OSD is not recorded.
  • See VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration on page 83 for VNS 104 OSD options.

Send HLI Command

Selecting this option opens a dialog box used to send High Level Interface (HLI) command strings to VN-Matrix devices (see figure 43).

Send HLI Command to selected devices - $id will be replaced with the device id (enter command line) (response)

Figure 43. HLI Command Window

To send a command:

  1. Click in the (enter command line) text field.
  2. Type the command.
  3. Press .

NOTE: The response is returned in the response area of the dialog box.

Example HLI commands and information on how to use them are available in System Control on page 175.

Group Menu

See Sorting Devices by Group on page 39 for information on using this menu.

VNM 250 Configuration

The VND 250 and VNE 250 add HDMI input and output capability to the VN-Matrix system. Several configuration items have been added to the normal encoder and decoder configuration pages for HDMI and HDCP compatibility.

Info Menu (VNM 250)

The Info action bar dialog adds two LAN port connection entries for separate control and streaming connections. Click Info to open the Device Information dialog box that displays basic information for the selected VNM 250 (see figure 44).

VNE 250
Device Information (2001329) Device Id: 2001329 Device Name: VNE250_1 LAN 1 IP (Control): 10.90.0.60 LAN 2 IP (Streaming): 192.168.0.1 Device Status: Active Link Status: Good

VND 250
Device Information (2001367) Device Id: 2001367 Device Name: VND250_1 LAN 1 IP (Control): 10.90.0.61 LAN 2 IP (Streaming): 192.168.0.2 Device Status: Active Link Status: Good

Figure 44. Device Information - VNM 250

The following fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

• Device ID — Displays the device ID number of the selected device.
• Device Name — Displays the name of the selected device.
• LAN 1 IP (Control) — Displays the IP address of the control port.
• LAN 2 IP (Streaming) — Displays the IP address of the streaming port.
- Device Status — The status of the selected device. Normally it shows Active and the quality of the link is indicated in the Link Status field. If the device is missing or cannot be contacted on the network, it shows No Device.
- Link Status — A link status of Good indicates little or no management packet loss. A link status of Fair indicates a small amount of packet loss. A link status of Poor indicates a bad link; investigate whether the link to the device has sufficient bandwidth to carry the data and management traffic.

Configure Menu

Click Configure to open the Configure Device Settings dialog box and set global parameters specific to the VNM 250 devices (see figure 45).

Encoder Decoder Configure Device Settings (2001329) Device Setup Device Name: VNE250_1 Mode: enable Identify Device: Identify Source: Flash LCD: User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3: Networking Multicast TTL: 2 Configure Device Settings (2001367) Device Setup Device Name: VND250_1 Mode: enable Enable Splash Screen: Identify Device: Identify Source: Flash LCD: User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3: Networking Multicast TTL: 2

Figure 45. VNM 250 Configure Device Settings

Device Setup panel

• Device Name — Enter a name for the device (see Device Setup panel on page 44).
• Mode — A device can be configured using one of four modes.

- enable — This is normal operation.

  • disable — On a source device, stops streaming to the network, but still shows pass-through output. A display device outputs a splash screen.
  • standby — Use this mode on a source device to stop streaming and also disable pass-through output. On a display device this mode disables all output.
  • test — Use this mode on a device (source or display) to show a splash screen with the words "Test Mode". Normal streaming is suspended.

  • Enable Splash Screen (decoder only) — Check this box to display a splash screen on the connected display or device when no video is available.

  • Identify Device — Check this box to show the device name on the pass-through output. The position and appearance of the label can be modified.
  • Identify Source (Encoder) — Check this box to display the name of the device on the image output to the loop-through connector. The source resolution and frame rate are displayed on the image that is otuput to the loop-through connector. The position and appearance of the label can be modified (see OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders) on page 62).
  • Identify Source (Decoder) — Check this box to display the name of the currently connected encoder on the connected display. The position and appearance of the label can be modified (see OSD Identifier Editor (Encoders and Decoders) on page 62).
  • Flash LCD — Check this box to flash the front panel of the selected device. This assists users with identifying an individual device within a large system.
  • User Param [1, 2, 3] — These fields are used to enter user defined parameter names (see Device Setup panel on page 44).

Networking panel

- Multicast TTL — This field specifies the number of hops multicast traffic can make between routed domains when it exits a source. It is not used for TCP or unicast RTP traffic.

Connections Menu

When devices are part of an active (launched) preset, the columns in the Connections menu populate with the connection details of the selected VN-Matrix device (see Connections Menu on page 43). The Connections dialog adds the location of the return audio path to the columns.

Format Menu (VNE 250)

Select the VNE 250 and click Format from the action bar to open the source menu. Status, Measured Video Properties, Measured Audio Properties, and EDID panel configuration is the same as the VNM 200/225/300/325 device (see Format Menu (Encoders) on page 45).

Input Configuration and Audio (VNE 250 Only)

The VNE 250 adds an input selection, HDCP authorization, program audio selection, and return audio selection.

Input Configuration Input Select: Auto HDMI (1) RGB (2) HDCP Authorize: Enable Disable EDID Settings From Monitor: No Device To Source: transparent Program Audio Input Select: HDMI (1) Analog (2) Disable Audio Status: 48kHz Analog Audio Input Return Audio Mute Audio: Output Level (dBu): 4

Figure 46. VNE 250 Source Format

- Input Configuration — Click the desired input option.

  • Auto: When enabled, the HDMI input is automatically selected whenever a digital source is detected. The EDID settings become read only in this mode.
    • HDMI (1): Selects the HDMI input. The EDID Settings panel is active.
    • RGB (2): Selects the RGB input. The EDID Settings panel is active.
  • HDCP Authorize: When an HDMI signal is detected, enable or disable HDCP authorization.

• EDID Settings — Select the EDID source from two choices.

- From Monitor: This read-only field reports the EDID of the locally connected display. If no display is present or the display does not support EDID, is reported. This is a read-only field (cannot be edited).

- To Source: This drop-down list specifies the EDID device type the VN-Matrix unit identifies itself as when connected to a source. Values are chosen from any of the stored EDID codes used on previously connected devices or from a fixed list of input formats.

NOTE: If the transparent option is selected, the EDID of the last display or the currently connected display is reported.

- Program Audio — Click the desired audio input.

- Input Select: Selects the input audio source. HDMI audio is not supported if RGB (2) input video is selected.

• HDMI (1): Selects the embedded HDMI audio.

- Analog (2): Selects the rear panel analog audio input.

- Disable: Mutes all audio inputs.

- Audio Status: Read-only field that displays the sampling rate of the selected audio source.

- Analog Audio Input — Available only when the audio source is set to Analog.

Program Audio Input Select: HDMI (1) Analog (2) Disable Audio Status: 48kHz Analog Audio Input Peak Input Level (dBu): 4 Measured Input Level (dBu): -72 Clip:

- Peak Input Level (dBu): Optimize Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) prior to the Analog to Digital Conversion (ADC) process. Set the Peak Input Level to a value just above the highest level of the source audio material. For example, if the input level from the source material peaks at +3 dBu, the Peak Input Level is set to +4 dBu.

The range is -26 to 12 dBu. Default is +4 dBu.

- Measured Input Level (dBu): This field shows the current measured input level of the analog input source in dBu. The value is updated every second and can be used as a guide to determine the Peak Input Level (see above) of the source material. If the measured input level exceeds the specified peak input level, the Clip warning indicator glows red. When the input level falls back within range, the warning indicator remains lit for three seconds and then turns off.

- Return Audio — Controls the audio level for audio received from a decoder. Only one decoder receiving an audio stream from an encoder can send return audio to the source or connected audio device. Only analog audio is supported for return audio.

- Mute Audio: Mutes the return audio.

- Output Level (dBu): Only available when a connection is made to a decoder. Adjust the audio level of the rear panel return audio output.

The range is -70 to +12 dBu. Default: +4 dBu.

Format Menu (VND 250)

The VND 250 Display Format dialog shares two configuration options with the VN-Matrix 200/225:

  • Current Format
  • Output Format

These two configuration options function identically to those on the VN-Matrix 200/225 (see Format Menu (Decoders) on page 50).

Display Format (2001395) Output Configuration Current Format: splash_screen 1920 x 1080 60p HDMI Output Format: monitor Scale Mode: Fill Follow HDCP Mode: Auto On Genlock: Enable Disable Framelock Ref: none Channel Delay(s): 0 Frame Delay: 6 Total Delay(s): 0.000 Video Wall Size (H): 0 Size (V): 0 Position: 0 Bezel Compensation Horizontal: 0 Vertical: 0 Program Audio Output Output Select: HDMI Analog Both None Analog Audio Output Level (dBu): 0 Decode Buffer Settings Channel Delay(s): 0 Return Audio Input Peak Input Level (dBu): 0 Measured Input Level (dBu): 0 Clip

Figure 47. VND 250 Display Format Dialog Box (Decoder)

The following configuration options are added:

- Scale Mode — Select fill or follow.

  • Fill scales the output video to fill the entire screen of the connected display. The aspect ratio is not maintained.
  • Follow keeps the output format the same as the input, maintaining the aspect ratio and adding black bars as needed.

NOTE: Scale mode options are not available when the output format is set to Auto.

- HDCP Mode — The HDCP mode control is used to set the encryption negotiation method between the decoder and an HDCP compliant display.

- Auto: HDCP negotiation occurs each time a new stream is decoded. Encryption is set automatically, dependent on the decoded stream.

Encryption is enabled if the decoded stream is protected and disabled if not.

- On: Encryption is forced on (enabled) at all times regardless of the decoded stream type.

Forcing encryption results in a cleaner switching transition between encrypted and non-encrypted content.

- Genlock — Enables the synchronization of the output to a reference waveform. The VND 250 uses TTL level signaling which is not compatible with normal genlock sources.

- Enable: Setting this option enables the decoder output to lock to an incoming genlock signal generated by another VND 250 device.

- Disable: The decoder output is locked to its own internal timing reference. Any incoming genlock signal is ignored.

- Framelock Ref: This drop-down control is used with the genlock control described above. It defines which VND 250 device is used as the frame reference in a genlock group. When such a group is formed, a network-based protocol permits the chosen VND 250 to coordinate frame timing so that all decoders are showing frames captured at the same time.

- Channel Delay(s) — The channel delay is unique to each channel of video, audio, data or whiteboard data and is set in seconds. In normal operation on a LAN, Channel Delay is set to 0.0.

- Frame Delay — The frame delay can only be modified on the video channel and is converted from frames to seconds depending on the video mode the decoder is currently receiving. In normal operation on a LAN, Frame Delay is set to 6 frames.

- Total Delay(s) — The delay time between the data being input to the encoder and output on the decoder is controlled by setting the Channel Delay(s) and the Frame Delay. The Total Delay(s) time shown in this read-only field is the sum of the two values.

Where synchronization between channels is required, either between video and audio on one device or between video channels on multiple devices, the default values (Channel Delay: 0.0, Frame Delay: 6) results in an end to end delay of 100ms on a 60 fps signal. On a WAN, the Channel Delay parameter can be used to add an amount corresponding to the one-way network delay (half of the round trip time [RTT]).

The hardware has a minimum delay requirement of 2.5 frames in progressive mode and 3.5 fields in interlace mode. Setting a Total Delay less than these values results in uneven playback and pipeline underflow alarms. There is one exception to this rule. Setting the Total Delay to 0.0 (zero) places the system in a special minimum-latency mode.

Excessively long delays cause data to build up in a software buffer within the decoder. When the build up is more than 10 video frames, frames of data are discarded which can result in on-screen artifacts.

Videowall panel (not available when output format is set to Auto)

The Videowall configuration settings allow a video stream from a single source to split over several decoders, each attached to one monitor of a videowall layout. The number of monitors that make up the full size of the wall and the selected decoders position in the wall must be configured for each decoder.

The videowall can be as large as 5 monitors tall by 5 monitors wide in any variation. The decoder segments its portion of the full video into the proper size based on the two size entries and the position of the connected monitor.

Size tells the decoder how many total monitors (and decoders) make up the videowall. For instance, in the videowall example below, H size is 2 and V size is 2 indicating a 2x2 videowall resulting in four segments of the full video.

Position is the location of the monitor as part of the entire wall and tells the decoder which segment of the full video it displays. Numbering always begins with the upper left monitor.

  • Size (H) — 1 to 5
  • Size (V) — 1 to 5
  • Position — 0 to 25. Position 0 ignores the size entries and displays the full video on the connected display. The top left monitor as the user views the videowall is position 1. Numbering runs left to right and top to bottom from that point as shown.

Example: The selected decoder is connected to the video monitor in the lower left of the 2x2 videowall shown at right. The configuration is:

12
34
  • Size (H)—2: indicates the videowall is 2 monitors wide.
  • Size (V) — 2: indicates the videowall is 2 monitors tall.

- Position — 3: selects the segment of the full video the decoder outputs.

Bezel Compensation panel (Mullion Compensation)

In Videowall mode, the bezel compensation settings correct image geometry when the decoded image is spread across displays that have a mullion. The settings in the horizontal and the vertical adjustments are applied equally to both edges.

• Horizontal — 0 to 100%
• Vertical — 0 to 100%

Configuring for Videowall

In addition to the size, bezel compensation, and position settings, when configuring a group of decoders for videowall use, the following settings are also required:

  • Output Format — Select the same output resolution for all decoders in the group.
  • Scale Mode — Select Fill for all decoders in the group.

NOTE: The aspect ratio of the decoded source image is not maintained.

- Genlock and Framelock settings — All decoders are configured as a genlock group (see Genlock on the previous page).

NOTE: The image quality of a single source that is scaled across multiple displays, depends on the compression applied to the source and the size of the final image. The recommended maximum videowall size is three displays horizontal by three displays vertical. It is further recommended that displays used in a videowall be the same type, resolution, and size.

Program Audio Output panel

  • Output Select—Select HDMI audio, analog audio, both, or none.
  • Analog Audio Output Level (dBu) — Sets the analog output level from a range of -26 to +12 dBu.
  • Decode Buffer Settings Channel Delay(s) — Configured the same as the video channel delay (see Channel Delay(s) on page 69).

Return Audio Input panel

  • Peak Input Level (dBu)—To optimize signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) prior to the Analog to Digital Conversion (ADC) process, the Peak Input Level is set to a value just above the highest level of the source audio material. For example, if the input level from the source material peaks at +3 dBu, the peak input level is set to +4 dBu. The range is -26 to +12 dBu.
  • Measured Input Level (dBu) — This read-only field shows the audio level of the analog input source in dBu. The value is updated every second and can be used as a guide to determine the Peak Input Level (see above) of the source material. If the measured input level exceeds the specified peak input level, the Clip warning indicator glows red. When the input level falls back within range, the warning indicator remains lit for three seconds and then turns off.

Compression Menu (VNE 250 Only)

With an encoder device selected, click Compression to open the Compression Settings dialog box to set the amount of compression on the encoded source (see figure 48).

Compression Settings (2001329) Video Compression Transform: video Luma Compression: 5 Chroma Compression: 7 Luma/Chroma Lock: ✓ Temporal Compression: ✓ Refresh Rate: 1 Threshold: 1 Chroma Threshold: Motion: 0 - No motion compression Audio Compression Compression: No compression (~3 Mbps) Bitrate Limit Mode: Peak Flowrate (FD) Target Rate (Mbps): 10 Frame Drop (%): 0

Figure 48. Compression Dialog Box (Encoder Only)

These configuration options have a direct effect on the network bandwidth required for the encoded stream.

  • Increasing compression decreases the network bandwidth requirements for the stream.
    • Decreasing compression increases the network bandwidth requirements for the stream.

Alternatively, the desired bandwidth is set using the Bitrate panel to meet the specified bandwidth limit.

Video Compression panel

• Transform — Two transform types are supported.

  • graphics — Optimizes the video to support text and sharp lines, such as are present on most computer screens.
  • video — Optimizes the video to support smooth tone changes, such as are present in movies and other video content.

- Luma Compression — This drop-down list sets the amount of compression on the luma (black and white) portion of the signal. A value of 1 is the minimum amount of compression available; a value of 10 is maximum compression.

- Chroma Compression — This drop-down list sets the amount of compression on the chroma (color) portion of the signal. A value of 1 is the minimum amount of compression available; a value of 10 is maximum compression.

NOTE: This field is available only when the Luma/Chroma Lock is not selected.

- Luma/Chroma Lock — Selecting this box disables the Chroma Compression field and automatically sets chroma compression two levels higher than Luma Compression.

When selected, the Chroma Compression field tracks the Luma Compression field by a fixed value of +1 (Luma Compression = 1) or +2 (Luma Compression > 1).

- Temporal Compression — Selecting this check box causes areas of the screen to refresh only when a change between frames is detected. Enabling temporal compression can significantly reduce network bandwidth.

NOTE: For all normal operation, Temporal Compression should be enabled.

- Refresh Rate — This field controls how frequently static parts of the screen are updated when the Temporal Compression check box is selected. This is useful when connecting new displays to a temporally encoded source and fills in gaps in the data when using a lossy network transport (such as RTP). A value of 1 refreshes the screen once a second; a value of 10 refreshes the screen once every ten seconds. A value of 0 disables the refresh. Valid settings are 1 though 17.

- Threshold — This drop-down list controls the sensitivity of the temporal change detection algorithm. A value of means any screen changes will be sent. Increasing the value increases the send threshold and reduces the network bandwidth. A setting of is suitable for DVI computer generated sources. Sources with more noise or video-type motion should use a setting between 1 and 4. Camera sources should always use values greater than .

- Chroma Threshold — This check box controls whether the temporal algorithm should consider changes in the color (chrominance) of the image. Selecting this check box provides better results when using digital simulation type sources. However, this can increase the transmit bandwidth by up to 200%, so it should be disabled on bandwidth sensitive systems.

NOTE: This option is normally not required for video or camera type sources.

- Motion — This drop-down list is used to adjust motion compression. The value can be set from 0 to 15, where 0 is no additional motion compression and 15 is full motion compression. When enabled, motion detected on the area of the screen is heavily compressed. This reduces bandwidth when the eye cannot perceive significant detail due to the motion. When motion stops, the video is resent at the standard resolution preserving screen integrity.

Audio Compression panel

  • Compression — VN-Matrix devices support limited compression of audio sources. The S/PDIF digital data bus can carry two types of data: 2-channel uncompressed audio and encoded digital data, the latter often in AC-3 (Dolby Digital) format. If the source is HDMI AC-3, run length encoding (RLE) is applied that results in an output bandwidth of about 430 kbps. If the source is HDMI PCM, the full set of compression values is used.
    The following compression values are supported:
Compression Stereo Audio Tracks AC-3 Audio Track
No compression (~3 Mbps)24 bit native data (2975 kbps) 24 bit native data (2975 kbps)
24-bit to 16 bit (~1.5 Mbps)16 bit data, full sample rate (1517 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)
44 kHz to 22 kHz (~800 kbps)16 bit data, half sample rate (784 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)
44 kHz to 11 kHz (~400 kbps)16 bit data, quarter sample rate (418 kbps)16 bit data, zeros run length encoded (430 kbps)

Bitrate panel

The Bitrate panel sets a specific bandwidth limit for the encoded stream.

- Limit Mode — This drop-down list contains management modes that limit the instantaneous traffic on the network and drops traffic when the bandwidth rate is exceeded. This is useful when the network connection between the source and display has limited bandwidth.

NOTE: Rapidly changing content may produce instantaneous peaks in bandwidth rate when using PBR-F management mode.

Six bandwidth management modes are supported.

  • None — This mode does not use bandwidth management. Only the underlying compression settings are managed.
  • Manual Frame Drop — This mode allows the user to specify the precise fraction of frames to drop. This mode does not manage the bandwidth rate at a fixed level, but does result in a smoother display update when using rapidly changing video content types.
  • Shared Flowrate (FD) — This mode limits the total video network traffic for the source. Frames are dropped if the instantaneous data rate is higher than the flowrate entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field.
  • Peak Flowrate (FD) — This mode limits the video network traffic for a single source stream. Frames are dropped if the instantaneous data rate is higher than the flowrate entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field. Using N output streams increases the bandwidth N times unless the multicast RTP transport protocol is used.
  • PBR-F — This mode dynamically modifies the compression settings to limit the transmitted bandwidth depending on the specified value entered in the Target Rate (Mbps) field. The specified Compression setting is used as the minimum compression value. This control mode averages the bit rate over a period of two frames.
  • PBR-F (FD) — This mode is the same as PBR-F except frames are dropped when a larger bandwidth reduction (such as a reduction that cannot be achieved with compression settings alone) is required.

- Target Rate (Mbps) — This field is used in all bandwidth management modes (except Manual Frame Drop) to specify the network bandwidth used by the source. This value is specified in Megabits per second (Mbps).

- Frame Drop (%) — This field is used in Manual Frame Drop mode and specifies the percentage of frames to discard. A value of 95% discards 19 out of every 20 frames reducing a 60 frames per second (fps) video signal to 3 fps. 1 fps is the minimum frame rate. A value of 99% results in all frames being dropped due to rounding.

Peripherals Menu

Click Peripherals to open the Peripherals Settings dialog box to manage serial port, data channel, pointer overlay, and remote keyboard and mouse communications for the VNM 250 (see figure 49).

VND 250 VNE 250
Peripheral Settings (2001:07) Serial Port Mode: None Baud Rate: 115260 Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits: 1 Parity: none Handshake: none Destination: Data Channel UDP Data: Enable Disable UDP Desl IP: UDP Desl Port: 9062 Pointer Overlay Annotation Port: 9997 Mouse and Keyboard Mode: Keyboard IP address: Status: Local Inactivity: 161098

Peripheral Settings (2001329) Serial Port Mode: Pass through Server Baud Rate: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits: 1 Parity: none Handshake: none Destination: Data Channel UDP Data TX: Enable Disable UDP Data Port: 9002 Pointer Overlay Overlay: Enable Disable Mouse and Keyboard Mode: enable IP address: Status: Local

Figure 49. Peripherals Dialog Box

Serial Port

The serial port panel configures the RS-232 port. For a full description of the serial port configuration, including server/client setup, see the VNM 250 User Guide. Default settings are shown in figure 49.

• Mode: — The serial port can operate in one of three modes:

• None: The serial port is not used.
• Pass through Server: The serial port acts as a destination for serial port clients.
• Pass through Client: The serial port can connect to serial ports on other devices

A point to point link can be established by setting the serial port of one VN-Matrix device to Pass-through Server mode and a second device to Pass-through Client mode. The destination of the second device is set to the pass-through port on the first (server) device.

A server can accept multiple client connections. Under these conditions the data input by the server serial port is duplicated to all connected clients. The data received from the clients is multiplexed (in order of arrival) and output through the server serial port.

  • RS-232 Settings: Basic configuration of the serial port includes baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, and handshake.
  • Destination: — This option can only be modified with the serial port in client mode. The drop-down list allows a pass-through connection request from each VN-Matrix device in the network, regardless of whether the device is currently configured as a server.

Data Channel

The data channel panel configures the UDP data stream.

  • UDP Data Tx (encoder) — Enables or disables UDP data transport through the dataport.
  • UDP Data Port (encoder) — The port number to receive UDP traffic on. This setting must match the port number defined by the external device or system that generates the UDP data.
  • UDP Data RX (decoder) — Enables or disables the UDP data.
  • UDP Dest IP (decoder) — The IP Address of the external device or system that receives UDP traffic. UNICAST or MULTICAST addresses are valid.
  • UDP Dest Port (decoder) — This is the port number used by the (external) device or system to receive the UDP data.

Pointer Overlay

• Overlay (encoder) — Enable the overlay pointer on the local loop-through display.
- Annotation Port (decoder) — Read-only value of the annotation port number.

Mouse and Keyboard

• Mode: — Device specific.

  • Encoder: Enabled, allows mouse and keyboard forwarding.
    • Decoder: The control has four options;

  • Disable: The decoder does not forward mouse and keyboard information.

  • Keyboard: The decoder forwards mouse and keyboard information.
  • Keyboard + keepalive: the link is automatically established if broken.
  • Force: Mouse and keyboard forwarding + keepalive is permanently enabled.

- IP Address: —

- Encoder: Not Required.

- Decoder: Used to specify the IP address of the target encoder when the transport is multicast or when the encoder exists on a different controller domain.

NOTE: Leading zeros are not allowed.

• Status: — Read-only, is the current status of the link
- Encoder: Disabled, local, or remote keyboard and mouse is displayed.
- Decoder: Disabled, local, or forwarding is displayed. In case of a connection error, a reason is shown in brackets.
- Inactivity: — Read-only (decoder only). Displays the number of seconds since the mouse or keyboard reported a change.

License Menu

Click License to open the Device License Management dialog box. This dialog displays enabled features for the selected unit and enables optional features (see figure 50).

Device License Management Licensed Features Video: HDM/VDVRGB Audio: 2 channels Video Scaler: enabled Whiteboard: enabled Data: enabled Current Structure Structure: V1,A1,D1,W2,mA,mH,mD,Z Checksum: 208TD-KXY7P-BTWG8-K4CQ8-QMQK3 Device License Management Licensed Features Video: HDM/VDVRGB Audio: 2 channels Whiteboard: enabled Data: enabled Current Structure Structure: V1,A1,D1,W2,mA,mH,mS,Z Checksum: 3H3TP-3Y42V-KH6VX-WD3MX-WJ2HF

Figure 50. VND 250 (Left) and VNE 250 (Right) License Menu

NOTE: The Licensed Features panel and Current Structure panel fields are read-only (cannot be edited).

Licensed Features panel

The Licensed Features panel details the features currently enabled on the device.

• Video — Indicates the input signal format type.
• Audio — Indicates the number of supported audio channels.
• Video Scaler (VND 250 only) — Indicates whether video scaling is enabled or disabled.
- Whiteboard — Indicates whether whiteboard data streaming is enabled or disabled.
• Data — Indicates whether data streaming is enabled or disabled.

Current Structure panel

The Current Structure panel details the current structure code and its corresponding checksum. These are read-only (non-changeable) fields.

  • Structure — Shows the current feature set of the selected device. The values in this code correspond to the active features displayed in the Licensed Features panel, above.
  • Checksum — Shows the checksum value used to enable the structure code.

Upgrade Menu

Click Upgrade to open the Upgrade Device Firmware dialog box used to upgrade the firmware (see Upgrade Menu (2xx and 3xx Devices) on page 58).

ATTENTION:

This menu contains four selections for the VND 250 and three for the VNE 250 (see figure 51).

• Real-time Bandwidth Monitor (VND 250)
- Delete Device
- OSD Identifier Editor
- Send HLI Command

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - ATTENTION: - 1
Figure 51. VNM 250 Misc Menu

Real-time Bandwidth Monitor (VND 250)

Select the real-time bandwidth monitor to open a new dialog box that monitors the bandwidth (measured in Mbps) used by the selected device or devices (see figure 52).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Real-time Bandwidth Monitor (VND 250) - 1

line | Time | Bandwidth (Mbps) | | ---- | ---------------- | | 0 | 0 | | 10 | 75 | | 20 | 75 | | 30 | 75 | | 40 | 75 | | 50 | 75 | | 60 | 75 | | 70 | 75 | | 80 | 75 | | 90 | 75 | | 100 | 75 | | 110 | 75 | | 120 | 75 | | 130 | 75 | | 140 | 75 | | 150 | 75 | | 160 | 75 | | 170 | 75 | | 180 | 75 | | 190 | 75 | | 200 | 75 | | 210 | 75 | | 220 | 75 | | 230 | 75 | | 240 | 75 | | 250 | 75 | | 260 | 75 | | 270 | 75 | | 280 | 75 | | 290 | 75 | | 300 | 75 |

Figure 52. Bandwidth Monitor

NOTE: Bandwidth data is displayed only for decoder devices. A graph is displayed for an encoder, but the data always shows 0 Kbps.

Delete Device

Select this option to delete the selected device or devices.

NOTES:

  • Be certain the appropriate devices are selected when using this menu option. The selected devices are deleted right away; no notification or warning is given when the option is selected.
  • A device can only be deleted when it is offline. Active devices can not be removed from the device list.

OSD Identifier Editor

Select this option to customize the appearance of the on-screen display for the selected device or devices (see figure 53).

OSD Identifier Editor (2001367) Foreground Color: White Background Color: Transparent Font: Arial 24pt Justify: Bottom Left Show Time: 5 Reset Defaults

Figure 53. VNM 250 OSD Identifier Editor

• Foreground Color — This drop-down list selects the color of the text box font.
• Background Color — This drop-down list selects the text box background color.
- Font — This drop-down list selects the type of font used in the text block.
- Justify — This drop-down list places the text block in one of nine fixed positions.
• Show Time — Sets the length of time (in seconds) the name of the source device is visible after a connection is made. A value of keeps the name visible indefinitely.

NOTE: This control option only functions when the Identify Source check box is selected in the Configure menu (see VNM 250 Configuration on page 64).

Send HLI Command

Selecting this option opens a dialog box used to send High Level Interface (HLI) command strings to VN-Matrix devices (see figure 54).

Send HLI Command to selected devices - $id will be replaced with the device id (enter command line) (response)

Figure 54. HLI Command Window

To send a command, click in the (enter command line) text field, type the command, and press .

NOTE: The response is returned in the response area of the dialog box.

Example HLI commands and information on how to use them are available in System Control on page 175.

Recorder Configuration

This section details options available in the Actions menu bar located at the bottom of the devices page. The options associated with recorders are listed below (see figure 55). The first action bar configuration displays when a recorder is selected. The next bar is available only on the sub-channels of a recorder device. Each sub-channel can be used to record video, audio, and data from an associated VN-Matrix encoder. Click an action button to configure the selected recorder.

VN-Matrix Recorder

Actions:InfoRecorderConfigureLicenseUpgradeMisc▼Group▼
VN-Matrix Recorder Sub-channel
Actions:InfoRecorderLicenseMisc▼Group▼

Figure 55. Actions Bar Menu, VN-Matrix Recorders

Info Menu

Click Info to open the Device Information dialog box. The box displays read-only information for the selected recorder or sub-channel. The display is the same for the VNR 100 and VNM Recorder (see figure 56).

Device Information (1074) Device Id: 1074 Device Name: Recorder IP Address: 10.90.0.44 Device Status: Active Link Status: Good

Figure 56. VN-Matrix Recorders, Device Information

Recorder Menu

Click Recorder to open the Recording Browser dialog box. This box displays recorded files for the selected recorder and recorder sub-channels.

Recording Browser (1074) Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Description VNE_225_5 28-04-11 22:40:55 00:01.43 v InfoComm2011/Last VNE_225_6 28-04-11 22:40:55 00:01.43 v InfoComm2011/Last ITSEQ InfoComm2011 Demo1 Demo2 Demo3 Demo4 Last Miguel_Test RecTest_01 Test1 Test1-2013-03-01-15-51-58 Test2 Open Close

Figure 57. VN-Matrix Recorders, Recording Browser

The user can select a recording from the default location or navigate to another location on the hard drive. The browser provides information on each recording, allowing a user to manage the recordings on the selected device (see File Management Overview on page 111).

The menu items are:

A Directory Tree – The directory structure of the recorder. The tree functions like a standard Windows directory structure.
B Name – The name of each channel in the recording. If a name is not set by the user, the default name of the file is the device ID of the connected encoder.
Record Timestamp – The date and time a recording is created.
D Length – The duration of the recording in hours, minutes, and seconds (HH:MM:SS).
E Streams – The stream types included in the recording; v=video, a=audio, and d=data.
F Description – A text string entered by the user when the recording is created.

Configure Menu

Click Configure to open the Configure Device Settings dialog box used to change the device name or to configure up to three user parameters for the recorder. The dialog box is the same for the VNM Recorder and the VNR 100.

Configure Device Settings (1074) Device Setup Device Name: Recorder User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3: Networking Multicast TTL: 2

Figure 58. Recorder Configure Dialog Box

Device Setup Panel

  • Device Name: — Enter a user defined name for the VN-Matrix Recorder. This is the name that appears in the device list. The name can be letters, numbers, and the underscore character. Spaces are not allowed.
  • User Parameters: — Up to three user parameters can be entered in these three fields to customize the operation of the recorder.

Networking Panel

- Multicast TTL: — Specifies the number of router hops multicast traffic can make between routed domains.

License Menu

Click License to open the Device License Management dialog box. This dialog provides information about the recorder features licensed for use on the VN-Matrix system. The information is read-only, shown for reference.

Device License Management Licensed Features Video: Audio: Video Scaler: disabled Whiteboard: disabled Data: disabled Current Structure Structure: R5,P5,mR,mP,mV Checksum: 2WQ8F-BRV7J-7KDTH-Y7D78-FT9W2 Change Device Structure Structure: Checksum: Update License

Figure 59. Device License Dialog Box, Recorders

Licensed Features

The Licensed Features panel is not functional at this time.

Current Structure

• Structure — This field details the current structure key for the recorder.
- Checksum — This field details the current checksum for the recorder.

Change Device Structure

The Change Device Structure panel is not functional at this time.

VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration

The VNS 104 Multi-stream Decoding Software decodes one or four video streams and one stereo audio stream from VNE 225/250 real-time encoders and VN-Matrix Recorder playback channels. It operates on a Windows PC and is managed from the VN-Matrix Enterprise Controller. Before you can view content, ensure the VNM Enterprise Controller is properly licensed with the VNS 104 option and checksum (provided by Extron). Once the Controller license has been updated, the VNS 104 Multi-stream Software Decoder can be selected and configured.

The VNS 104 appears in the devices list as five separate icons, one for the root and one for the each of the decode windows. Each decode window appends the device ID with a number from 1 to 4 (see figure 60).

NOTE: The position of the highlighted display in the VNS 104 icon (☐) is the screen position target for the associated video stream (see figure 60).

VS21212121VNS10410.13.3.7110.90.0.43VNS 104ver1.0.0
21212121:1VNS104:110.13.3.7110.90.0.43VNS 104ver1.0.0
21212121:2VNS104:210.13.3.7110.90.0.43VNS 104ver1.0.0
21212121:3VNS104:310.13.3.7110.90.0.43VNS 104ver1.0.0
21212121:4VNS104:410.13.3.7110.90.0.43VNS 104ver1.0.0

Figure 60. Devices Tab, VNS 104

Actions Menu Bar

Action bar menu items change when switching between the main VNS 104 root icon and the individual decode windows. The Actions menu bar for the main device contains information and configuration options common to all four decode windows. Selecting an action opens a dialog box to configure the individual device.

VNS 104 Actions: Info Connections Configure Audio Misc Group ▼ VNS 104 Decode Windows Actions: Info Format Misc Group ▼

Figure 61. VNS 104 Action Bar, Main Menu

Info Menu

Click Info to open the Device Information dialog box. There are no configuration settings, only information about the connected VNS 104 device.

Device Information (21212121) Device Id: 21212121 Device Name: Licensed Desktop IP Address: 10.13.3.51 Device Status: Active Link Status: Good

Figure 62. VNS 104 Root Device - Device Information
The fields are:
• Device ID – Displays the device ID of the connected VNS 104.
• Device Name – Displays the name of the connected VNS 104.
- IP Address – The IP address of the connected VNS 104 device.
- Device Status – Displays Active when there is a VNS 104 connected, or No Device if a VNS 104 is not detected. When the device is active, the Link Status indicates the quality of the management link.
- Link Status – Displays Good when an active VNS 104 device is connected with little or no management packet loss; Fair when a small amount of packet loss is detected; and Poor for a bad link. When the Link Status is Poor, ensure the link has sufficient bandwidth to carry the data.

Connections Menu

Click Connections to open the Connections dialog box. This box contains general information for the connected VNS 104 device showing the active stream source for each of the four connections.

Connections
VideoAudio
Description id 720202.0.0 Source 239.152.1.46:9600 Destination 239.192.1.46:9600 Locale ext Slot -1
Description id 620032.0.0 Source 239.192.1.43:8006 Destination 239.192.1.43:8006 Locale ext Slot -1
Description id 720197.0.0 Source 239.152.1.29:9574 Destination 239.192.1.29:9574 Locale ext Slot -1
Description id 1021158.0.0 Source 239.152.1.42:9600 Destination 239.192.1.42:9600 Locale ext Slot -1
Description id 61_Rack_Del.audioPort0 620032.A0.0 Source 239.192.0.43:8008 Destination 239.192.0.43:8008 Locale ext Slot -1

Figure 63. VNS 104 Root Device - Connections

The Connections dialog box includes:

  • Description – Displays the name of the stream source device.
  • ID – Displays the device ID of the stream source device.
  • Source – For unicast transports, displays the IP address and port number of the stream source device.
  • Destination – Displays the IP address and port number of the device receiving the stream.
  • Locale – This field displays loc when the data streaming between the source and display are controlled by the same controller (loc). This field displays ext if the data stream has been exported across two different controllers or if the transport protocol is multicast RTP.
  • Slot – This field displays information depending on the type of transport protocol in use.

- Using the unicast RTP transport protocol, this field displays the stream number. Four streams are available numbered 0, 1, 2, and 3.

- Using the multicast RTP transport protocol, this field displays ∅ for a source and -1 for a display.

Configure Menu

Click Configure to open the Configure Device Settings dialog box. This box contains general information for the connected VNS 104 device showing the active stream source for each of the four connections.

Configure Device Settings (21212121) Device Setup Device Name: VNS104 Mode: enable Enable Splash Screen: Identify Display: ✓ Identify Source: ✓ User Param 1: User Param 2: User Param 3:

Figure 64. VNS 104 Root Device - Actions Bar, Configure Device Settings

This dialog box contains the following settings:

  • Device Name: – This field is used to enter a user defined name for the device. The name appears in the device list and can be letters, numbers, and the underscore character. Spaces and other characters are not allowed.
  • Mode: – Drop-down list selects the operation of the VNS 104. Selections are:

  • Enable – Enables normal decoding of assigned streams.

  • Disable – Disables decoding. Displays a splash screen (if enabled), or a black screen.
  • Standby – Disables decoding and displays a black screen.
  • Test – Disables decoding and displays a splash screen (if enabled), or a black screen.

  • Enable Splash Screen: – Enables the display of a splash screen when the display device detects a break in the input data stream or a source stream is not assigned. When this check box is not selected, a black screen is displayed when a source stream is not present or when the display device detects a break in the input data stream. See the VNS 104 User Guide for instructions on how to install and use a custom splash screen.

  • Identify Display: – Overlays the device name on the decode window or windows.
  • Identify Source: – Overlays the source name on the decode window or windows. If a source is not selected for the window, "No Stream Selected" is displayed.
  • User Parameters 1-3: – Up to three user parameters can be entered in these three fields to customize the operation of the VNS 104.

Audio Menu

Click Audio to open the Configure Audio Settings dialog box. Only one of the connected video streams can have its audio selected for decode. The audio stream is assigned in the preset manager device attributes control. This dialog sets the level for that stream and also allows it to be muted.

Configure Audio Settings (21212121) Analog Output Mute Output: ✓ Volume Level: 4

Figure 65. Root Device - Audio Settings Dialog Box

The audio output configuration dialog box provides the following settings:

  • Mute Output: – Place a check mark in the box to mute the audio decode stream.
    • Volume Level: – Adjust the audio level from -70 to +12. Default is 4.

VNS 104 Misc Menu

The miscellaneous menu provides the following selections:

Delete Device OSD ID Editor Send HLI command Misc

Figure 66. Actions Bar - VNS 104 Root, Misc

- Delete Device: – Deletes the VNS 104 device from the Enterprise Controller Devices list.

NOTES:

  • Be certain the appropriate devices are selected when using this menu option. The selected devices are deleted right away; no notification or warning dialog box appears when the option is selected.
  • A device can only be deleted when it is offline. Active devices can not be removed from the device list.

  • Send HLI command: – Sends an HLI command to the selected device.

  • VNS 104 OSD ID Editor – Customize the format and placement of the display text entered in the configuration menu (see Configure Menu on page 85).

OSD Identifier Editor (21212121) Foreground Color: White Background Color: Transparent Font: Arial 24pt Justify: Middle Centre Show Time: 0 Reset Defaults

Figure 67. OSD ID Editor, VNS 104 Shown

The OSD ID editor provides the following:

  • Foreground Color: – Sets text color from a list of 11 colors and shades (or transparent).
  • Background Color: – Sets background color from a list of 11 colors and shades (or transparent).
  • Font – Sets the font and font size from a list.
  • Justify: – Sets the position of the text window from a list of nine locations.
  • Show Time: – Sets the time (in seconds) the text remains on-screen. ∅ leaves the text onscreen permanently.

NOTE: These settings are applied globally to all VNS 104 decode windows.

VNS 104 Decode Windows

When the streams for each of the four displays are assigned using the Preset Manager (see Preset Manager Page on page 93), select an individual stream to view information specific to that stream and also allow the stream to be customized for the preset.

VNS 104 Decode Windows

Actions: Info Format Misc Group

Figure 68. VNS 104 Action Bar, Single Stream Menu

Info

The Information dialog menu is the same as the main VNS 104 root device (see Info Menu on page 84).

VNS 104 Display Format

Click the Format button to open the Display Format dialog box. Each decode window provides a dialog box that allows several ways to customize the display of each stream.

Display Format (21212121:3) Stream Format: 1280 X 720 60p Screen Mode: fill Screen Layout: QuadSplit

Figure 69. VNS 104 Display Format (One of Four Streams)

In this dialog box the following items are shown:

  • Stream Format (read-only) – Displays the format of the assigned stream.
  • Screen Mode – Selects from the three screen modes; Fill, follow, or unity (see the VNS 104 User Guide for details on how these screen modes appear on a VNS 104 display).
  • Screen Layout – Select Full screen or QuadSplit screen layouts.

  • Full Screen: The selected decode window is displayed full screen. Only one decode window can be set to full screen. The other decode windows are no longer visible. The decode window last set becomes the active full screen window.

  • Quadsplit: The VNS 104 is configured as four decode windows. Each decode window is positioned as part of a 2x2 array.

Using either layout, streams are assigned to decode windows using the Preset manager control or the Switcher page (see Device Attributes – VNS 104 Software Decoder: Decode Window on page 106 and About the Switcher Page on page 89).

NOTES:

  • Settings made here are intended to configure the VNS 104 when the VNM Enterprise Controller Switcher page is used.
  • Screen Mode and Screen Layout configuration settings are also available in the Preset manager device attributes control for the VNS 104.
  • The settings operate on a last takes precedence basis. Modifications to the settings made in either the device list page or preset manager page overwrite previous settings.

About the Switcher Page

The Switcher page assigns encoders (sources) to decoders (displays). This allows the user to control streaming throughout the entire system using a single page. Use the following procedure to configure the Switcher page.

  1. Click switcher (see figure 70, ①) to open the Switcher page (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Status Mode Device Id - Device Name IP Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 10.100.245.59 (11 Items) 1021158 60_IMP960 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.8 1080104 60_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.8.8 1080104 60_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.8.8

A new window opens.

Extron. Electronics edit Sources Displays Connections 61_Dell_D830 60_Decode1 Take 61_Rack_Dell 60_VNS104:1 61_Rack_Frameflipper 60_VNS104:2 61_Rack_JMP9600 60_VNS104:3 61_Rack_MS9500 60_VNS104:4 61_VNM_Recorder:1 61_Decode2 61_VNM_Recorder:2 61_Decode3 61_VNM_Recorder:3 61_Decode4 61_VNM_Recorder:4 61_Rack_Decode 61_VNM_Recorder:5 61_VNR100:1 Sources Displays Connections 61_VNM300_Encode 60_VNS104:1 Take 61_VNM325_Encode 60_VNS104:2 61_VNM_Recorder:1 60_VNS104:3 61_VNM_Recorder:2 60_VNS104:4 61_VNM_Recorder:3 61_VNM300_Decode 61_VNM_Recorder:4 61_VNM325_Decode 61_VNM_Recorder:5 61_VNR100:1

Figure 70. Switcher Window

NOTES:

  • In the Switcher screen, VN-Matrix 2xx series devices appear in the upper part of the screen and VN-Matrix 3xx devices appear below. VNS 104 devices and recorders can appear in either.
  • If a VNS 104 is in full screen mode, only a single channel is available for switching. The other three channels are still listed, but are dimmed.

  • In the Sources column, click an encoder (source) (see figure 71, ②).

The selected box darkens.

  1. In the Displays column, click a decoder (display) (③).

The selected box darkens.

  1. Click Take ( ④).

A connection is created between the selected encoder (source) and decoder (display).

• Figure 71 shows that the JMP9600 Source is streaming media to Rack_Decode.
- Also, the VN-Matrix 300 source, VNM300_Encode, is streamed to the display, VNM300_Decode (both highlighted in figure 71) when Take is pressed.

Extron VN-Matrix Switcher - Windows Internet Explorer Extron. Electronics edit Sources Case JMP9600 Displays Rack_Decode Connections JMP9600 Take 4 Sources VNM300_Encode VNM325_Encode Displays VNM300_Decode VNM325_Decode Take Connections VNM300_Encode VNM325_Encode Done Local intranet 100%

Figure 71. Switcher Window "Take"

  1. Repeat this procedure to create other connections as necessary.

NOTES:

  • To remove a connection, select a connection from the Connections column and click Break Connection from the drop-down list.
  • To break all connections, select any connection and click Break All Connections.
  • Selecting Break All Connections immediately disconnects all devices. No other warning is given.

Connections VNM300_Encode Break Connection Break All Connections

  1. If audio data is present within the stream, click on the edit link located at the top right of the Switcher page and select the Switch audio with video (1) option. This keeps the audio and video together when creating connections.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - NOTES: - 2

Select Edit Hidden Devices (see next page) to display a pop-up that allows the user to hide any devices on the Switcher page.

Hidden Devices

When there are too many devices on the screen, management becomes difficult. The switcher provides a way to hide unused or rarely used devices.

There are two ways to set and recover hidden devices:

  1. Click the drop-down button on any source or display device and select Hide Device (①).

Sources ENG_UNIT Recorded Hide Device 1 Recorded Edit Hidden Devices Recorder_5Channel:3 Displays QuadDecoder:1 QuadDecoder:2 QuadDecoder:3 QuadDecoder:4

  1. To display the Edit hidden devices menu:

- Click the drop-down button from a source or display device and choose Edit hidden devices (2). -Or-

Sources ENG_UNIT Recorded Hide Device Recorded Edit Hidden Devices Recorder_5Channel:3 Displays QuadDecoder:1 QuadDecoder:2 QuadDecoder:3 QuadDecoder:4

- Click Edit > Edit hidden devices (③) on the main switcher menu.

edit 3 Edit hidden devices Switch audio with video

Both step 2 options open the Edit Hidden Devices menu (see right). The menu displays a list of all connected devices whether hidden, or not.

A checkmark in the box indicates the device is hidden. To display the device, uncheck the box. If you want to hide a device or series of devices, place a check mark in each device box.

Edit Hidden Devices ENG_UNIT QuadDecoder QuadDecoder:1 QuadDecoder:2 QuadDecoder:3 QuadDecoder:4 Recorder_5Channel Recorder_5Channel:1 Recorder_5Channel:2 Recorder_5Channel:3 Recorder_5Channel:4 Recorder_5Channel:5 VND200_2 VND200_2_1 VND200_3 VND225_1 VND300_1 VND300_2 VND300_3 VNE200_2 VNE200_2_1 VNE200_3 VNE200_4 VNE225_1 VNE300_2 VNE300_3 VNR100 VNR100:1

Preset Manager

This section provides instructions to connect, disconnect, and operate VN-Matrix Devices using the Preset Manager.

Sections include:

  • Presets Overview
  • Preset Manager Page
  • Preset List
    • Matrix Devices List
  • Preset Design Panel
    • Device Attributes
    • Recorder Directory and File Management
  • Creating Presets
  • Selecting a File for Playback
    • Chase-Play Feature (VNR 100 Only)

Presets Overview

Presets can quickly configure and connect devices to operate as a system and fall into three types:

  • Switching presets (encoders and decoders only) – Connect an input device (encoder) to an output device (decoder).
  • Recording presets (encoders and recorders only) – Connect input devices to the inputs (Record) of the recorder in order to record the connected stream.
  • Player presets (players and decoders only) – Connect recorder outputs (Play) to stream previously recorded programs to an output device.

NOTE: The current settings for a device are reflected in the dialog boxes whenever they are accessed in the Device List page, Actions bar.

  • Configuration changes made on the Preset Manager page using Device Attributes are applied only when the preset is launched.
    • Changes made to a device on the Device List page are applied immediately.

Preset Manager Page

The Preset Manager page enables connection of system devices from the device list for use in the VN-Matrix system. It allows users to create, save, and recall simple or complex system configurations using drag and drop rules under the following guidelines:

- A preset can contain a mix of VNM device types.

NOTE: Some device combinations are not allowed (see Preset Design - Connection Rules on page 97).

  • A preset can have a set of attributes that define the mode and configuration parameters of devices in that preset.
    • A preset can be named and saved for easy recall.
  • A preset can be recalled by name using HLI commands.
  • Presets are non-exclusive. The recall of one preset does not affect other devices in the VNM system that are not part of that preset.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info 1 1 3 3 4 4 1 Logged ocadmin switcher logout Preset List Eng_Test Playback_123 Record_123 Vid_Test_Preset VNR100_PlaybackTest VNR100_RecondTest VNS_104_Decode VNS_Vid_Test New Launch Stop Copy Rename Delete 5 Product Devices VND200_1 VND200_2 VND300_3 VND300_1 VND300_2 VND300_3 VNE200_1 VNE200_2 VNE200_3 VNE225_1 VND200_1 VNE300_3 VND300_1 6 Data As Device Attributes Name VNE290_4 Audio No Whiteboard No Data No

Figure 72. Preset Manager Page

The preset manager page is divided into four panels:

① Preset List
② Matrix Devices list
③ The Preset: Design workspace
④ Device Attributes

In addition, there are two toolbars:

⑤ To create, launch, stop, copy, rename, or delete a selected preset, a toolbar is located at the bottom of the Preset List panel (1).

⑥ When a new preset is configured or an existing preset modified, it is saved using the toolbar at the bottom of the Preset: Design workspace (③).

Preset List

The Preset List panel (see figure 72, ① on the previous page) provides management and control of the system presets from the preset list toolbar and provides a way to quickly reconfigure devices.

System presets configure and connect groups of VN-Matrix devices for a specific task. They are built using devices in the Matrix Devices list (2). Once defined in the Preset Design workspace (3), presets are saved (6) to the Preset List for use at a later time.

Each preset can contain a mix of matrix devices that includes encoders, decoders, codecs, and recorders. Controls to manage presets are provided at the bottom of the preset list box (5).

All saved presets are displayed in the Preset List workspace, listed in alpha-numeric order. If the list of presets is too long to display within the area, a scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the window pane.

NOTE: Multiple presets can be active, however, the last preset launched takes precedence when connections conflict with other active presets.

Preset List Controls

A toolbar at the bottom of the Preset List workspace provides preset creation and control (5). It is not possible to select multiple presets.

New

Select New to create a preset. When selected, it clears any previously loaded preset from the preset design area (see Preset Design Panel on page 97).

Note: Preset names must not include spaces or non alphanumeric characters such as / *, % ! " £ \$ % ^ & * ()@\~#?><. These characters are blocked from use. Underscore (_) and hyphen (-) are permitted.

Launch

Launch configures and connects devices included in the preset.

Click Launch to activate a preset:

  1. Select a preset from the list.

  2. Click Launch to activate the preset.

Launch is also available by right-clicking on a selected preset in the preset list.

Stop

Stop clears all settings made in a preset when launched, including:

- Connections between encoders or players and decoders or recorders are removed.

- An active recording or playback is stopped.

Copy

Click Copy to copy a previously defined preset and save it as another name. To copy a preset:

  1. In the Preset List, select the desired preset.
  2. Click Copy. The Copy Selected Preset dialog box opens.
  3. Enter the name for the new preset into the field entry area.

  4. Click OK to save the new preset to the Preset List. -Or-

Click Cancel to abandon the copy process.

  1. The new preset appears in the Preset List.

Copy Selected Preset Enter a name for the preset copy Copy_of_preset_1 OK Cancel

Note: Preset names must not include spaces or non alphanumeric characters such as /*, % ! " £ \$ % ^ & * ()@\~#?><. These characters are blocked from use. Underscore (_) and hyphen (-) are permitted.

Rename

Rename changes the name of a previously defined preset.

  1. In the Preset List, select the required preset.
  2. Click Rename. The Rename Selected Preset dialog box opens.
  3. Enter the name for the new preset.
  4. Click OK to save the new preset to the preset list. -Or-
    Click Cancel to abandon the rename process.

  5. The renamed preset appears in the preset list.

Rename Selected Preset Enter the new name for the preset Rename_Copy_of_Preset_1 OK Cancel

Delete

Delete erases a previously defined preset.

NOTE: Delete does not clear existing connections made by the preset. To clear those connections, first Stop the preset.

Right-click Behavior

Select a preset from the Preset List and to access the following controls:

  • Refresh: Update the list with the latest status.
  • Launch: Activate the selected preset.
  • Transport Controls: For a player or recorder preset, displays the Transport Controls dialog.
  • Delete: Deletes the currently selected preset.

Preset List Dual_Benchmark offsetCheck offsetCheck_2 offsetCheck_3 QSD1 Quad_Benchmark record scriptPlay16 scriptRec16 Test_Preset Tri_ UKp View view Refresh Launch Transport Controls Delete New Launch Stop Copy Rename Delete

Matrix Devices List

The available VN-Matrix devices are displayed on the Preset Manager page as a list in the Matrix Devices panel.

  • Matrix devices are listed alphabetically by device name. It is not possible to sort or group them.
  • Icons that represent each device are the same as the icons on the devices page (see About the Devices Page on page 36).
  • The icon that represents VN-Matrix codecs depends on the mode of that device as set by the active preset. To determine the current mode, right-click anywhere inside the Matrix device area and select Refresh.
    • Devices assigned to the currently selected preset appear dim in the list. Note the difference between device11212054, not assigned in the selected preset, and device11212060 and also device11212070 below it, which are both assigned.
  • A question mark in place of the device icon indicates a device that is no longer connected to the system or powered down.
  • After the first channel of a 5-channel recorder is added to a preset, all channels default to the same mode; either all recorder channels or all player channels.
  • Single channel recorders are listed as one player and one recorder device.
  • When the list is too long to display all devices, a scroll bar allows navigation of the list.
    • Devices are selected one at a time. It is not possible to select multiple devices from the list.

Matrix Devices device11212054 device11212060 device11212070 device11212484 device2000075 device2000168 ? device2000208 device620018 device620039 device720391 recorder recorder1c recorder1c:p recorder1c:r recorder5c recorder5c:1 recorder5c:2 recorder5c:3 recorder5c:4 recorder5c:5

Preset Design Panel

The workspace in the Preset: design panel is where new system presets are created and details of a selected preset are viewed.

  • Whether creating a new or modifying a current preset, devices are dragged from the Matrix Devices list into the design area to create a preset (see Creating Presets on page 113).
  • A new preset is saved the first time using the Save As button. After that, updates are saved using Save.
  • Changes made to a preset are discarded by clicking Cancel.
  • Save As copies a selected preset to a new name.
  • Devices are removed from a preset by highlighting the device, then right-clicking and selecting Delete.
  • When a preset is selected from the Preset list (see Preset Manager Page on page 93), the design workspace displays the configuration of all devices used in that preset.

Preset: VNS_Vid_Test VNE200_1 VNC200_1 VNE200_2 VNC200_3 VNE225_1 ENG_UNIT VNE300_2 VNC200_2

Preset Design – Device Icons

Device icons used in the preset design area are the same as those used on the Device page (see About the Devices Page on page 36).

The icon used in a preset for certain devices depends on the device function in that preset.

  • The function of VNM Recorder devices is set only when the channel is placed in a preset. When the first channel is placed, all channels are set to the same mode (recorder or player).
  • A codec device can be used as an encoder or decoder. The appropriate icon is shown when the device is placed in the preset.

Preset Design – Connection Rules

Preset connections are subject to connection rules. In the table below, "X" represents connections not allowed or invalid combinations for devices in a preset.

Connection RulesSource (Input) Device
2xx Codec 2xx Encoder 3xxCodec Player
Output Device2xx Codec YesYes Yes Yes
2xx Decoder YesYes Yes Yes Yes
3xx Codec X XYes Yes
300 Decoder X XYes Yes
Recorder YesYes Yes X
SW Decoder YesYes Yes Yes Yes

Additionally, it is not possible to place fixed function devices such as encoder-only or decoder-only devices into an illegal position in the preset.

NOTES:

  • In unicast transport mode, the maximum number of connections made to an encoder is four.
  • It is not possible to record VNE 250 source material that is HDCP encrypted with the VNR 100 or the VNM 5-Channel recorder.

Device Attributes

When a device is placed in the Preset Design workspace, the Device Attributes panel provides access to preset-specific device settings available to the preset manager. When the device is selected, an appropriate set of attributes for that device populates the device attributes panel. Attributes customize the device for a specific function within that preset and are a subset of the full configuration control set available in the device list view (see About the Devices Page on page 36).

Device Attributes
NameVN_Recorder_5CH:1
Directory/Test1/
Filediff1
Launch StatusPlay
RepeatNo
Time SyncYes
Start Offset00:00:00
Stop Offset00:07:02
File Length00:07:02

Figure 73. Preset Manager, Device Attributes (Player)
The Device Attributes configuration panel populates according to the selected device and its function in the preset. The following information details configuration options available in the attribute panel for each device.

Device Attributes - Codecs

Device attributes change depending on the role of the codec in the preset (see Device Attributes – Encoders, and Device Attributes – Decoders in the following pages).

Device Attributes - Encoders

Only the VNE 250 has attributes configurable by the preset manager. The attribute panel for the other encoder devices only contain a read-only Name field.

Device Attributes
NameVNE250_1
Video InputAuto
Program Audio InputHDMI
Return Audio SourceNone
RS232 ModePass through Client
RS232 Server
RS232 Data TxDisable
UDP Data TxEnable
UDP Data Port9002

Figure 74. Device Attributes, VNE 250

• Name — Read-only field for the device name taken from the device list.

• Video Input — A drop-down list to select the input video source. Choices are:

  • Auto — This option automatically selects the HDMI input when a digital source is detected.
    • HDMI — Selects the HDMI input.
  • RGB — Selects the RGB input.

- Program Audio Input — A drop-down list to select the program input source. Choices are:

  • HDMI — Selects the digital audio from the HDMI input.
  • Analog — Selects the analog audio input.
  • Disable — Disables both audio inputs.

- Return Audio Source (read-only) — Reports the name of the VND 250 device with return audio enabled in the current preset.

• RS-232 Mode — Drop-down list to select the RS-232 channel mode. Choices are:

  • None — the RS232 pass-through port is disabled.
  • Pass through Server — Configures the device as a server.
  • Pass through Client — Configures the device as a client.
  • Data channel — Configures the device to transport RS-232 communications over the data channel.

NOTES:

  • In pass-through mode, RS-232 data is bi-directional and can be sent and received between server and client devices. In this mode, RS-232 communications operate independently of device connections. Pass-through communications can not be recorded.
  • In data channel mode, RS-232 communications operate over the current connections and are uni-directional, from encoder to decoder. Data channel communications can be recorded.

- RS-232 Server — A drop-down list with the servers currently on the same domain. Only available when Pass through Server is selected in RS-232 mode (see above).

- RS-232 Data Tx — Enable or disable RS-232 data transmission.

- UDP Data Tx — Enable or disable a UDP data transmission port.

- UDP Data Port — Enter the port number that UDP data is received on. This setting must match the port number that is defined by the external device or system that generates the UDP data.

Device Attributes – Decoders

Decoder device attributes differ depending on the selected device (see figure 75).

Selected Device Device Attributes Name Decoder Audio No Whiteboard No Data No Device Attributes Name 325_Device2 Ancillary No Column FEC No Row FEC No

(a) 200/225 Series
(b) 3xx Series
Figure 75. Device Attributes Panel, Decoders

• Name — Read-only field for the device name taken from the device list.
- Stream settings — The following attributes enable or disable the connection of a specific stream. By default, the video stream is always made when a preset is built. A stream type can only be enabled if it is present in the connection from an encoder or player device.
• VND 200/225 series only
• Audio — Drop-down list enables or disables the audio channels.
- Whiteboard (VND 200/225 only) — Select Yes to decode available whiteboard data from the stream (see License Menu on page 82).
• Data — Select Yes to decode data information from the stream.

• VND 3xx series only

  • Ancillary — See Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only) on page 48.
  • Column FEC — See Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only) on page 48.
  • Row FEC — See Ancillary Audio Panel (VN-Matrix 3xx Only) on page 48.

NOTE: The configuration of individual streams is made on the appropriate device in the device list page. For example, the video compression settings or the audio format for an encoder are set on the device list page.

Device Attributes - VND 250 Decoder

The VND 250 decoder has an extended set of device attributes.

Device Attributes
NameVND250_1
Output Format1024 x 768 60p GTF
Scale ModeFill
Audio StreamNone
Program Audio SourceNone
Program Audio OutputHDMI
RS232 ModePass through Client
RS232 ServerVND300_2
Data StreamYes
UDP Data RxEnable
UDP Dest IP
UDP Dest Port9002
AnnotationNo

Figure 76. Device Attributes Panel, VND 250

  • Name — Read-only field for the device name, taken from the device list.
    • Output Format — Drop-down list of available output resolutions. Choices are:

• Auto — Output format is the same as the input source (stream) format.
- Monitor — Output format is set to the preferred mode (EDID) of the display. If necessary, scaling is applied.
- Fixed — Output format is selected from a drop-down of available resolutions. If necessary, scaling is applied.

- Scale Mode — Drop-down list available when the Output Format is Monitor or Fixed. Choices are:

  • Fill — The decoded image is scaled to the selected output format. Aspect ratio is not maintained.
  • Follow — The decoded image is scaled to the selected output format. Aspect ratio is maintained.

• Audio Stream — Drop-down list with the following choices:

  • None — Mutes the audio streams.
  • Program — Enables the decoding of program audio.
  • Program plus Return — Enables the decoding of program audio and return path audio.

• Program Audio Source — Drop-down list of the other VNE 250 devices in the preset.

  • None — Default. Selects audio from the currently connected stream.
    • {List} — Selects an audio source from a list of VNE 250 devices in the preset.

- Program Audio Output— Selects the required output for the program audio.

  • HDMI — Select to enable the HDMI audio output.
  • Analog — Select to enable the analog audio output.
  • Both — Selects both the analog and digital audio outputs.
  • Disable — Mutes all audio output.

- RS-232 Mode — Drop-down list to select the RS-232 channel mode.

  • None — the RS-232 pass-through port is disabled.
  • Pass through Server — Configures the device as a server.
  • Pass through Client — Configures the device as a client.

- Data Channel — Configures the device to transport RS-232 communications over the data channel.

NOTES:

  • In pass-through mode, RS-232 data is bi-directional and can be sent and received between server and client devices. In this mode, RS-232 communications operate independently of device connections. Pass-through communications can not be recorded.
  • In data channel mode, RS-232 communications operate over the current connections and are uni-directional, from encoder to decoder. Data channel communications can be recorded.

- RS-232 Server — When RS-232 mode is set to Pass through Client provides a drop-down list of available servers on the system.

• Data Stream — Select Yes to enable the data stream, No to disable.
- UDP Data Rx — Select Enable to receive UDP data from the system. When enabled, the UDP Dest IP and UDP Dest Port selections are listed below.
- UDP Dest IP — The IP address of the external device or system that receives UDP traffic. UNICAST or MULTICAST addresses are valid.
- UDP Dest Port — The port number used by the (external) device or system to receive the UDP data.
- Annotation — Select Yes to enable annotation pointer overlay functions.

NOTES:

  • When creating a videowall using presets, VND 250 devices are configured and connections are built using the Preset Manager. Modifying the output format or the scale mode settings of a VND 250 decoder in the Presets Device Attributes panel changes the current configuration of the decoder in the Device List to those set in the Device Attributes panel only when the preset is launched.

- The normal encoder to decoder connection count limit applies.

  • Unicast transport supports a maximum of four connections to a single encoder. Note that each unicast connection increases the bit rate by the same amount for each connection. The aggregate bit rate for four unicast connections can not exceed the maximum supported bit rate of 270 Mbps for an encoder.
  • Multicast transport supports "one to many" connections allowing for wall sizes of more than four displays.

See the System Config Page on page 28 for additional information on unicast and multicast connections.

Device Attributes – VN-Matrix Recorder: Play Mode

The 5-channel VN-Matrix Recorder in player mode operates with Ch1 set as the primary for all channels (see figure 77, left).

Device Attributes
NameRecorder_5Channel:1
Directory
File
Launch StatusPlay
RepeatNo
Time SyncYes
Start Offset00:00:00
Stop Offset00:00:00
File Length00:00:13
Device Attributes
NameRecorder_5Channel.2
Directory
File
File Length00:00:13

Figure 77. Device Attributes, 5-channel Player

The player device attributes for a 5-channel device provide the following functions:

NOTE: The attributes for individual channels 2, 3, 4, and 5 (shown in figure 77, right) are a reduced set of the attributes for Ch1.

  • Name — Read-only field displays the device name and selected sub-channel number.
  • Directory — Opens the recorder browser for directory level navigation and selection.
  • File — Opens the directory listed in the Directory field to enable selection of a single recorded file and displays the filename.
  • Launch Status — Drop-down control to define the start condition of a Play or Record preset.

  • Play (player channel 1 only) — When the preset is launched, playback begins immediately.

  • Provision — Delays playback until the appropriate command is sent from the transport bar or from an external control system.

- Repeat — A drop-down control sets a player into loop mode.

  • Time Sync — A drop-down control that sets the timing relationship between the channels on multiple devices in a player preset.
  • Start Offset — Editable field that sets the start time of a selected file.
  • Stop Offset — Editable field that sets the stop time of a selected file.
  • File Length — Displays the length of the recording in hh:mm:ss format.

Device Attributes – VN-Matrix Recorder: Record Mode

The 5-channel VN-Matrix Recorder in recorder mode operates with Ch1 set as the primary for all other channels on that device.

Device Attributos
NameRecorder_5Channel-1
Directory/RecTest_01V
FileChaseTST01
Launch StatusRecord
Description
AudioNo
WhiteboardNo
DataNo

Figure 78. Device Attributes, 5-channel Recorder

The recorder device attributes for a 5-channel device provide the following functions:

  • Name — Read-only field displays the device name. For the 5-channel recorder, if a sub-channel is selected, this displays the device name and sub-channel number.
  • Directory — Type a new directory name directly into an editable field or use a file browser to create and delete directories (see Recorder Directory and File Management on page 107).
  • File — An editable field and navigation tree to create and delete files.
  • Launch Status — Drop-down control to define the start condition of the preset.

  • Provision — Places the recorder in pause when the preset is launched. The recording begins only when the record button is clicked on the transport bar.

  • Record — When the preset is launched, starts the recording immediately.

• Description — A user defined text field used to describe the recording.
• Audio — Select Yes to enable or No to disable the audio stream.
- Whiteboard — Enable/disable whiteboard (see Recorder Configuration on page 79).
• Data — Enable/disable a data stream (see Recorder Configuration on page 79).

Device Attributes - VNR 100 Player

The VNR 100 single-channel player attributes panel provides the following functionality:

Device Attributes
NameVNR100:p
Directory/GFChaseTst/
FileTEST
Launch StatusPlay
Time SyncYes
Start Offset00:00:00
Stop Offset00:00:00
File Length00:00:02

Figure 79. Device Attributes, VNR 100 Player
The function of each attribute is the same as the 5-channel player (see Device Attributes - VN-Matrix Recorder: Play Mode on page 103).
NOTE: You cannot set a stop offset in chase-play (live) mode when using a single channel recorder (see Chase-Play Feature (VNR 100 Only) on page 128).

Device Attributes - VNR 100 Recorder

Device Attributes
NameVNR100:r
Directory/New_Directory/
FileGDFTST_002
Launch StatusRecord
DescriptionTest File
AudioNo
WhiteboardNo
DataNo

Figure 80. Device Attributes, Single-Channel Recoder

The VNR 100 recorder Device Attributes panel provides the following functionality:

  • Name — Read-only field displays the device name.
  • Directory — Type a new directory name into this field or use a file browser to create and delete directories.
  • File — An editable field and navigation tree to create and delete files.
  • Launch Status — Drop-down control to define the start condition of a preset.
  • Provision — Places the recorder in pause mode when the preset is launched. The recording begins only when the record button is clicked on the transport bar.
  • Record — Starts the recording immediately when the preset is launched.
    • Description — A user defined text field to describe the recording.
    • Audio — Enables or disables audio recording.
  • Whiteboard — Enables or disables whiteboard data recording.
    • Data — Enables or disables data stream recording.

Device Attributes - VNS 104 Software Decoder: Decode Window

Device Attributes
NameVNS104:1
AudioNo
Mute AudioNo
Audio Volume4
Screen ModeFill
Screen LayoutQuadSplit

Figure 81. Device Attributes, VNS 104

Each VNS 104 decode window has the following attributes (see figure 81):

  • Name — Read-only field for the device name.
  • Audio — Drop-down list enables (Yes) or disables (No) connection of specific stream types within a decoder channel.
  • Mute Audio — Mutes the audio stream.
    • Audio Volume — Sets the volume level of the audio stream.
  • Screen Mode — Select from three screen modes; Fill, Follow, or Unity (see the VNS 104 User Guide for more details on how these screen modes appear on a connected display).
  • Screen Layout — Select between Full screen or QuadSplit screen layouts. In full screen layout, the selected channel is the only one available to the display (see VNS 104 Software Decoder Configuration on page 83).

Recorder Directory and File Management

VN-Matrix recorders can be used as a source (player) or display (recorder). The following section describes the recorder directory and file structure and rules to assist in their management.

Directory Management Overview

A recording can be made on single or multiple devices (recorders). A recording contains all files required to recreate the original stream from an encoder in a set. The set can consist of audio, video, and data file types. Each recording set is stored in a unique directory.

• Each directory can hold only the files for a single recording.
- Directories must have a unique name, duplicates are not allowed.

A new directory can be created in two ways. The same methods are used on both the single and 5 -channel devices.

NOTE: Directory names must not include spaces or non alphanumeric characters such as / *, % ! " £ \$ % ^ & * ()@\~#?><. These characters are blocked from use. Underscore (_) and hyphen (-) are permitted.

Create Directory – Directory browser method (preferred)

To create a new directory using the navigation tree:

  1. Create a preset with an encoder and recorder (see Recorder Presets on page 119).
  2. Select a recorder (channel) in the Preset Design workspace.
  3. Click anywhere inside the Directory field of the Device Attributes panel, then select the drop-down box on the right hand side (see figure 82, 1).

Device Attributes Name VNR100:p Directory File

Figure 82. Select Directory Drop-down Box

The Recording Browser dialog box opens.

Recording Browser (VNR100:r) Create Folder Delete Folder 11-43 Rec-2013-03-01-15-52-44 Rec_2013-30-18-10-36-50

Figure 83. Recording Browser Window, Create Folder

  1. Select the root folder, on the folder (see figure 83, ①), then click Create Folder.

The Create Folder dialog box opens.

  1. Enter the directory name and click OK.

Recording Browser (VNR100:r) GFChaseTst Rec Create Folder Enter the folder name New_Directory OK Cancel Open Close

Figure 84. Create Directory, Enter Name

NOTE: Using this method, the directory is created and displayed in the directory list immediately.

The new directory is created and the Recording Browser dialog box displays all directories, including the new one. The browser remains open.

  1. Select the new directory, and click Open to continue (see figure 85, ①).

NOTE: Select Close to cancel the process (the new folder remains).

Recording Browser (VNR100:r) GFChaseTst Rec Rec-2013-02-20-12-11-43 Rec-2013-03-01-15-52-44 Rec_2013-30-18-10-36-50 New_Directory lost+found Open Close

Figure 85. Recording Browser, Select and Open Directory

  1. A dialog box opens. Select Yes (see figure 86, ①) to automatically create the same directory on other recorder devices in the preset, or No to continue.

Auto Populate other Recorders in Preset Automatically Set the Recording Directory for the other Recorders in the Preset? Yes No

Figure 86. Recording Browser, Auto Populate Other Recorders

NOTE: If multiple recorder devices (single or 5-channel) are in the preset, using the same directory simplifies file selection for replay.

Create Directory – Direct entry method (advanced)

To create a directory using direct entry:

  1. Create a preset with an encoder and recorder (see Recorder Presets on page 119).
  2. Select a recorder (channel) in the Preset Design workspace.
  3. In the Device Attribute panel, click in the Directory row and enter the new directory name in the field.

A red marker indicates a change in the device attributes (see figure 87).

Device Attributes
NameVNR100:r
DirectoryNew_Directory
File
Launch StatusRecord
Description
AudioNo
WhiteboardNo
DataNo

Figure 87. Device Attributes - Create Directory (Advanced)

NOTE: Using this method, the new directory appears in the browser directory listing only after the preset is launched.

  1. Save the preset. The red marker clears when the preset is saved.

NOTE: It is only necessary to set the directory name on one channel in a 5-channel device. Although it is possible to enter different directory names in the other four channels, the name used for the directory when the preset is launched is the directory name last entered. Therefore, all channels use the directory name entered last and ignore the previous entries.

Duplicate Directory Naming

If a recorder preset is built (or copied) using an existing directory name, or if the same preset is launched more than once without changing the name of the directory, a new directory name is automatically created. The first time a recording is launched, the previously entered directory name is created (see figure 88).

Recording Browser (Recorder:1) 3 channel recording New_Directory SWD_vs_HWD_tst Name Record Timestamp Length Streams T ag New_File 12-04-12 10:06:37 00:00:12 v Device Attributes Name 5CH_A2 Directory New_dlirectory File New_file Launch Status Record Description Audio No Whiteboard No Data No

Figure 88. Duplicate Directory Naming

When the same preset is launched a second time, a new directory name is created using the original directory name appended with a time and date stamp (see figure 89).

Recording Browser (Recorder:1) 3_channel_recording New_Directory New_Directory-2012-04-12-06-08-02 SWD_vs_HWD_tst Name Record Timestamp Length Stream Tag New_file 12-04-1210:08:09 00:00:12 V Close Close

Figure 89. Duplicate Directory Naming, New Recording

Each directory contains only the files from a single recording.

Delete Directory - Recording Browser

Directories are deleted using the Recording Browser. on the folder and select Delete Folder (see figure 90).

Recording Browser (VNM_Recorder:2) 5_Ch_Test 5_Ch_Test.2013-05-06-11:34:32 ITSEC InfoComm2011 Create Text 2013-05-18-10-44:03 Delete Folder 3-10-48-42 RecTest_01 RecTest_01.2013.04.23-13:55:49 Test1 Testt.2013.03.01.15.51:58 Test2 Open Close

Figure 90. Delete Directory

All files in the directory are deleted. A warning is given to confirm the deletion.

NOTE: The root directory can not be deleted.

File Management Overview

The recorder allows creation of both directories and files while the player can only select directories and files after they are created by the recorder.

Filename

By default, the name of the encoding device is used as the name of the recorder file. The default name is changed by entering a new name in the Device Attributes File field.

Creating a File

A file is created when a recording begins. If the file field is blank when the recording starts (see figure 91), the device name of the encoder is used as the filename.

Device Attributes Name Recorder:1 Directory New_directory File Audio No Whiteboard No

Recording Browser (Recorder:t) 3_channel_recording New_directory New_directory-2012-04-12-06-08-02 New_directory-2012-04-12-07-06-23 SWD_vs_MWD_Testa Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Tag MS9500 12-04-12 11:06:31 00:00:12 y Open Close

Figure 91. Create a File

NOTE: The filename field in the Device Attributes panel remains blank.

If a specific filename is desired, the name is entered in the File field (see figure 92, ①), which then becomes the name of the file in the recording (②).

NOTE: File names must not include spaces or non alphanumeric characters such as /*, % ! " £ \$ % ^ & * ()@\~#?><. These characters are blocked from use. Underscore (_) and hyphen (-) are permitted.

Device Attributes Name Recorder.1 Directory New_directory File ① New_file Audio No Whiteboard No Data No

Recording Browser (Recorder:1) 3_channel_recording New_directory New_directory-2012-04-12-06-08-02 New_directory-2012-04-12-07-06-23 SWD_vs_HWD_Testa Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Tag New_file 12-04-12 10:08:09 00:00:12 v ②

Figure 92. Create a File Using Direct Text Input

Completed Directory Structure

A recording directory contains one set of files for each recorder (channel) in the preset. A file set can contain audio, whiteboard, and other data streams associated with the video file.

Recording Browser (Recorder:1) 3_channel_recording New_directory New_directory-2012-04-12-06-08-02 New_directory-2012-04-12-07-06-23 SWD_vs_HWD_Tests Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Tag AFRL 02-12-10 17:59:09 00:40:19 v L3_UAV 02-12-10 17:59:09 00:40:19 v SDS_UAV 02-12-10 17:59:09 00:40:19 v Xdtt1Otw 02-12-10 17:59:09 00:40:19 v,d Xdtt2Otw 02-12-10 17:59:09 00:40:19 v Open Close

Figure 93. Recording Browser, One File per Channel

Deleting a File

Delete a file by highlighting it in the browser, , then select Delete File.

Recording Browser (Recorder:1) 3_channel_recording New_directory New_directory-2012-04-12-06-08-02 New_directory-2012-04-12-07-06-23 SWO_vs_HWD_Tests Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Tag New file 12-04-12 10:08:09 00:00:12 v Play file Delete File Open Close

Figure 94. File Browser, Delete a Channel

NOTE: The browser must be refreshed after a delete.

Player File Management

All files for a single recording are in one directory. In a 5-channel device, the directory can contain up to five sets of files, one for each channel.

In a multi-player system, the same directory must be present on all devices, and each directory must contain the files recorded for that channel.

When selecting a previously recorded file for playback, navigate to the directory using the Recording Browser. When the directory is selected, files in the directory are loaded into all players automatically. It is not necessary to select individual files for each player device.

Creating Presets

Presets are created that configure devices to operate as a system. Once created, presets can be launched with a single button click. The Enterprise Controller then reconfigures and connects the devices in the preset to create the system.

The three preset types are:

  • Switching – Connect inputs to outputs. Source devices must always be placed into the design area first. Source devices (codecs, encoders, or players) are dragged from the Matrix Devices list into any blank space in the Preset Design workspace.
  • Record – Connect encoders to a record channel, select the stream and stream types to record, and specify the directory and file names. Source devices are always placed first with the desired recording channel dropped on it.
  • Play – Connect decoders to a player and view previously recorded material. Players are always placed first followed by the decoder.

Several general rules for the Preset Design workspace are:

  • The first device dragged into the design area is positioned vertically on the left hand side of the workspace. Subsequent devices are positioned under the previous one in the order placed.
  • Once placed in this column, the space to the right of a source device becomes a connection point for decoders or recorder channels.
  • A Codec can be added to a preset regardless of its current mode. When dropped into the design area first, a codec formatted as a decoder reconfigures to an encoder. Similarly, a codec formatted as an encoder, reconfigures to a decoder when dropped onto an encoder.

Create a New Preset

To create a new preset, drag and drop a device onto the Preset panel, then drag an appropriate device onto the first device. In this example, Encode1 is an encoder streaming video to the system. Decode1 is a decoder connected to a display.

To create an encoder to decoder preset:

  1. Click New (①) at the base of the Preset List panel to create a blank preset (see Preset Manager Page on page 93).

Preset List New | Launch | Stop | Copy | Rename | Delete

Figure 95. Preset List - New Preset

  1. Add an encoder to the Preset panel. Click and hold the encoding device (see figure 96, ②).

Preset List New | Launch | Stop | Copy | Rename | Delete Matrix Devices Decode1 Decode2 Decode3 Decode4 Decode5 Encode1 FrameCode Rack_J Rack_Frameflipper Rack_JMP9600 Rack_MS9500 VNM300_Decode VNM300_Encode VNM325_Decode VNM325_Encode VNMRecorder VNR100 VNS104 http://192.168.254.254/cp/devicelist# Preset: None Encode1 4 3 Encode1 Save | Save As | Cancel

Figure 96. Preset Workspace, Place a Device

  1. Drag the device to the upper left corner of the Preset panel (③).
  2. Drop the device ( ④).

NOTE: Devices dragged into the Preset Design workspace are positioned on the left side in the first open space vertically, and in the order they are placed.

  1. Add a decoder to the Preset panel. Click on and hold the desired decoder (see figure 97, 1).

Preset List New Launch Stop Copy Rename Delete Matrix Devices Decode1 Decode3 Decode1 Decode4 Decode5 Encode1 Rack_Decode Rack_Di Rack_Frameflipper Rack_JMP9600 Rack_MS9500 VNM300_Decode VNM300_Encode VNM325_Decode VNM325_Encode VNMRecorder VNR100 VNS104 http://192.168.254.254/cp/devicelist# Preset: None Encode1 Decode1 Decode1 Decode1 Save Save As Cancel

Figure 97. Preset Workspace, Add a Decoder

  1. Drag the device to the upper left corner of the preset panel (②).
  2. While holding the decoder, place it on top of the previously placed Encoder1, then release (3).

The preset completes after a moment.

NOTE: Although the user interface shows a connection between the devices, the connection is made only when the preset is launched (see Launch Behavior on page 121).

Saving Presets

Extron. Electronics Alarma Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Preset List Encode_to_Decode New Batch Strip Copy Rename Delete Matrix Devices Decode1 Decode2 Decode3 Decade4 Decode5 Encode1 Rock_Decode Rock Rock_Transfoper Rock_IMP9600 Rock_M50800 VNM506_Decode VNM506_Encode VNM525_Decode VNM525_Encode VNM_Recenter VNR100 VNS104 http://192.168.254.254/cp/devicelist# Preset: Name Decode1 Decade1 1 Save As Enter a new configuration name Encode_to_Decode OK Cancel Device Attributions Name Decade1 Audio Yes Whiteboard Yes Data No Yes No Save As Cancel

Figure 98. Save a Preset

Before saving the preset, configure the decoder using the Device Attributes panel (the encoder has no attributes available).

  1. Click on the decoder device in the Preset panel (see figure 98, ①) to populate the device attributes (②).
  2. Configure the attributes of the decoder (②) as needed (see Device Attributes on page 98).

NOTE: A red triangle appears as each attribute is changed to remind you the changes have not been saved. The triangle goes away when the preset is saved.

  1. When the decoder is configured, click Save As on the Presets panel toolbar (③). The Save As dialog opens.
  2. Type a name using the standard naming format, then click OK (④).
  3. The new name appears in the Preset List panel (⑤).
  4. Click on the preset, then click Launch on the Preset List toolbar to activate the preset (6).

Using the VNS 104 in a Preset

The VNS 104 appears in the Device List as a four channel decoder with four possible connections. In the Preset Design panel, each channel can be connected to the same or to a different encoder or player channel.

  1. Select New at the base of the Preset List panel to create a blank preset (see figure 99, ①).

Preset List Eng_Test Playback_123 RecChaseTst_play RecChaseTst_rec Record_123 Vid_Test_Preset VNR100_PlaybackTest VNR100_RecordTest VNS_104_Decode VNS_Vid_Test New Launch Stop Copy Rename Delete

Figure 99. Presets, Using the VNS 104

  1. Drag an encoder from the Device List and drop it onto the Preset design panel.

Preset: None VNE200_1 Save Save As Cancel

Figure 100. Presets, Drag and Drop an Encoder

NOTE: Devices dragged into the Preset panel workspace are positioned in the first open space vertically on the left hand side of the design area in the order they are placed.

  1. Drag one of the four software decoder channels (see figure 101, ①) from the Device List and drop it onto the source device in the Preset panel.

Preset: None VNE200_1 ①① VNS104:1 Preset: None VNE200_1 VNS104:1

Figure 101. Presets, Drag and Drop the VNS 104

NOTE: Output devices are positioned below and to the right of the source device they are connected to.

  1. Set output device attributes as required (see Device Attributes on page 98).
  2. Click Save As and name the preset (see Preset List on page 94).

The connection between the source device and the VNS 104 Software Decoder window is now available.

  1. Either drop more software channels onto the encoder, or drag more encoders into the Preset panel, then drop additional software decoder channels onto them as required. In this manner, connections are made between inputs (sources) and any or all channels of the VNS 104 Multi-stream Software Decoder.

Recorder Presets

Recorder presets are created similar to switching presets. Place an encoder device into the Preset panel first, followed by a recorder channel or channels. Use the Device Attributes panel of a recorder to create or select a file directory, and select the channels to record.

To Record a Channel

  1. Create a preset with an encoder source and recorder channel (see figure 102).

Preset: None Name VNR100.r Directory File Launch Status Record Description Audio No Whiteboard No Data No

Figure 102. Create a Preset

  1. Select the record channel (see figure 103, ②). The Device Attributes panel populates with the configuration options appropriate for the recorder.
  2. Create or select a directory (③) for the recording file (see Directory Management Overview on page 107).

Preset: New_Recording Device Attributes Name VNR100:r Directory /New_Recording/ File Nuew_File Launch Status Record Description A new recording in a new directory Audio No Whiteboard No Date No

Figure 103. Select the Record Channel

  1. Enter a filename (④) for the recording (see Recorder Directory and File Management on page 107).
  2. Set the launch status ( ⑤) (see Launch Behavior on page 121).
  3. Enter a description, if desired (⑥).
  4. Select the remaining recording options (audio, whiteboard, and data) as needed (⑦).
  5. In the Preset panel, click Save (see Saving Presets on page 116).

The record preset is now complete.

  1. Click Launch in the Preset List panel to begin the recording.

VNE250, HDCP, and Recording

It is not possible to record an HDCP encrypted source, however, this condition is not rules checked in the preset manager (see Preset Design – Connection Rules on page 97). The source content is known only when the preset is launched and the recording starts.

If there is an attempt to record HDCP content, the system behaves as described for other content. However, the recorded file is not created if the content is HDCP encrypted. This condition is not flagged in the user interface.

Player Presets

Player presets are created similar to switching presets. A player channel is placed into the Preset panel first, followed by a decoder or decoders. The player channel attributes include the playback directory, the playback file, set the start and end offset time and synchronization, and select the playback channels.

To Play a Channel

  1. Create a preset with a player channel and a decoder (see Creating Presets on page 113).

Preset: New_Playback VNR100.p VND225_1 Device Attributes ② Name VNR100:p Directory /New_Recording/ File New_File ④ Launch Status Play ⑤ Time Sync Yes ⑥ Start Offset 00:00:00 Stop Offset 00:00:00 File Length 00:00:07

Figure 104. Preset for Playing a Channel

  1. In the Preset panel, select the player (see figure 104, ①).

The Device Attributes panel populates with the configuration options appropriate for the player (2).

  1. Select an existing directory (③) (see Selecting a File for Playback on page 124).

  2. Select a filename (④) for playback (see Selecting a File for Playback on page 124).

  3. Set the launch status ( ⑤) as desired (see Launch Behavior on page 121).

  4. Select playback options (Time Sync, Start Offset, Stop Offset, and File Length) from the remainder of the list (6).

  5. In the Preset panel, click Save, then name the preset (see Saving Presets on page 116).

The play preset is now ready.

  1. Click Launch in the Preset List panel to start playback of the file.

Launch Behavior

Click Launch (see Preset List Controls on page 94) to activate a previously saved preset. Launching a preset causes the configuration of the devices to change according to the device attributes and connections specified in the preset. Until launched, the Preset List defaults each preset to Stop.

In general, presets operate independently of each other. When a preset launches, devices in the preset are configured according to the attributes and connections of the preset regardless of their previous mode and operation. No other devices in the system are affected.

When the same devices are used in multiple presets, device operation is defined by the configuration and connections made in the last preset launched.

Switcher Launch Behavior

When a switching preset is launched, attributes for each device in the preset are changed according to the device attributes saved in the preset (see Device Attributes on page 98). The connections between the devices are then made according to the diagrams in the Preset design workspace (see Preset Design Panel on page 97).

Recorder Launch Behavior

The Launch Status in the Device Attribute panel (see Device Attributes on page 98) is available for presets that contain recorder or player devices. A recorder preset follows the same behavior as a switcher, first changing attributes which include creating recording directories and files, then making connections. The recording action provides a transport bar to monitor operation (see Transport Bar Shortcut on page 127). Playback behavior first selects the location of the playback files, then begins playback according to the launch state selection.

The behavior defines the recorder or player actions when launched, specifically when a new preset uses a device active in another preset. Specific behavior is described in the following tables.

Player Active Status
Playing Recording(5-Channel Only)None
Player PresetPlay Stopplaying the existing file, load and play the new file.Stop recording the existing file, provision and play the new file.Provision and play the file per the preset.
ProvisionProvision the new file, continue playing the current file according to its preset status and wait.Stop recording the existing file, provision the new file and wait.Provision the file and wait.
Recorder Active Status
Playing (5-Channel Only)Recording None
Recorder PresetRecord Stop playing the existing file, provision and record the new file.Stop recording the existing file. Provision and record the new file.Provision the new file and start recording.
Provision Stop playing the current file, provision the new file for recording and wait.Stop recording the current file. Provision the new file, and wait.Provision the recorder per the preset and wait.
NOTE: All channels on a 5-channel recorder are automatically set to the same mode (record or play) whether they are present in the active preset or not.

Transport Dialog Box - Recorder

When a recorder preset is launched (see Preset List Controls on page 94), a transport dialog box displays the recording status and provides control of the recording. Only the most recent preset launch is displayed (see figure 105).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Transport Dialog Box - Recorder - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Preset: GB_LIVE_REC"] --> B["Recording"]
    B --> C["Recorder Status"]
    C --> D["Current Recording File Size"]
    D --> E["19MBytes"]
    B --> F["Current Recording Duration"]
    F --> G["Start Recording"]
    F --> H["Stop Recording"]

Figure 105. Transport Dialog Box-Recorder

When the launch status in the Device Attributes panel is configured to Record, recording begins immediately and the transport dialog monitors the recording (see figure 102). If the launch status is set to Provision, the panel provides manual control of the recording start and stop.
The recorder transport dialog box has the following functionality:

Status / Action Description Comment
Preset launched Transport dialog opens.Recording Status = StoppedRecording duration = 00:00:00:00Filesize = 0 MBytes
Record button (Provision)Begins recording when pressed.Same as above.
Record button (Record)Recording starts immediately.Status = RecordingRecording duration = Displays the current duration (time) of the recording.Filesize = displays the current storage size (MBytes) of the recording.
Stop (Provision or Record)Stops recording. Status = StoppedRecording duration = Displays the duration (time) of the entire recording.Filesize = displays the final storage size (MBytes).
NOTE: It is not possible to record an HDCP encrypted source, however, this condition is not rules checked in the preset manager since the source content is known only when the recording is started.If an attempt to record HDCP content is made, the transport bar behaves as described for all content. However, the recorded file is not created if the content is HDCP encrypted. This condition is not flagged in the user interface.

Transport Dialog Box – Player

When the launch status in Device Attributes is configured to Play, playback begins immediately and the transport dialog box monitors playback. If the launch status is set to Provision, manual control of the playback start and stop is available.

The Player panel also provides the following functionality:

Preset: GB_SC_PLAY Stopped ① 00:00:00:00 ② ③ 00:02:20:00 ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧

Figure 106. Transport Dialog Box - Player

Play Transport Control Behavior
Status / Action Description Comment
Preset launched Transport dialog box launched.1 Status = Stopped2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Slider positioned at left hand side.4 Current file time = 00:00:00:006 Shuttle control = Play x1
Play button (7)From Stop: Start playing the current file.From Pause: Resume play from the current time.1 Status = Playing2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Slider moves to the right as the file plays.4 Current file time = Shows running file time.6 Shuttle control = Play x1
Pause button (7)Pauses the current file (not operative from stop mode).1 Status = Paused2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Slider stationery.4 Current file time = Current file time.6 Shuttle control = Pause
Stop (7)Stops playback.1 Status = Stopped2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Slider positioned at left hand side.4 Current file time = 00:00:00:006 Shuttle control = Play x1
Shuttle control (6)Provide access to x1, x2, x4 and x8 speed control in forward and reverse.1 Status = Shows direction and speed.2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Tracks the time and direction.4 Current file time = Static at last value.6 Shuttle control = Speed and direction appear above the slider control.
Slider control (5)This slider can be dragged to any point on the progress bar. Forces play x1.1 Status = Playing2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = File time at the slider position.4 Current file time = Current time, incrementing.6 Shuttle control = Play x1
Jog Control (8)Provides access to 1, 5, 10 and 20 frame steps in both forward and reverse direction.Only active from Pause mode.1 Status = Paused2 File duration = File length [time].3 Progress bar = Not updated.4 Current file time =Not updated.6 Shuttle control = Pause
NOTE: File time is displayed to the nearest second.

Selecting a File for Playback

To select a file for playback (single or five channel recorder):

  1. Create a preset with a player and decoder or display (see Creating Presets on page 113).
  2. Select the player channel in the Preset workspace. The Device Attributes panel populates with the appropriate options.
  3. Click in the Directory field of the Device Attribute panel, then click the drop-down button at the right hand side of the Directory field (see figure 104, ①).

Device Attributes Name VNR100:p Directory File Launch Status Play Time Sync Yes Start Offset 00:00:00 Stop Offset 00:00:00 File Length 00:00:09

Figure 107. Device Attributes, Directory Selection

The File Recording browser opens.

  1. In the browser, click the directory containing the desired file (the directory is highlighted, see figure 108, ①).

Recording Browser (Recorder_5Channel:1) IITSEC InfoComm2011 RecTst_chase_01 Rec_Test-2013-03-18-10-44-03 Rec_Test-2013-03-18-10-48-42 RecTest_01 Test_01 Test_02 Test_03 Test_04 OpenClose

Figure 108. Recorder Browser, Directory Browsing

  1. Click Open (see figure 108, ②).
  2. A dialog box opens (see figure 109 on the next page).

a. Select Yes to automatically assign the video files to corresponding player channels. If the directory contains five files recorded on a 5-channel recorder, it loads the corresponding files into slots 1 through 5 of the device. It also populates multiple player devices within the preset if they are all part of the same original recording group. The preset is ready to launch.

b. No loads the file only to the device selected in the Preset panel. Proceed to step 7.

Auto Populate other Recorders in Preset Automatically Load Playback Files for the other Recorders in the preset? Yes No

Figure 109. Device Attributes, Load Playback File

NOTE: For multi-channel recordings made on a 5-channel device, it is not possible to select content from different directories (recordings) for replay.

  1. Click in the File field of the Device Attribute panel (see figure 110, ①), then click on the drop-down button at the right hand side of the File field.

Device Attributes Name VNR100:p Directory /GFChaseTst/ File Launch Status Play Time Sync Yes Start Offset 00:00:00 Stop Offset 00:00:00 File Length 00:00:03

Figure 110. Recorder Device Attributes, File Selection

The browser opens to the directory (see figure 111) with a list of available files.

  1. Select the desired file (see figure 111, ①).

Name Record Timestamp Length Streams Description GFRecTst_01 18-03-13 13:07:02 00:01:11 v ② Open Close

Figure 111. File Browser, Select File

  1. Click Open (②).

The recorder is ready to play the selected file (see figure 112).

Device Attributes
NameVNR100:p
Directory/GFChaseTst/
FileGFRecTst_01
Launch StatusPlay
Time SyncYes
Start Offset00:00:00
Stop Offset00:00:00
File Length00:01:11

Figure 112. Device Attributes, Playback File Selected

The remaining device attributes provide several options for playback of the selected file.

Launch Status

The launch status options are:

- Play: When launched, the preset immediately configures the devices in the preset and starts playback of the selected file.

- Provision: When launched, the preset configures the devices for playback to begin, then displays the player transport controls with the player in pause. The Play button must be pressed to initiate playback.

The playback transport panel opens regardless of which launch status is chosen.

Time Sync

The time sync setting maintains the timing relationship between content loaded across multiple devices.

Select Yes (enabled) to play related files made at the same point in time across multiple devices as part of a group.

Select No (disabled) to play unrelated files across multiple devices in a preset.

Setting the start and end times for playback

Start offset is changed to set the starting point for replay in hours, minutes, and seconds. The default value is 00:00:00.

The Stop offset setting is changed to set the end point for replay in hours, minutes, and seconds. The default value is the end of the file.

Adjustment of both settings is limited to within the time of the recorded file.

NOTE: An end time cannot be set for live play mode.

File length

The read-only file length field displays the total play time in hh:mm:ss format.

Transport Bar Shortcut

The transport bar can also be launched by the preset in the Preset List, then choosing Transport Controls.

Refresh Launch Transport Controls Delete

Figure 113. Right-click Access to Transport Controls

Chase-Play Feature (VNR 100 Only)

The chase-play feature allows a user to view a live recording while the recording is in progress. The live file can be played, paused, or searched from any point in the file as the recording progresses.

Configuration

A recording preset is built and configured in the normal way (see Recorder Presets on page 119). Note the directory and filename given to the recording (see figure 114).

Preset: RecChaseTst_recDevice Attributes
VNE300_2 VNR100.rName VNR100.r
Directory /GFChaseTst/Directory for the live recording.
File Chase_Play_01File name of the live recording.
Launch Status ProvisionAction when file is launched.
Description Recording for Chase/Play Test
Ancillary No
Column FEC No
Row FEC No

Figure 114. Device Attributes, Recording Preset for Live Recording

A corresponding player preset is built and configured in the normal way using the same directory and filename configured in the recorder preset (see Player Presets on page 120).

Preset: RecChaseTst_playDevice Attributes
NameVNR100:p
Directory/GFChaseTst/
FileChase_Play_01
Launch StatusProvision
Time SyncYes
Start Offset00:00:00
Stop Offset00:00:00
File Length00:03:41

Figure 115. Device Attributes, Player for Live Recording

NOTE: When selecting the playback filename, a file that is currently recording is flagged with a red record marker in the file browser (see figure 116).

NameRecord TimestampLengthStreamsDescription
Chase_Play_0106-05-13 09:11:1200:00:16vRecording for Chase/Play Test

Figure 116. File Browser, Active Recording

To begin chase-play:

  1. Launch the recorder preset. The transport bar opens with the recorder in pause (see Transport Dialog Box – Recorder on page 122).
  2. Start the recorder from the transport bar.
  3. Launch the player preset (see Transport Dialog Box - Recorder on page 122). The transport bar opens with the player in pause.
  4. The player file transport bar displays the file information for the live recording. Transport control behavior in live flow is shown in the following table.

Features available for playback of live content (chase-play) are the same as those supported for normal playback (see Launch Behavior on page 121).

Transport Control Behavior - Live Play
Player Control FunctionComments
Play Starts playing the active recording from any point (time).The location where replay starts can be set to any time from the file beginning to within one second of the end of the live file.
Pause Pauses the replay at its current time. Live recording continues.
Stop Stops the replay.Live recording continues.
Fast forward (shuttle) The content is decoded at the required (faster than real-time) rate in the forward direction.The speed can be any supported rate.
FAST reverse (shuttle) The content is decoded at the required (faster than real time) rate in the reverse direction.The speed can be any supported rate.
Frame advance (jog) The content is paused and the next new frame is decoded each time the control is operated.NOTE: If the frame advance time is equal to the current time of the file minus 1 second, then the transport mode remains paused.
Frame reverse (jog) The content is paused and the previous frame is decoded each time the control is operated.NOTE: If the fast reverse time is equal to the start time of the file, then the transport mode remains paused.

About the Format Editor Page

This section provides information about:

  • About Custom Source and Display Formats
  • Creating a New Source Format (Input Mode)
  • Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode)
  • Deleting Formats
    • About the Source Format Editor
    • About the Display Format Editor

This page is accessed by selecting the Format Editor tab (see figure 117).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on:admin switcher logout Source Formats + Display Formats 840 x 480 60p DMT 840 x 480 72p DMT 840 x 480 75p DMT 840 x 480 85p DMT 720 x 480 59.94p HDFrEND 720 x 480 60i NTSC SMPTE 720 x 480 60i NTSC-M 720 x 576 50i PAL SMPTE 720 x 576 50i PAL-I 720 x 576 50p HDFrEND 800 x 600 50p 800 x 600 56p DMT 800 x 600 60p CVT 800 x 600 60p DMT 800 x 600 60p GTF 800 x 600 72p DMT 800 x 600 75p CVT

Figure 117. Format Editor Page

The Format Editor page manages and creates resolutions that can be used by sources and displays on the VN-Matrix system.

NOTE: The VN-Matrix 300 and 325 series input and output resolutions are fixed and cannot be modified.

About Custom Source and Display Formats

Custom source and display formats may be created when a specific input or output mode is not supported in the standard list of resolutions supplied with a VN-Matrix device. Once defined, the parameters for custom input and output modes are stored on the VNM Enterprise Controller. This means that they are available for use on any VN-Matrix device that is managed by that controller.

NOTE: Custom input modes can only be created for unsupported analogue input types. It is not possible to create custom input modes for digital inputs.

Figure 118 shows the recommended system configuration used to create a new input or output mode.
Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - About Custom Source and Display Formats - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Source"] --> B["VN-Matrix Encoder"]
    C["Display"] --> B
    D["Browser Based User Control"] --> B
    E["Display"] --> F["VN-Matrix Decoder"]
    B --> G["VNM Enterprise Controller"]
    F --> G
    G --> H["Cloud"]

Figure 118. Recommended Setup for Creating Custom Input and Output Modes

Creating a New Source Format (Input Mode)

There can be instances when a VN-Matrix device configured as an encoder cannot detect an input source. This can happen when:

- An unrecognized input source connected to the encoder is not defined in the Format menu (see Measured Video Properties panel on page 46).

- The timing of the input source may deviate from the standard timings for that signal. In these situations, a custom input mode needs to be created for the source.

NOTE: Custom input modes are only required for analog sources. A VN-Matrix device automatically creates custom input modes for DVI sources based on their EDID.

Use the following procedure to create a custom source format (input mode).

NOTE: This procedure relates to creating a specific new mode (1280 x 600 60Hz, progressive). However, it can be used to create any new input mode.

  1. Connect a source that requires a custom input mode to a VN-Matrix encoder.

  2. Connect a display monitor to the out/loop connector on the encoder. An analog monitor can also be used, but is not recommended.

NOTES:

  • Using a DVI display eliminates any issues with the monitor not correctly sampling the analog input. If the display device in use does not fully support the source format, then it may not be possible to properly adjust the settings for the encoder itself.
  • The VN-Matrix encoder is designed to accept an analog source and output a digital image on the DVI-I out/loop connector if a digital display is connected.
  • Initially, there may not be any image output to the display from the DVI-I out/loop connector. If this happens, the default splash screen is displayed.

  • Connect the encoder to the VN-Matrix network (see the VN-Matrix 200/225/300/325 user guides for more information).

  • Open a web browser on the control PC and log into the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11). Keep this tab on the left (see figure 119, ①).
  • Duplicate the web-based user interface of the VNM Enterprise Controller using a second browser tab. Keep this tab on the right (see figure 119, ③).

Leave both browser tabs open as they are needed to complete this procedure (see images below).

  1. On the left tab, select the Devices page (②).

1 Devices - Extron Enterprise... Devices - Extron Enterprise ... Extron. Electronics Alarms Configurati Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Status Mode Device Id Device Name P Address Controller

First Tab, Devices Selected Second Tab, Format Editor Selected

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manage Format Editor System Info Source Formats

Figure 119. Devices and Format Editor

The Devices page opens (see figure 120).

  1. Choose the encoder connected to the VN-Matrix network in step 3 (see figure 120, ①).

Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Status Mode Device Id Device Name P Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 192.168.254.254 (11 Items) ● ... 1021158 80_IMP900 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV1 ver3.10.8 ● ... 1080104 60_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 1080117 60_VNM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 1080124 60_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.45 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 11211552 60_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.36 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-A ver3.10.8 ● ... 620032 60_Rack_Del 192.168.0.49 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-A0 ver3.10.8 ● ... 620097 60_Small_Del 192.168.0.47 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-A ver3.10.8 ● ... 720193 60_Cars 192.168.0.39 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DV-A ver3.10.8 ● ... 720200 60_Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 192.168.254.254 VND 200 DV ver3.10.8 ● ... 790088 60_VNM300_Decode 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VND 300 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 790041 60_VNM300_Encode 192.168.0.51 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 Controller: 192.168.254.253 (7 Items) ● ... 1080101 61_VNM325_Decode_2 192.168.0.33 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 1080120 61_VNM325_Decode_1 192.168.0.42 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 1080121 61_VNM325_Encode_2 192.168.0.43 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 1080125 61_VNM325_Encode_1 192.168.0.48 192.168.254.253 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.6.8 ● ... 620023 61_MS9500 192.168.0.50 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DV ver3.10.8 ● ... 620091 61_Remote_Decode_2 192.168.0.54 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DV-A ver3.10.8 ● ... 720202 61_Remote_Decode_1 192.168.0.56 192.168.254.253 VNC 200 DV ver3.10.8 Actions: Por phoralesCompressionFormatConfigesComptors/Minb/Maxed/ugracted access Group

Figure 120. Devices Page

  1. From the Actions bar located at the bottom of the Devices page, click Format (2). The Source Format dialog box opens.
  2. Select auto from the Mode drop-down list (see figure 121, ①).

Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: none Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.802 Active Pixels: 0 Active Lines: 0 First Pxiet: 0 First Line: 0 Phase: 0 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto ①① Phase: 0 ② Color Space: RGB ③ Macrovision Defeat: Blanking Blanking: manual ④ Pixels: 0 ⑤ Lines: 0 ⑥

Figure 121. Source Format Menu

  1. Select from the Phase drop-down list (2).
  2. Use the Color Space drop-down list to select the option that matches the connected source (③).

  3. Select manual from the Blanking drop-down list (see figure 121, 4 on the previous page).

  4. Enter 0 in the Pixels field (5).
  5. Enter in the Lines field (6).

Leave the Source Format window open.

  1. Using the right tab (see figure 122, ①), select the Format Editor page (②).
  2. Select an input mode from the list of source formats (3).

NOTE: If the frame rate or the resolution of the source is already known, select a similar source format. Otherwise, select any source format from the list.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Source Formats 3 3 Source Format - 1200 x 700.00p 1280 x 720 80p SMPTE 1280 x 768 80p 1280 x 768 80p CVT 1280 x 768 80p GTF 1280 x 960 80p DMT 1280 x 960 55p DMT 1200 x 1024 80p CVT 1200 x 1024 80p DMT 1200 x 1024 80p OTF 1200 x 1024 75p DMT 1200 x 1024 85p DMT 1360 x 768 80p CVT 1360 x 768 80p GTF 1365 x 768 80p WXGA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 50p CVT 1600 x 900 50p GTF 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 80p CVT 1600 x 1200 80p DMT Line Count: 803 Line Period (ms): 20.729 Pixels Per Line: 1065 HSize: 1280 VSize: 768 First Pixel: 375 First Line: 36 Trayne Ignor: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Display Formats SaveAs Check

Figure 122. Source Format Editor Page (VN-Matrix 2xx Only)

  1. Click SaveAs (4), to save the resolution.
  2. In the Save Source Format As dialog box, enter a name for the new source format and click OK (see figure 123).

Save Source Format As Enter a name for the new source format 1280 x 600 60p Test OK Cancel

Figure 123. Saving a Source Format

NOTES:

  • Resolutions must be saved using the following format at the beginning of the filename: x
  • The end of the filename may contain identifying characters.

Examples:

640 x 400 85p

640 x 400 85p TEST

720 x 480 59.94p HDFrEND

  1. The name of the new source is listed above the source format properties (see figure 124, 1).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Source Formats 1280 x 726 60p SMPTE 1280 x 600 60p Test 1280 x 768 60p CVT 1280 x 768 60p GTF 1280 x 960 60p DMT 1280 x 960 65p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DNT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1350 x 768 60p CVT 1350 x 768 60p GTF 1305 x 768 60p WXBA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1500 x 900 60p CVT 1500 x 900 60p GTT 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 60p CVT 1500 x 1200 60p DNT Display Formats Source Format - 1280 x 600 60p Test Line Count: 803 Line Period (ms): 20.729 Pixels Per Line: 1685 HSize: 1200 VSize: 768 First Pixel: 375 First Line: 35 Trisync Ignore: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete

Figure 124. New Source Format Saved

  1. Return to the left tab (see figure 125, ①) where the Source Format dialog box is open. Note the values in the Line Count and Line Period (ms) fields (②).

1 Devices - Extron Enterprise ... Devices - Extron Enterprise ... Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: none Type: analog 2 Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.802 Active Pixels: 0 Active Lines: 0 First Pxiet: 0 First Line: 0

Figure 125. Source Format Line Count and Line Period (ms)

  1. Using the format editor located on the right tab, make sure the new source is selected from the Source Formats list (see figure 126, ①) panel and enter the values from step 20 into the Line Count and Line Period (ms) fields on the right panel (Source Format - 1280 x 600 60p Test) (②).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Source Formats ① 1260 x 720 80p SMPTE 1280 x 800 80p Test 1280 x 788 80p CVT 1280 x 700 80p GTF 1280 x 960 80p DMT 1280 x 900 85p DMT 1280 x 1024 80p CVT 1280 x 1024 80p DMT 1280 x 1024 80p OTF 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1360 x 768 80p CVT 1360 x 788 80p GTF 1365 x 768 90p WKGA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 80p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 80p CVT 1600 x 900 50p GTF 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 80p CVT 1600 x 1200 80p DMT Display Formats Source Format - 1260 x 600 80p Test ② Load: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.002 Pixels Per Line: 1635 HSize: 1230 VSize: 763 First Pixel: 375 First Line: 36 Trisync Ignore: 9 Interface: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete ③

Figure 126. Enter Values Into the Source Format Editor Page

  1. Click Save (3), to save the resolution.
  2. Click the left tab (see figure 127, ①).

1 Devices - Extron Enterprise... Devices - Extron Enterprise ... Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Status Mode Device Id Device Name P Address Controller

Figure 127. First Tab, Devices Selected

  1. Click Devices (②).

  2. Force a resync of the source by selecting auto from the Mode drop-down list (see figure 128, ①).

Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test ②② Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto ① Phase: 0 Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Blanking Blanking: manual Pixels: 0 Lines: 0 EDID From Monitor: No Device To Source: transparent

Figure 128. Force a Resync of the Source

  1. The name of the new source created in step 16 is now visible in the Current Mode field (②). If the new source name is not visible, check these items.

  2. Refresh the Source Format dialog box. Close, then open the dialog box by clicking Format from the Actions menu bar.

  3. Is the source still connected or if the source is a PC, is the PC still active or has it entered hibernate mode?
  4. Is the new source name in the Mode drop-down list? If not, use the right tab (Source Format Editor) and make sure the new source is saved.
  5. Check that values entered into the Source Format Editor dialog box (step 21) were input correctly.

  6. The Measured Video Properties panel now displays information about the new source.

NOTE: The loop-through display can now show an image. The edges of the image can be missing since the image is not properly adjusted yet.

  1. Note the values in the First Pixel (see figure 129, ①) and First Line fields (②).

Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto Phase: 0 Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Blanking Blanking: manual Pixels: 0 Lines: 0 EDID From Monitor: No Device To Source: transparent

Figure 129. Source Format Menu First Pixel and First Line Values

  1. Using the right tab (see figure 130, ①), on the Format Editor page (②), enter the values that were noted in step 28 into the First Pixel (③) and First Line (④) fields.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Source Formats 1200 x 720 60p SN/PTE 1280 x 600 60p Test 1250 x 768 60p CVT 1250 x 768 60p GTF 1250 x 900 60p DNT 1280 x 960 85p DNT 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1250 x 1024 60p DMT 1250 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 75p DNT 1280 x 1024 85p DNT 1360 x 768 60p CVT 1360 x 768 60p GTF 1365 x 768 60p VYXGA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 60p CVT 1600 x 900 60p GTF 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 60p CVT 1600 x 1200 60p DNT Display Formats Source Format - 1200 x 600 60p Test Line Count: 803 Line Period (ms): 26.802 Pixels Per Line: 1685 HSize: 1200 VSize: 700 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Trisync Ignore: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete

Figure 130. Enter Values Into the Source Format Editor Page

  1. Click Save (5), located at the lower right corner of the page, to save the resolution.

  2. Return to the left tab (Source Format menu) (see figure 131, ①) and select auto from the Mode drop-down list (②) to force a resync of the source.

NOTE: Although the overall image can still look incorrect, the loop-through display now has its top left corner correctly positioned and there should be no cropping on this edge of the image. If the top left corner is still not correctly positioned, fine tune the image position. Alter the value of the First Pixel field on the Source Format Editor (right tab) dialog box, force a resync of the source (using the left tab, Source Format menu), and check the image on the loop-through display again.

Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto Phase: 0 Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Blanking Blanking: manual Pixels: 0 Lines: 0 EDID From Monitor: No Device To Source: transparent

Figure 131. Force a Resync of the Source

  1. Click the right device tab (see figure 132, ①).

  2. Select the Format Editor (2).

  3. In the Source Format panel, adjust the Pixels Per Line field (③) to size the image correctly.

Be sure to click the Save button each time the line is adjusted (4).

NOTE: The pixels per line may or may not be close to the required value depending on the mode chosen as the starting point in step 16. A suitable starting value can be estimated by adding together the values of the Active Pixels and First Pixel fields shown in the Source Format dialog box (left tab in this procedure).

Extron. Electronics Alerms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher login Source Formats 1280 x 726 60p SMPTE 1280 x 600 60p Test 1280 x 768 60p CVT 1280 x 768 60p GTF 1280 x 960 60p DMT 1280 x 960 85p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p QTF 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1360 x 768 60p CVT 1360 x 768 60p GTF 1365 x 768 60p WXGA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1500 x 900 60p CVT 1500 x 900 60p GTF 1500 x 1200 50p 1500 x 1200 60p CVT 1500 x 1200 60p DMT Display Formats Source Format - 1280 x 600 60p Test Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.802 Pixels Per Line: 1635 HSize: 1230 VSize: 763 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Trisync Ignore: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete

Figure 132. Enter Values Into the Source Format Editor Page

- Use the fine line moiré test pattern on the display to adjust this field.

NOTE: If a fine line moiré test pattern is not available, then this field can be adjusted by monitoring the right side of the image and setting the value so that adding or subtracting 1 pixel either shows all of the image or crops the last pixel.

- With the fine line moiré test pattern displayed, there should be no aliasing (banding) visible in the image.

- If banding is visible and the right side of the image is missing, reduce the Pixels Per Line value by 20 or 30 pixels.

- If banding is visible and all of the image is shown, increase the Pixels Per Line value by 20 or 30 pixels.

  1. Return to the left tab (Source Format menu) (see figure 133, ①) and select auto from the Mode drop-down list (②) to force a resync of the source. Check the display for banding.

Source Format (1021158) Status Source: not supported Stream: (0,1) Lock: 0 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto Phase: 0 Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Blanking Blanking: manual Pixels: 0 Lines: 0 EDID From Monitor: No Device To Source: transparent

Figure 133. Force a Resync of the Source

  1. Repeat steps 34 and 35, adjusting the number of pixels added or subtracted until there is no banding in the image.

  2. Using the left tab (Source Format menu), note the value of the First Pixel field (see figure 134, ①).

Status Source: not supported Stream: (1,1) Lock: 1 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 Pixel: 308 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz

Figure 134. Note Source Format Menu Value

  1. Click the right tab (Source Format Editor page), (see figure 135, ①) and enter the value from step 37 into the First Pixel field (②).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Source Formats 1280 x 720 60p SWPTE 1280 x 600 60p Test 1280 x 768 60p CVT 1280 x 768 60p GTF 1280 x 960 60p DMT 1280 x 960 85p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 65p DMT 1360 x 768 60p CVT 1360 x 768 60p GTF 1365 x 768 60p VXBA 1400 x 1050 50p 1400 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 60p CVT 1600 x 900 60p GTF 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 60p CVT 1600 x 1200 60p DMT Display Formats Source Format - 1280 x 600 60p Test Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.8C2 Pixels Per Line: 1635 HSize: 1230 VSize: 763 Pixel: 303 First Line: 22 Trisync Ignore: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete

Figure 135. Enter Values Into the Source Format Editor Page

  1. Click Save (③), located at the lower right corner of the page, to save the resolution.

  2. Click the left tab (Source Format menu), (see figure 136, ①) and select auto from the Mode drop-down list to force a resync of the source (②).

NOTE: The loop-through display now displays the left side of the image correctly.

Source Format (620032) Status Source: active Stream: (1,1) Lock: 1 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: Analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 322 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input Mode: auto ②② Phase: 0 Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Banking Blanking: manual Pixels: 0 Lines: 0

Figure 136. Force a Resync of the Source

  1. Click the right tab (Source Format Editor), (see figure 137, ①) and adjust the Pixels Per Line value (②) by plus or minus one pixel to see if this improves image sharpness. Click the Save button (③) each time the source is adjusted.

When you are satisfied with the image, proceed to step 42.

Extron. Electronics Alarme Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher layout Source Formats 1280 x 720 60p SUPTE 1280 x 800 60p Test 1280 x 788 60p CVT 1280 x 788 60p GTF 1280 x 960 60p DVT 1280 x 960 65p DVT 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1360 x 788 60p CVT 1360 x 788 60p GTF 1365 x 788 60p WXOA 1400 x 1059 50p 1400 x 1059 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 60p CVT 1600 x 900 60p GTF 1600 x 1200 50p 1600 x 1200 60p CVT 1600 x 1200 70p DMT Display Format Source Format - 1280 x 800 60p Test Line Count: 622 Line Poned (mat): 26.802 Peds For Line: 1635 HSize: 1250 VSize: 765 First Post: 808 First Line: 22 Trayno Ignore: 0 Interlaced: Fixed Geometry: Save SaveAs Delete 3

Figure 137. Enter Values Into the Source Format Editor Page

  1. Click the left tab (Source Format menu), (see figure 138, ①) and force a resync of the source by reselecting auto from the Mode drop-down list (②).

1 Services - Extron Enterprise Devices - Extron Enterprise ... Source Format (620032) Status Source: active Stream: (1,1) Lock: 1 Measured Video Properties Current Mode: 1280 x 600 60p Test Type: Analog Line Count: 622 Line Period (ms): 26.805 Active Pixels: 1308 Active Lines: 600 First Pixel: 308 First Line: 22 Phase: 4 Measured Audio Properties Status: 48kHz Input ② auto ③ Phase: auto Color Space: RGB Macrovision Defeat: Blanking ④ Blanking: auto Pixels: 0 Lines: 0

Figure 138. Force a Resync of the Source

NOTES:

  • Check the positioning of the image and adjust if necessary (First Pixel and First Line fields on the Source Format Editor page).
  • Check for aliasing in the moiré pattern and fine tune the Pixels Per Line field on the Source Format Editor page if required.
  • Check that the right edge of the image is properly displayed.
  • Adjustments made to the Pixels Per Line field will affect the aliasing in the moiré and the right edge of the image.
  • Resync the source each time an adjustment is made.
  • Repeat this process to fine tune the displayed image.

  • Select auto from the Phase drop-down list (see figure 138, ③).

  • Select auto from the Blanking drop-down list (4).
  • The new source format is now correctly configured. If necessary, see Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode) on page 146 for information on how to create a corresponding display format.

Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode)

One of the issues encountered using various graphic sources with VN-Matrix encoders and decoders is that the encoder often produces a loop-through image stating it has detected a valid input mode, but the decoder displays a splash screen stating "No Matching Output Mode."

Use the following procedure to create a custom display format (output mode) that is automatically selected by the decoder when it sees the corresponding input mode from the encoder.

NOTE: Before starting this procedure, there must be an active input source connected to a VN-Matrix 2xx encoder (output modes of the VN-Matrix 3xx are fixed) and the source format must be correctly configured (displayed properly).

  1. Open a web browser on the control PC and log into the VNM Enterprise Controller. See Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login.
  2. Duplicate the web-based user interface of the VNM Enterprise Controller using a second browser tab. Leave both browser tabs open as they are required to complete this procedure.
  3. Click the left tab (see figure 139, ①). Select the Devices page (②) and choose a VN-Matrix 2xx series decoder from the device list (③). A checkmark appears in the checkbox to the left of the decoder row.

1 Devices -Extron Enterprise... 2 Devices -Extron Enterprise ... Extron. Electronics Alarms Configurab Devices Format Color System Info Logged on admin: switcher: logout Status Mode Device id Device Name P Address Controller Device Type Version Controller: 192.168.254.254 3 1021158 JUP5688 192.168.0.30 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVL-4 ver3.10.10 1000124 VMN325_Etcode 192.168.0.45 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.8.9 1000125 VMN325_Etcode 192.168.0.32 192.168.254.254 VNC 325 3G-SDI ver4.8.9 820002 Rack_Dell 192.168.0.49 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVL-AD ver3.10.10 620097 720193 Cars 192.168.0.35 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.10 720200 Rack_Decode 192.168.0.38 192.168.254.254 VNC 200 DVI ver3.10.10 790006 VMN300_Encode 192.168.0.51 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI ver4.8.9 790041 VMN300_Decode 192.168.0.31 192.168.254.254 VNC 300 3G-SDI ver4.8.9 Actions: Info Connections, Configure Format Compresses Peripherals License Upgrade Mode Mac Group By Local Intract

Figure 139. Devices Page

  1. From the Actions menu bar located at the bottom of the Devices page, click Configure (4).

The Configure Device Settings dialog box opens (see figure 140).

  1. Select enable from the Mode drop-down list (see figure 140, ①). Click the X in the upper right corner of the dialog box (②) to close the Configure Device Settings dialog box.

Configure Device Settings (1021150) Device Setup Device Name: JMP0600 Mode: enable Identify Source: enable User Param 1: disable User Param 2: standby User Param 3: test

Figure 140. Configure Device Settings Dialog Box

  1. Use the Switcher page (see About the Switcher Page on page 89) to create a connection between the required source format and a decoder.

NOTE: The decoder must have a display connected to the DVI-I Out/Loop connector.

  1. Click the right tab, (see figure 141, ①) and select the Format Editor page (②).

  2. Select an output mode from the display formats panel (③).

NOTE: Select a display format from the list that closely matches the properties of the new custom display format that is being created.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Device Format Editor System Info Logged encadmin switcher logout Source Formats Display Formats: 1280 x 720 60p SMPTE 1280 x 768 60p 1280 x 768 60p GTF 1280 x 800 60p 1280 x 1024 50p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 59.94p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 60p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 75p CVT 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 75p GTF 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1360 x 768 60p CVT 1400 x 1050 50p 1408 x 1050 50p SXGA+ 1408 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 60p CVT 1600 x 900 60p GTF Display Format - 1280 x 768 60p Active Pixels: 1280 Total Pixels: 1664 Horizontal Left Border: 0 Horizontal Right Border: 0 Horizontal Front Porch: 64 Horizontal Sync Width: 128 Horizontal Back Porch: 192 Horizontal Sync Polarity: neg Frame Rate: 60 Margins: Reduced Blanking: Active Lines: 768 Total Lines: 798 Vertical Top Border: 0 Vertical Bottom Border: 0 Vertical Front Porch: 3 Vertical Sync Width: 7 Vertical Back Porch: 20 Vertical Sync Polarity: pos Pixel Clock Frequency: 79500000 Manual CVT GTF SaveAs Order

Figure 141. Display Format Editor Page

  1. Make sure that the Manual button, located at the bottom of the page, is selected (4).

  2. Enter the required values into the Active Pixels (5), Active Lines (6), and Frame Rate fields (7).

  3. Click CVT (8) located at the bottom of the page.

Notice that most of the remaining fields are now grayed out (see figure 142).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Source Formats Display Formats 1200 x 720 60p SMPTE 1200 x 768 60p 1280 x 768 60p GTF 1280 x 800 60p 1280 x 1024 50p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 59.94p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 63p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DNT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 60p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 75p CVT 1280 x 1024 75p DNT 1280 x 1024 75p GTF 1280 x 1024 85p DNT 1360 x 768 60p CVT 1400 x 1050 50p 1408 x 1050 50p SXGA+ 1408 x 1050 60p SXGA+ 1600 x 900 60p CVT 1600 x 900 60p GTF Display Format - 1280 x 768 60p Active Pixels: 1280 Total Pixels: 1564 Horizontal Left Border: 0 Horizontal Right Border: 0 Horizontal Front Parch: 64 Horizontal Sync Width: 128 Horizontal Back Parch: 132 Horizontal Sync Polarity: reg Frame Rate: 60 Margins: Reduced Blanking: Active Lines: 600 Total Lines: 768 Vertical Top Border: 0 Vertical Bottom Border: 0 Vertical Front Parch: 3 Vertical Sync Width: 7 Vertical Back Parch: qil Vertical Sync Polarity: pcs Pixel Clock Frequency: 7650.0.0.0 Manual CVT GTF Save Save As Delete

Figure 142. Display Format Editor Page

  1. Click Save As, located at the lower right corner of the page, to save the display format (see figure 142, ①).
  2. In the Save Display Format As dialog box, enter a name for the new display format and click OK (see figure 143).

NOTES:

  • Resolutions must be saved using the following format at the beginning of the filename: x .
  • The end of the filename can contain any identifying characters.

Examples:

$$ 6 4 0 \times 4 0 0 8 5 p $$

$$ 6 4 \emptyset \times 4 0 \emptyset 8 5 p T E S T $$

$$ 7 2 0 \times 4 8 0 5 9. 9 4 p H D F r E N D $$

Save Display Format As Enter a name for the new display format 1280 x 600 60p Test OK Cancel

Figure 143. Save a Display Format

  1. After saving the new display format, note the grayed out fields are updated revealing the timing details of the required display format.
  2. Using the left browser tab, select the Devices page (see Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode) on page 146) and choose a VN-Matrix decoder from the device list.
  3. From the Actions menu bar at the bottom of the Devices page, click Format. The Display Format dialog box opens (see figure 144).

Display Format (720223) Current Format: 1024 x 768 60p GTF Output Format: 1280 x 600 60p Test Scale To Output Format: 1024 x 768 85p DMT Sync on Green: 1152 x 864 75p CVT Enable Splash Screen: 1152 x 864 75p DMT Playback Delay (s): 1152 x 864 75p GTF 1280 x 1024 50p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 59.94p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 60p CVT 1280 x 1024 60p DMT 1280 x 1024 60p GTF 1280 x 1024 60p VECTOR 1280 x 1024 75p CVT 1280 x 1024 75p DMT 1280 x 1024 75p GTF 1280 x 1024 85p DMT 1280 x 600 60p Test

Figure 144. Display Format Menu

  1. Select the new display format created in step 13 from the Output Format drop-down list (see figure 144, ①). The new display format is applied and the image is displayed.

Deleting Formats

NOTES:

  • The default resolutions provided with the VNM Enterprise Controller cannot be deleted.
  • Custom resolutions that are being used by any active VN-Matrix device cannot be deleted.

To delete a custom resolution format, select a resolution and click Delete located at the lower right corner of the Format Editor page (see figure 145 on page 150).

About the Source Format Editor

To view or change the properties of a source format:

  1. Click the right tab, (see figure 145, ①).
  2. Click the Format Editor tab (②).

The Format Editor page opens.

  1. Click the Source Formats bar to open a list of source formats (③).
  2. Select the desired source format (④). The properties of the selected resolution are listed in the Source Format panel on the right (⑤).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logcur Source Formats 3 Source format - 640 x 450 85p 5 040 x 350 05p 840 x 400 85p 640 x 450 85p 040 x 400 60p DMT 640 x 480 72p DMT 640 x 480 75p DMT 040 x 480 05p DMT 720 x 400 76p 720 x 400 85p 720 x 400 59.94p HDFrEND 720 x 480 66i NTSC SMPTE 720 x 480 66i NTSC-M 720 x 576 56i PAL SMPTE 720 x 576 56i PALI 720 x 576 56p HDFrEND 800 x 600 56p 800 x 600 56p DMT Display Formats Save - SaveAs Delete

Figure 145. Source Resolution Properties

To create a new source format, modify the desired fields in the Source Format panel and click SaveAs in the lower right corner (6), to save the resolution to the Source Formats list with a new name. For additional information on creating source formats, see Creating a New Source Format (Input Mode) on page 132.

NOTES:

  • Resolutions must be saved using the following format at the beginning of the filename: x .
  • The end of the filename can contain any identifying characters.

Examples:

640 x 400 85p

640 x 400 85p TEST

720 x 480 59.94p HDFrEND

• Line Count — Specify the number of horizontal lines of information.
• Line Period (ms) — Specify how often the horizontal lines of information are updated.
- Pixels Per Line — Specify how many pixels are used to create each line of information.
- HSize — Specify the horizontal resolution (number of pixels wide) from the source.
- VSize — Specify the vertical resolution (number of pixels high) from the source.
- First Pixel — Specify the position of the first active pixel in the line.
- First Line — Specify the position of the first active line in the frame.

  • Trisync Ignore — Zero for all source types. 100 for source types using tri-level sync.
    • Interlaced — Check this box to use interlaced video.
  • Fixed Geometry — This function is currently not implemented.

About the Display Format Editor

  1. Select the Format Editor tab (see figure 146, ①).
  2. Click the Display Formats bar (②) to open a list of display resolutions.
  3. Select the desired source format resolution (③). The properties populate the Display Format panel on the right (④).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Source Formats + Display Formats ② 600 x 400 60p 640 x 480 60p DMT 640 x 480 72p DMT 640 x 480 75p DMT 640 x 480 85p DMT 720 x 480 59.94p HDFrEND 720 x 480 60i NTSC SMPTE 720 x 480 60i NTSC-M 720 x 576 50i PAL SMPTE 720 x 576 50i PAL-I 720 x 576 50p HDFrEND 800 x 600 50p 800 x 600 56p DMT 800 x 600 60p CVT 800 x 600 60p DMT 800 x 600 60p GTF 800 x 600 72p DMT Display Format - 600 x 400 60p ④ Active Pixels: 800 Total Pixels: 800 Horizontal Left Border: 3 Horizontal Right Border: 3 Horizontal Front Porch: 3 Horizontal Sync Width: 96 Horizontal Back Porch: 40 Horizontal Sync Polarity: neg Frame Rate: 60 Margins: Reduced Blanking: Manual CVT GTF Active Lines: 400 Total Lines: 525 Vertical Top Border: 8 Vertical Bottom Border: 8 Vertical Front Porch: 2 Vertical Sync Width: 2 Vertical Back Porch: 25 Vertical Sync Polarity: neg Pixel Clock Frequency: 25175000 Save: SaveAs Delete

Figure 146. Display Resolution Properties

To create a new display format, modify the Display Format panel fields on the right as needed, then click SaveAs (5) to save the resolution to the Display Formats list. For additional information on creating display formats, see Creating a New Display Format (Output Mode) on page 146.

NOTES:

  • Resolutions must be saved using the following format at the beginning of the filename: width x height rate(p).
  • The end of the filename can contain any identifying characters.

Examples:

$$ 6 4 0 \times 4 0 0 8 5 p $$

$$ 6 4 \emptyset \times 4 0 \emptyset 8 5 p T E S T $$

$$ 7 2 \emptyset \times 4 8 \emptyset 5 9. 9 4 p H D F r E N D $$

• Active Pixels — Specify the horizontal resolution (number of pixels wide).
• Active Lines — Specify the vertical resolution (number of pixels high).
• Total Pixels — Specify the total number of pixels (including syncs and blanking).
• Total Lines — Specify the total number of lines (including syncs and blanking).
- Horizontal Left Border — Specify the horizontal size of the left outer border on the display.

• Vertical Top Border — Specify the vertical size of the top outer border on the display.
- Horizontal Right Border — Specify the horizontal size of the right outer border on the display.
- Vertical Bottom Border — Specify the vertical size of the bottom outer border on the display.
- Horizontal Front Porch — Use this field to properly fit the image on the display. This field shifts the image to the left or right and is directly related to the Horizontal Back Porch field. If an adjustment is made to this field, it is recommended to adjust the Horizontal Back Porch to compensate for the shifted image.
- Vertical Front Porch — Use this field to properly fit the image on the display. This field shifts the image up or down and is directly related to the Vertical Back Porch field. If an adjustment is made to this field, it is recommended to adjust the Vertical Back Porch to compensate for the shifted image.
• Horizontal Sync Width — Specify the width (in pixels) of the horizontal sync pulse.
• Vertical Sync Width — Specify the width (in lines) of the vertical sync pulse.
- Horizontal Back Porch — Use this field to properly fit the image on the display. This field shifts the image left or right and is directly related to the Horizontal Front Porch field. If an adjustment is made to this field, it is recommended to adjust the Horizontal Front Porch to compensate for the shifted image.
- Vertical Back Porch — Use this field to properly fit the image on the display. This field shifts the image to the up or down and is directly related to the Vertical Front Porch field. If an adjustment is made to this field, it is recommended to adjust the Vertical Front Porch to compensate for the shifted image.
• Horizontal Sync Polarity — Select a positive (pos) or negative (neg) horizontal sync.
• Vertical Sync Polarity — Select a positive (pos) or negative (neg) vertical sync.
• Frame Rate — Specify the refresh rate of the video in Hz (frames per second).
- Pixel Clock Frequency — Specify the pixel clock frequency. The higher the frequency of the pixel clock, the more pixels that will appear across the screen.
- Margins — This is a legacy control that is used with input sources that contain a colored border used to accommodate displays that have wide bezels.
- Reduced Blanking — This is a control that is usually required for wide-screen modes. This control accommodates input sources containing active pixels that extend past the normal (blanking) region.
- Manual — By default, this button is selected. This button enables modification of all the display resolution properties.
- CVT — Check to select the coordinated video timing (CVT) standard. This is a VESA standard.
- GTF — Check to select the generalized timing formula (GTF) standard. This is a VESA standard.

About Alarms

This section provides information on:

  • Overview
  • Alarms Page
    • Alarm Type Reference Tables

Overview

The VN-Matrix system is configured to generate alarms for error conditions. A list of these error conditions and their meanings are presented on the following pages.

Alarms can be monitored using the Alarms page. Alarm conditions, when triggered, remain active for the duration of the error condition and for an additional five seconds after the error is cleared.

Alarms Page

This page is accessed by selecting the Alarms tab (see figure 147).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info A B C D E F G Logged or in switcher logout ID Severity Alarm Desorption Device Name Device Type Raised Time controller Severity: critical (11 items) 450772 Bed Device 620038 device620038 VNC 200 DVI-AD 2012/03/22 17:43:33 GMT+0000 192.168.254.254 450112 Bed Device 620115 device620115 VNC 200 DVI-AD 2012/03/22 18:27:56 GMT+0000 192.168.254.254 322 Bed Device 720292 Small_Dell VNC 200 DVI-AD 2012/04/02 17:06:01 GMT+0100 192.168.254.254

Figure 147. Alarms Page

The Alarms page enables a user to sort and monitor system alarms. For information on alarm types, see Alarm Type Reference Tables on page 155.

A ID Number — The ID number of the alarm.
B Severity Icons — The alarm severity is indicated by a colored icon.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Alarms Page - 2

A device under active control showing warning alarms.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Alarms Page - 3

A device under active control showing critical alarms.

C Alarm Description — The type of alarm. The information listed here is directly related to the Alarm Type column in the Alarm Type Reference Tables on page 155.

D Device — The device ID of the VNM device is shown in this column.

E Name — The name assigned to the device by the user.

F Device Type — The type or model number of the connected device.

G Raised Time — The date and time the alarm first occurred.

H Controller — The IP address of the device acting as the system controller.

Sorting Alarms by Column

Columns can be sorted by clicking directly on any of the column names. Clicking on a column name sorts the list in ascending or descending order. Figure 148 shows the alarms sorted by raised time (②). The Raised Time column is darkened and contains a ▼ icon to show that the devices are sorted by the raised alarm time in ascending order.

Hovering over the right side of a column name reveals a pull-down arrow that, when clicked, accesses the advanced column sorting menu. Use this menu to sort columns in ascending or descending order.

Sorting Alarms by Group

Alarms can be sorted in groups using the Group By menu (see figure 148, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info ID Severity Alarm Description Device Name Device Type Raised Time 2 controller Severity: critical (11 items) 3 459772 Gad Device 620938 device620938 VNC 200 DVH-AD 2012/03/22 17:43:33 GMT+000 168.192.254.254 459112 Gad Device 620115 device620115 VNC 200 DVH-AD 2012/03/22 16:27:56 GMT+000 168.192.254.254 322 Gad Device 720202 Small_Dell VNC 200 DVH-AD 2012/04/02 17:06:51 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 502 Gad Device 11211552 Dell_D839 VNE 200 DVH 2012/04/02 17:05:58 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 742 Gad Device 630991 JMP_Lift VNC 200 DVH-A 2012/04/02 17:04:33 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 383 Gad Device 630956 JMP_Right VNC 200 DVH-A 2012/04/02 17:04:33 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 202 Gad Device 2009199 Proto VNC 325 3G-SOI 2012/04/02 17:04:28 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 82 Gad Device 1089122 JMP_Rack VNC 325 3G-SOI 2012/04/02 17:04:28 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 622 Gad Device 1089123 Phoenix VNC 325 3G-SOI 2012/04/02 17:04:28 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 282 Gad Device 620997 VTG-99 VNC 200 DVH-AD 2012/04/02 17:04:28 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 442 Gad Device 620923 Dell_Precision VNC 200 DVH-AD 2012/04/02 17:04:28 GMT+0100 168.192.254.254 Security Type Device Controlled Expanded AI Collapse All

Figure 148. Grouping Alarms

The following grouping options are available.

NOTES:

  • After selecting a grouping option, groups can be further sorted using column sorting (see Sorting Devices by Column on page 38). Figure 148 shows the alarms sorted by raised time in ascending order (②).
  • Grouped alarms are expanded and collapsed by clicking on the square icon located next to the group name (③).

  • None — Removes group sorting.
    • Severity — Groups the alarms by critical severity and warning severity.
    • Type — Groups the alarms by their description (type).

  • Device — Groups the alarms by device ID. In other words, this option links each alarm to the device it originates from.
  • Controller — Groups the alarms by system controller. When a VN-Matrix system contains more than one system controller, this option links alarms to each system controller.
  • Expand All — Reveals all alarms. The alarms display under the appropriate group name.
  • Collapse All — Hides all alarms. Only the group names are displayed on the page.

Alarm Type Reference Tables

Encoders

CLI Alarm Alarm Description Fault DescriptionAlarm Type
NOSRC No Source No input source is connected.Critical, Reporting
BADSRCSYN Bad Source Syncs An input source is connected but the sync timing is not recognized.(Unable to input source due to bad sync measurements)Critical, Reporting
NOSDILOCKNo SDI Source Lock AnSDI source is connected but the signal timing is not recognized.(An SDI source is present but the PLL lock failed).Critical, Reporting
NOSDIMODEUnsupported SDI ModeThe connected SDI source mode not supported.Critical, Reporting
NOMODE Unsupported Mode The connected source is not supported; a user-mode must be created.Critical, Reporting
BADSRCBad Source A source is connected and syncs have been detected, but it is not possible to make active pixel measurements.Critical, Reporting
PHASING Analog Phasing Failure The analog pixel clock auto-phasing process failed.Warning, Reporting
HWNOVIDEOHardware Encoding ErrorThe hardware is unable to encode the input video.Critical, Reporting
UNSUPAUDIOSRCUnsupported Audio SourceThe digital audio source has a bad or unsupported clock rate.Critical, Reporting
BADAUDIOSRCBad Audio SourceThe audio source is not valid for the current video source.Warning, Reporting
VIDEOOVERLOADData Rate OverloadThe system is not able to process the source at the current settings; increase the compression.(The compressed data rate is too high, increase the compression).Critical, Reporting
NWOVERLOADNetwork OverloadThe network is dropping too many packets.Warning, Reporting
BADREVAUDIOBad Reverse AudioThe reverse audio channel contains no data or has a large number of dropouts.Warning, Reporting

Decoders

CLI Alarm Alarm Description Fault descriptionAlarm type
NOVIDEONo Decoder Video DataA stream is assigned but the decoder is not receiving video data.Warning, Reporting
NOMATCHNo Decoder Mode A videodeo stream is assigned but the decoder does not recognize the format.(The decoder cannot output the current input stream).Warning, Reporting
NOSRCREPORTNo Source Report A videodeo stream is assigned but there is no source present at the encoder.(The encoder is reporting "No Source" to the Decoder).Warning, Reporting
RECAUDIO Recovered Audio The decoder has recovered missing audio packets.Warning, Reporting
NOAUDIONo Decoder Audio DataAn audio stream is assigned, but the decoder is not receiving audio data.Warning, Reporting
BADAUDIOBad Audio At Decoder The decoder is receiving poor quality audio data.Warning, Reporting
BADAPLLBad Audio PLL The decoder is having problems synchronizing to the audio data.Warning, Reporting
VIDEODROPVideo Network Packets DroppedExcess video data has been dropped in the network.Warning, Reporting
BUFFEROVERFLOWDecoder Buffer OverflowToo many data frames at the decoder; reduce the pipeline delay.Warning, Reporting
BUFFERUNDERFLOWDecoder Buffer UnderflowToo few data frames at the decoder; increase the pipeline delay.Warning, Reporting
BADVPLLBad Video PLL The decoder is having problems synchronizing to the video data.Warning, Reporting
NOANC No Decoder ANC Data An ANC stream is assigned, but the decoder is not receiving the ANC data.Warning, Reporting
BADANCMissing ANC at DecoderThe decoder is receiving poor quality ANC data.Warning, Reporting
RECANC Recovered ANC The decoder has recovered from missing ANC packets.Warning, Reporting
GENLOCKNOSOURCENo Genlock Source PresentThere is no reference genlock source present.Critical, Reporting
GENLOCKNOLOCKNo Genlock Source LockThe reference genlock signal is invalid.Critical, Reporting
GENLOCKMISMATCHGenlock Source MismatchThe genlock reference signal mismatches the required output mode.Critical, Reporting
UNSUPAUDIOTYPEUnsupported Audio TypeAudio data type not supported by current hardware.Critical, Reporting

Encoder/Decoder

Alarm Description Fault Description Alarm Type
AUDIOVERRANGEAudio Input OverrangeThe analog input level is too high for the current range setting.Warning, Reporting
BADAUDIOHWBad Audio Hardware ReportingThe audio hardware has failed or is not present.Critical, reporting

System Controller

Alarm Description Fault Description Alarm Type
OVERTEMPOver Temperature The hhardware is too hot and operation will likely be erratic.Warning, Reporting
BADDEVICEBad Device The device is not properly communicating with the controller.Critical, Reporting
RTPHOLDOFF RTP Stream Holdoff The RTP data stream has been temporarily disabled due to excess packet drops.stream has been temporary disabled due to excess packet drops.Critical, Reporting

Dual (Redundant) Controller Configuration

This section details the basic information needed to configure the settings of dual VNM Enterprise Controllers. For information on how to set up a single controller, see Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration on page 14.

This section provides information on:

  • Setup Overview
  • Configuring Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers
  • Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller
  • Configuring VN-Matrix Devices for Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers
  • About the Cluster Properties Pages

NOTE: For additional configuration information, see Advanced Controller Configuration on page 19. Configure each VNM Enterprise Controller identically.

Setup Overview

  1. Use a network switch to connect the primary VN-Matrix network to the rear panel Ethernet connector (eth0) of each VNM Enterprise Controller (see Rear Panel Features on page 9).
  2. Use an RJ-45 crossover cable to connect the VNM Enterprise Controller Ethernet connectors (eth1) together (see figure 2 on page 3 and Rear Panel Features on page 9).
  3. Power on each VNM Enterprise Controller, all VN-Matrix devices present in the system, and all necessary devices (see Power Down Procedure on page 12).
  4. Connect a control PC to the VN-Matrix network and navigate to the web-based user interface of each VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).
  5. Configure the settings of each VNM Enterprise Controller (see Configuring Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers on page 159).
  6. Configure the VNM Enterprise Controller pair to act as the controller for the VN-Matrix system (see Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller on page 165).
  7. Configure the devices within the VN-Matrix system (see Configuring VN-Matrix Devices for Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers on page 171).
  8. If necessary, update the license of each VNM Enterprise Controller (see Controller Firmware and License Updates on page 179).
  9. Power down each VNM Enterprise Controller and all configured devices (see Power Down Procedure on page 12). After a few seconds, power on each VNM Enterprise Controller and all necessary devices.

Configuring Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers

This section details how to set up and configure dual (redundant) VNM Enterprise Controllers.

Configuring the Network Settings (Eth0)

NOTES:

  • The VNM Enterprise Controllers should not be paired when configuring the network settings. For information on how to unpair VNM Enterprise Controllers, see Unpairing controllers on page 174.
  • Be aware that unpairing and then pairing a VNM Enterprise Controller deletes device configuration files, presets, and custom input or output modes.
  • Each VNM Enterprise Controller must use an IP address that contains the same network prefix and subnet.
    • Each VNM Enterprise Controller must use the same subnet mask address.

Each VNM Enterprise Controller is pre-configured with the following network settings.

IP address: 192.168.254.254

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Gateway: 192.168.254.1

MTU: 1500

NOTE: With these default settings, devices connected to the VN-Matrix network must use IP addresses within the range of 192.168.254.2 through 192.168.254.253 and use the same subnet mask.

Use the following procedure to change the network settings of each VNM Enterprise Controller.

  1. Log into the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).

  2. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 149, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Network 3- Internet Protocol IP Address: 192.188.254.254 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 192.188.254.253 MTU: 1500 Ethernet eth0 MAC address: 00:26:90:14:b0:60 eth1 MAC address: Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 149. Configuration Page — Configuring the Network Setting

  1. Click the Network link under Device Properties (②).

  2. In the Internet Protocol panel, change the IP Address, Netmask, Gateway, and MTU fields as necessary (③).

NOTE: The default value of 1500 in the MTU field is the correct setting in most instances.

  1. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (4). The controller network settings are now applied.

  2. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to configure the other VNM Enterprise Controller.

  3. Configure the IP address of the control PC so that it is within the address range of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

NOTE: Complete this step only if the IP address of each VNM Enterprise Controller is using a network prefix or subnet other than 192.168.254.xxx.

  1. If necessary, restart the control PC to save the new network configuration.

Setting the Role of the Primary Enterprise Controller

Use the following procedure to set the role of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).

  1. Log into the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 150, ①).

Extron Electronics Alerm Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Device Mode redundant_primary Device Mode: redundant_primary Logged on admin switcher logout Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 150. Configuration Page — Redundant Primary Role Setup

  1. Under Device Properties, click the Role link (②).
  2. From the Device Mode drop-down list, select redundant_primary (③).

NOTE: For information on the other device modes, see Role Page on page 22.

  1. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (4).

NOTES:

  • The web-based user interface returns to the Login page after saving the configuration. This may take a few seconds.
  • After completing this procedure, the Cluster Page (see page 172) and Node Test Page (see page 169) are available on the Configuration page.

Setting the Role of the Secondary Enterprise Controller

Use the following procedure to set the role of the redundant secondary

VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Log into the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 151, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Device Mode Device Mode: redundant_secondary Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 151. Configuration Page — Redundant Secondary Role Setup

  1. Click the Role link (②).
  2. From the Device Mode drop-down list in the Device Mode panel, select redundant_secondary (③).

NOTE: For information on the other device modes, see Role Page on page 22.

  1. Click Apply Changes (④) to save the configuration.

NOTE: The web-based user interface returns to the login page after saving the configuration. This may take a few seconds.

Configuring the Primary Enterprise Controller Time Settings

Use the following procedure to configure the time settings of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Log in to the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 152, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher open Time Reported Time Tue May 10 13:13:43 EDT 2011 Clock Synchronization Enable Clock Synchronization: Sources: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete Clock Settings Set line: 11.39.43 Set date: 11/05/2010 Time Zone Set timezone: EST5EDT Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 152. Configuration Page — Primary Controller Time Setup

  1. Under Device Properties, click the Time link (②).
  2. Make sure Enable Clock Synchronization is not checked (③).

NOTE: If Enable Clock Synchronization is checked, the Set time (5) and Set date (6) fields are dimmed.

  1. Select the desired time zone from the Set timezone drop-down list (4) and click Apply Changes (7).
  2. Enter the time in the Set time field (⑤).

- Use the HH:MM:SS (hours:minutes:seconds) format based on the 24-hour clock. For example, 08:25:00 or 20:35:10.

  1. Enter or select the date in the Set date field (6).

• Use the MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year) format. For example, 05/14/2012.

  1. Click Apply Changes (⑦) to save the configuration.

Configuring the Secondary Enterprise Controller Time Settings

Use the following procedure to configure the time settings of the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller.

  1. Log in to the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11) and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 153, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin - switcher - logged Time Reported Time Tue May 10 13:13:43 EDT 2011 Clock Synchronization Enable Clock Synchronization: Sources: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete Clock Settings Set line: 11.39.43 Set date: 11/05/2010 Time Zone Set timezone: ESTSET Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 153. Configuration Page — Secondary Controller Time Setup

  1. Under Device Properties, click the Time link (②).
  2. Select the desired time zone from the Set timezone drop-down list (③). Choose the same time zone selected for the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.
  3. In the Clock Syncronization panel, check Enable Clock Synchronization (4). This syncs the time settings of this VNM Enterprise Controller to the devices listed in the Sources field.
  4. Click Add (⑤) to open the IP address dialog box. Enter the IP address of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click OK to close the dialog.
  5. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (6).

Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller

This section details how to assign the dual VNM Enterprise Controllers as the system controller. Before proceeding, make sure the procedures detailed in Configuring Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers on page 159 are completed.

NOTE: For information on how to configure a single VNM Enterprise Controller as the system controller, see Single VNM Enterprise Controller Configuration on page 14.

Adding the VNM Enterprise Controllers to the Controller List

Use the following procedure to add the VNM Enterprise Controllers to the controller list (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).

  1. Log in to the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 154, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Configuration Protocol: mulicas! Multicast Address default Schema: Clean Switch: Controllers: 102.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 154. Configuration Page — Adding Controllers to the Controller List

  1. Click the System config link (②).
  2. In the Controllers field, click Add (③).
  3. Enter the cluster IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller pair into the dialog box (not shown) and click OK.

NOTE: If necessary, clear the Controllers field. Highlight the IP addresses and click Delete.

  1. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (4).

The VNM Enterprise Controller restarts the user interface and is assigned as the system controller.

  1. Log in to the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller and repeat this procedure.

Configuring the Transport Protocol

Use the following procedure to configure the transport protocol that will be used throughout the VN-Matrix system (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Log into the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 155, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alerms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration Protocol: multicast Mứcst Address: default Schema: Clean Switch: Controller: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.100.0.28 192.100.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 155. Configuration Page — Configuring the Transport Protocol

  1. Click the System config link (②).
  2. From the Protocol drop-down list (③), select the preferred transport protocol.

NOTE: The default transport protocol is Unicast. For more information on transport protocols, see Transport Protocols Used for Streaming on page 4.

  1. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (4).
  2. Log into the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller and repeat this procedure.

Setting the Cluster IP Address

Use the following procedure to set the cluster IP address (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

NOTE: When the VN-Matrix system is first set up, this procedure should be performed on both the primary and secondary controllers before pairing.

  1. Log into the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 156, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher lognet Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node text Cluster Status Active Cluster: none controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: repaired Device Mode: redundant_primary Configuration Cluster IP Address: 192.168.254.250 Test Switch on Powerup: Switch IP Address: none Crossover Subset: 192.168.253.0 Migrats Unpar Par Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 156. Configuration Page — Setting the Cluster IP Address

  1. Click the Cluster link (②).
  2. Enter the desired IP address into the Cluster IP Address field (③).

NOTE: The cluster IP address must have the same network prefix and subnet as the IP address entered in step 4 of Configuring the Network Settings (Eth0) on page 159.

  1. Click Apply Changes (④) to save the setting.
  2. Log into the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller and repeat this procedure.

Setting the Crossover Subnet IP Address (Eth1)

A crossover cable is connected between the eth1 ports of a VNM Enterprise Controller pair. By default, the crossover subnet IP address for this port is 192.168.253.0. In most cases, this is acceptable and does not need altered.

NOTES:

  • If a network prefix or subnet of 192.168.253.xxx is used for the main eth0 ports, a crossover subnet IP address must be created that uses a different network prefix or subnet.
  • The Crossover Subnet field can only be changed when the VNM Enterprise Controllers are unpaired (see Unpairing controllers on page 174).
  • The Crossover Subnet field must be individually set on each VNM Enterprise Controller within the cluster. The entered values must also be identical.
  • A crossover cable must be directly connected between the eth1 ports of a VNM Enterprise Controller pair without using extra network equipment (such as a switch or router).

If necessary, use the following procedure to change the crossover subnet IP address (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Log into the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller and click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 157, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Row Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Cluster Status Active Cluster: none controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: unpaired Device Mode: redundant_primary Configuration Cluster P Address: 192 168.254.250 Test Switch on Powerup: Switch P Address: none Dover Subset: 192 168.253.0 ②③④ Morate Unpair Pair Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 157. Configuration Page — Changing the Crossover Subnet

  1. Click the Cluster link (②).
  2. In the Crossover Subnet field (③), enter the desired crossover subnet IP address.
  3. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration (4).
  4. Log into the redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller and repeat this procedure.

NOTE: When a crossover cable connects the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers and the crossover subnet address on both (3) are set identically, the Crossover status field displays connected.

Node Test Page

This page is used to test the VNM Enterprise Controller pair by determining which controller, primary or secondary, has the best communication with the devices in the VN-Matrix system at power up (see figure 158). The VNM Enterprise Controller that communicates best with these devices becomes the Primary and the other unit becomes the Secondary.

The tested devices are called nodes. This list is created by entering IP address values of VN-Matrix devices into the Sources list.

Extron. Electronics Alarma Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Test Node Configuration Sources: 192.168.254.254 Add Delete Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 158. Node Test Page

Adding nodes

NOTE: Nodes can only be added on a VNM Enterprise Controller that is unpaired.

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the physical IP address (eth0) of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.
  2. Select the Configuration page (see figure 158, ①).
  3. Click on the Node test link ( ②).
  4. Click Add at the bottom of the Sources list (3).

The following dialog box opens.

Pingd Device Address Enter the address of a pingable device. 192.168.254.250 Ok Cancel

  1. Enter the desired IP address and click OK.
  2. Continue to add the IP addresses of from four to six VN-Matrix devices controlled by the VNM Enterprise Controller pair.
  3. When finished, click Apply Changes ( 5).

NOTE: The redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller automatically matches its Sources list to the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.

Deleting nodes

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the physical IP address (eth0) of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.
  2. Select the Configuration page (see figure 158, ① on the previous page).
  3. Click on the Node test link (②).
  4. In the Sources list, select the node to delete.
  5. Click Delete (④) located below the Sources list to remove the selected IP address.

NOTE: The redundant secondary VNM Enterprise Controller automatically matches its Sources list to the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.

Pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers

NOTE: Before pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers, the cluster IP address must be set (see Setting the Cluster IP Address on page 167).

Use the following procedure to pair the VNM Enterprise Controllers (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login).

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the physical IP address (eth0) of the redundant primary VNM Enterprise Controller.

  2. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 159, ①).

Extron Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Cluster Status Active Cluster: none controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: unpaired Device Mode: redundant_primary Configuration Cluster P Address: 192.168.254.250 Test Switch on Powerup: Switch P Address: none Crossover Subset: 192.168.253.0 Migrate Unpair Pair Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 159. Configuration Page — Pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers

  1. Click the Cluster link (②).

  2. Click Pair (③).

NOTES:

  • Pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers can take several minutes.
  • After the VNM Enterprise Controllers are paired, it could be necessary to reconfigure the settings (see Advanced Controller Configuration on page 19).

Configuring VN-Matrix Devices for Dual VNM Enterprise Controllers

For the VNM Enterprise Controller to function properly:

  • Update each VN-Matrix device so that the controller address of each device points to the cluster IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controllers and configure each device to operate on the same network as the VNM Enterprise Controllers.
  • Access the VNM Enterprise Controller web-based user interface by entering the cluster IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller pair into the address bar of the web browser.
  • Use the web-based user interface to select a device from the Devices page and use the Actions menu bar at the bottom of the page to configure the selected device.

For additional information on configuring VN-Matrix devices to operate with the VNM Enterprise Controllers, see the user guide for each device.

About the Cluster Properties Pages

This section details the control options available using the Cluster and Node Test pages. Procedures relevant to these pages are also detailed in this section.

Cluster Page

The Cluster page is used to view and manage the pairing status of the controller (see figure 160).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Versiona System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Cluster A A tus Active Cluster: secondary controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: paired Device Mode: redundant_secondary B - Configuration Cluster IP Address: 192.168.254.250 Test Switch on Powerup: Switch IP Address: none Crossover Subnet: 192.168.253.0 C D B Apply Changes Cancel Changes More Up par

Figure 160. Cluster Page

Status panel (A)

This panel contains four read-only fields that display the following information.

• Active Cluster controller — Displays which VNM Enterprise Controller (primary, secondary, or none) is acting as system primary.
- Crossover status — Displays the status of the crossover link between the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers.
- Cluster — Displays whether the primary and secondary controllers are paired together or unpaired.
- Device Mode — Displays the role of the controller that is logged into (for example, whether it is the primary or secondary controller).

Configuration panel (B)

Use this panel (see figure 160, Ⓑ on the previous page) to configure the following options.

NOTES:

  • The Cluster IP Address, Test Switch on Powerup, and Switch IP Address fields can be configured using any VNM Enterprise Controller within the cluster.
  • The Crossover Subnet field must be individually set on each VNM Enterprise Controller within the cluster. The entered values must be identical.

  • Cluster IP Address — This field is used to set the cluster (shared) IP address for the controller pair. This IP address is used as the controller address by the other devices in the VN-Matrix system. Both the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers (whichever one is active) use the cluster IP address for all system control communications. For information on setting the cluster IP address, see Setting the Cluster IP Address on page 167.

  • Test Switch on Powerup — Selecting this check box causes the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers, when first powered on, to wait until they are both able to communicate with the network switch before determining which controller (primary or secondary) is the best device to manage the VN-Matrix system.
  • Switch IP Address — This field is used to set the IP address of the network switch that is being used in the VN-Matrix system.

NOTE: This field must contain an IP address for the Test Switch on Powerup function to work.

- Crossover Subnet — This field displays the IP address of the crossover subnet Ethernet ports (eth1). The crossover subnet monitors the status of the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers when the system is configured for redundant operation. For information on setting the crossover subnet, see Setting the Crossover Subnet IP Address (Eth1) on page 168.

NOTE: This field can be edited when the VNM Enterprise Controller cluster is unpaired (see Unpairing controllers on page 174).

Setting the Test Switch on Powerup option

  1. Select the Test Switch on Powerup check box to activate this option or deselect the check box to deactivate this option (see figure 160, B on the previous page).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Setting the Test Switch on Powerup option - 1

  1. Click Apply Changes (D), to save the setting.

Setting the switch IP address

  1. In the Switch IP Address field (B), enter the desired IP address.

Switch IP Address: none

  1. Click Apply Changes (D), to save the setting.

Other cluster control functions

Two buttons are available at the bottom of the Cluster page used to manage the state of the controller pair (see figure 160, Ⓖ on page 172). The functions that are available are Migrate, Pair, and Unpair.

Pair and Unpair share a single button.

  • Migrate — Clicking this button causes a controller pair to switch roles. The service provider (primary VNM Enterprise Controller) becomes the backup (secondary VNM Enterprise Controller) and the backup becomes the service provider.
  • Pair — Clicking this button causes a set of controllers to pair together which initializes the service (cluster) IP address and sets the units to operate in a shared-role state.
  • Unpair — Clicking this button causes a controller pair to unpair which stops the service (cluster) IP address and returns the units to independent states.

NOTE: An unpaired controller is not the same thing as a singleton. After unpairing, the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers will not perform their role as controllers until they have been paired back up.

Migrating a controller pair

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the physical IP address (eth0) of the primary VNM Enterprise Controller, the physical IP address of the secondary VNM Enterprise Controller, or enter the service (cluster) IP address for the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers.
  2. Navigate to the Configuration page.
  3. Click on the Cluster link (see Cluster Page on page 172).
  4. Click Migrate at the bottom of the screen.
    Migrate

NOTE: The web browser automatically logs out of the web-based user interface and returns to the login page.

Unpairing controllers

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the physical IP address (eth0) of the primary VNM Enterprise Controller, the physical IP address of the secondary VNM Enterprise Controller, or enter the service (cluster) IP address for the primary and secondary VNM Enterprise Controllers.
  2. Navigate to the Configuration page.
  3. Click on the Cluster link (see Cluster Page on page 172).
  4. Click Unpair at the bottom of the screen.
    Unpair

NOTE: Unpairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers may take several minutes.

Pairing controllers

See Pairing the VNM Enterprise Controllers on page 171.

System Control

The VNM Enterprise Controller is used to configure and control a VN-Matrix system. When used as part of a larger installation, it is likely that there will be a third party control system that integrates all of the system equipment into a single control interface.

The VMN Enterprise Controller incorporates two methods of control to support this system architecture.

  • High Level Interface (HLI) — The HLI is a control protocol that allows users to interface their control system with the devices on a VN-Matrix network. This is the main control protocol used with the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • Command Line Interface (CLI) — The CLI provides low level control of a VN-Matrix device. This is the control protocol that is used by the system controller to communicate with other VN-Matrix devices on the network. The CLI protocol contains a complex instruction set and requires a thorough understanding of VN-Matrix devices and their operation. This complexity makes the CLI unsuitable for most users with limited knowledge of a VN-Matrix system.

NOTE: The Command Line Interface protocol is not thoroughly documented in this user guide.

This section provides information on:

  • HLI Overview
  • HLI Features
    • HLI Connection and Control
    • HLI Command Tables

HLI Overview

The HLI is positioned between the CLI and the user control system. The HLI manages the underlying complexity of the CLI and presents a streamlined control method.

The HLI is accessed from the control computer over the VN-Matrix network or by direct connection using the COM1 serial connector (see Rear Panel Features on page 9) on the rear panel of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

HLI commands are sent to the VN-Matrix system using the following programs:

• Telnet (see HLI Connection and Control below).
- VNM Enterprise Controller web-based user interface (see About the Web-based User Interface on page 2).

NOTE: The commands detailed in the HLI command sections are commonly used to communicate with devices on a VN-Matrix network and represent a subset of the HLI command language.

HLI Features

HLI commands:

  • Provide a single point of control for all VN-Matrix domains.
  • Operate using TCP on port 9996 of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

HLI Connection and Control

HLI commands can be sent from the control computer to the Enterprise Controller using the serial port, the Ethernet port, or using the VNM Enterprise Controller Web-based user interface (see HLI Command Examples on page 212).

Ethernet Connection

The HLI can be accessed using TCP by initiating a Telnet connection to the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller on port number 9996.

NOTES:

  • If the IP address has not changed, the factory default IP address of a VNM Enterprise Controller is 192.168.254.254.
  • Ensure the Telnet service is installed.

Example: Connect to the HLI in Microsoft® Windows® operating systems using the command prompt:

C:> telnet 192.168.254.254 9996

Serial Port (COM) Connection

The VNM Enterprise Controller receives HLI commands from a control computer directly connected to the COM1 serial connector (see Rear Panel Features on page 9).

NOTE: The default configuration settings for the COM1 serial connector are:

  • Com port - COM1
  • Baud rate - 115200
  • Parity bit – None
  • Data bit - 8
  • Start bit – None
  • Stop bit - 1
  • Flow control (handshake) – None

Using the VNM Enterprise Controller User Interface

To enter HLI commands into the VNM Enterprise Controller web-based user interface:

  1. Access the web-based user interface (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11).
  2. From the Devices page, select a device. If necessary, multiple devices can be selected by clicking the check boxes located on the left side of the Devices page (see Devices Page Overview on page 36).
  3. At the bottom of the Devices page, select the Misc menu.

A menu list opens (see figure 161).

Real-time Bandwidth Monitor Delete Device Multiple Device Licensing OSD ID Editor Send HLI command Misc ①

Figure 161. Misc Menu — Select "Send HLI Command"

  1. Select Send HLI command. A HLI command window opens (see figure 162).

Send HLI Command to selected devices - Sid will be replaced with the device id (enter command line) (response)

Figure 162. HLI Command Window

  1. To send a command, click in the (enter command line) text box, and enter the desired HLI command. Press .

The response appears in the lower portion of the window.

Click the X button in the upper right hand corner to close the HLI command window.

HLI Command Tables

HLI commands are listed in the reference section (see HLI Command Overview on page 211).

HLI general commands are used to:

• Control a specific function of a single device
• Build a connection between devices
- Modify the mode of a device
• Retrieve system information and monitor system status

HLI preset commands are used to:

  • Launch an action or series of actions
    • Control and modify system configurations

HLI Responses

HLI responses are formatted using the Java Script Object Notation (JSON) format. Response strings consist of objects, arrays, and values.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - HLI Responses - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["object"] --> B["["]
    B --> C["string"]
    C --> D[":"]
    D --> E["value"]
    E --> F[]

An object is an unordered set of name or value pairs. An object begins with a left brace ( [ ) and ends with a right brace ( ] ). Each name is followed by a colon ( : ) and the name or value pairs are separated by a comma ( , ).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - HLI Responses - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["array"] --> B["["]]
    B --> C["value"]
    C --> D["["]]
    D --> E[" "]
    E --> F[" "]
    F --> G[" "]
    G --> H[" "]
    H --> I[" "]
    I --> J[" "]
    J --> K[" "]
    K --> L[" "]
    L --> M[" "]
    M --> N[" "]
    N --> O[" "]
    O --> P[" "]
    P --> Q[" "]
    Q --> R[" "]
    R --> S[" "]
    S --> T[" "]
    T --> U[" "]
    U --> V[" "]
    V --> W[" "]
    W --> X[" "]
    X --> Y[" "]
    Y --> Z[" "]

An array is an ordered collection of values. An array begins with a left bracket( [ ) and ends with a right bracket ( ] ). Values are separated by a comma( , ).

value
Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - HLI Responses - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["string"] --> B["number"]
    B --> C["object"]
    C --> D["array"]
    D --> E["true"]
    E --> F["false"]
    F --> G["null"]

A value can be a string in double quotes, a number, true or false, null, an object, or an array. These structures can be nested.

Controller Firmware and License Updates

This section provides information about:

  • Updating the VNM Enterprise Controller License
  • Updating the Firmware of a Single Enterprise Controller
  • Updating the Firmware of Dual (Redundant) Enterprise Controllers

Updating the VNM Enterprise Controller License

The VNM Enterprise Controller includes a basic license when purchased. Updating the license of the VNM Enterprise Controller enables the VN-Matrix system to operate with the VNM Software Decoder and the VNS 104 Multi-stream Software Decoder.

ATTENTION:

  1. Click the Configuration tab to open the page (see figure 163, ①).

If login information is required, see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11.

Extron. Electronics Alerms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Configuration Protocol multicast Multicast Address default Scheme: Clean Switch: Controller: 192.158.254.254 192.158.0.27 192.100.0.28 192.100.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 163. Configuration Page — Updating the Controller License

  1. Click the System config link (②).
  2. From the Controllers field in the Configuration panel, select the IP address of the controller that requires a new license (③).
  3. Click License (④).

The Controller License Management dialog box opens (see figure 164). Keep this window open.

Controller License Management Options: E1,M10 Checksum: 34W0Y-W4G2X-KC3VY-VTXB0-YX28X Serial Number: 27 Update License

Figure 164. Controller License Management Dialog

  1. Contact Extron Sales Support and provide the following information.

  2. The serial number of the VNM Enterprise Controller (see figure 164, ③). This can be obtained from the Controller License Management dialog in figure 164, or from the rear panel.
    • The order number of the VNM Enterprise Controller.

NOTE: Contact information is available on the last page of this user guide.

  1. Extron Sales Support provides a structure key and a license key.

• Enter the structure key in the Options field (1).
- Enter the license key in the Checksum field (2).

  1. Click Update License (④) to assign the new license settings.

  2. Click X in the upper right corner of the dialog box to close dialog box.

Updating the Firmware of a Single Enterprise Controller

Before starting this procedure, go to www.extron.com/download and download the latest version of the VNM Enterprise Controller firmware.

Use the following procedure to update the firmware of a single VNM Enterprise Controller (see Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for login information).

  1. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 165, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Enterprise Controller Software Upgrade Package: select Browse... Status: Details: Logged on admin switcher logout Upgrade Cancel Changes

Figure 165. Configuration Page — Single Enterprise Controller

  1. Click the Upgrade link (②).
  2. Click Browse (③) to open a file browser to navigate to the location of the firmware file. Select the file and click Open.
  3. Click Upgrade (④) to start the firmware update.
  4. When the update completes, power down the VNM Enterprise Controller and restart.

Updating the Firmware of Dual (Redundant) Enterprise Controllers

ATTENTION:

The firmware update for dual controllers requires the following steps:

  1. Download the firmware update from www.extron.com/download.
  2. Save the device configuration and presets files to a local PC (see Unpair the Controller Cluster on page 186).
  3. Unpair the controller cluster (see Unpair the Controller Cluster on page 186).

  4. Update the redundant secondary controller (see Update the Redundant Secondary Controller on page 187).

  5. Update the primary controller (see Update the Primary Controller on page 187).
  6. Pair the two controllers (see Pair the Controllers on page 188).
  7. Restore the device configuration and presets files from the local PC (see Restore the Device Configuration and Presets Files on page 189).

Download the Firmware Update File

Before starting this procedure, go to www.extron.com/download and download the latest version of the VNM Enterprise Controller firmware to a folder on the local PC.

Save the Device Configuration and Presets Files

Save the current device and configuration files using WinSCP, a free Windows application that allows the user to connect to the Enterprise Controller pair and copy the configuration data to a local folder on the connected PC.

To copy the device and preset files:

  1. Download and install WinSCP on the local PC from www.winscp.net.
  2. Open WinSCP and create a connection with the following parameters (see figure 166):
File Protocol = SFTP
Host Name = The Cluster IP address of your Enterprise Controller system. 

Port Number = 22

User Name = root

Password = Extron2010

WinSCP Login New Site Session File protocol: SFTP Host name: 192.168.254.250 Port number: 22 User name: root Password: ****** Save As... Advanced... Tools Manage Login Close Help

Figure 166. WinSCP Login Screen

  1. When configuration is completed, click Login.

WinSCP connects to the Enterprise Controller Cluster and the following dialog opens:

root - root@192.168.254.250 - WinSCP Local Mark Files Commands Session Options Remote Help Synchronize Queue - Transfer Settings Default root@192.168.254.250 New Session My documents Import Add Export CAUsers\AI Documents Name Ext Size Type Changed - Parent directory 24/09/2013 14:05:56 Downloaded Radio File folder 20/05/2013 14:43:04 EA Games File folder 29/06/2012 13:17:59 Fox File folder 19/03/2012 17:07:17 My Digital Editions File folder 11/09/2013 14:25:56 My Media File folder 04/04/2012 21:16:43 My Music File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 My Pictures File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 My Videos File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 PDF ePub DRM Ramo... File folder 24/08/2013 09:43:06 Scanned Documents File folder 18/03/2012 17:07:16 SnowFox DVD & Vide... File folder 23/04/2011 19:24:24 Software Bique File folder 11/12/2011 17:01:58 SolarWinds File folder 25/06/2013 09:16:49 BombHunters878000... 1,773 B ACSM File 25/08/2012 10:22:42 BurningLand9780007... 1,809 B ACSM File 13/07/2012 13:22:56 Daniel69781407052847... 1,772 B ACSM File 18/02/2012 11:28:54 desktop.ini 402 B Configuration sett... 24/09/2013 14:05:56 First Pass V6 Code.clp 131 KB CTP File 12/01/2012 12:59:00 GayPalm Remorez Tcs... 4L584 B CTP File 05/03/2012 13:20:26 HarryPotterandtheCh... L785 B ACSM File 20/06/2012 13:03:47 HarryPotterandtheGo... L783 B ACSM File 20/06/2012 13:03:38 root Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owner - armacs.d 21/10/2013 15:33:18 now-or-x root - gnupg 11/10/2013 15:47:29 now-or-x root - python-eggs 11/10/2013 15:47:29 now-or-x root - ash 11/10/2013 15:47:29 now-or-x root - ashd 11/10/2013 15:47:33 now-or-x root - ashv 11/10/2013 15:47:33 now-or-x root scripts 11/10/2013 15:47:33 now-or-x root -bash_history 14,380 B 11/10/2013 15:56:21 now-or-x root -bash_logout 24 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -bash_profile 19I B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -boshrc 17S B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -cshrc 10O B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -history 1I B 03/08/2010 15:02:45 now-or-x root -jeshxt 5I B 14/07/2010 15:30:25 now-or-x root -sqhrc_history 2 B 13/05/2010 18:23:34 now-or-x root -scahrc 12S B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -mbox 3,875 B 18/10/2010 20:01:22 now-or-x root Bush history 5I B 14/07/2010 15:30:25 now-or-x root -sqhrc_history 2 B 13/05/2010 18:23:34 now-or-x root -scahrc 12S B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 now-or-x root -mbox 5,875 B 18/10/2010 20:01:22 now-or-x root Bush history 5I B 14/07/2010 15:30:25 now-or-x root -sqhrc_history 2 B 13/05/2010 18:23:34 now-or-x root -scahrc_ bmax_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox_ mbox

Figure 167. WinSCP Browser, Default View

The left pane defaults to the user documents folder on the local PC. If a different folder is desired, create and select it using the tools provided by WinSCP.

TIP: Create a new folder with an appropriate name that is easily identified as the cluster configuration, device configuration, and presets files.

The right pane defaults to the Enterprise Controller cluster root directory.

  1. In the right pane, the top folder to display the controller drive root.

/ Name Ext 10/8/2013 8:51:0... rwxr-xr-x root 7/26/2013 2:30:1... rwx------ root 5/14/2010 4:00:0... rwxr-xr-x root 7/26/2013 2:30:1... rwxr-xr-x root 7/26/2013 2:27:4... rwxr-xr-x root 7/26/2013 2:30:3... rwxr-xr-x root 10/8/2013 8:51:3... rwxr-xr-x root 7/26/2013 2:29:4... rwxr-xr-x root

Figure 168. WinSCP Browser – Right Pane, Controller Root Folder

  1. In the right pane, select the /drbd/etc/vncontroller folder.

  2. In the vncontroller folder, select the following XML files:

devicexxxxxx.xml(all .xml files that begin with "device"),

User.Edid.Config.xml,

User.Output.Config.xml

User.Source.Config.xml.

Copy (F5) the files in the right pane, to the left pane user documents folder (EC Database in the example below) (see figure 169).

mcontroller - root@10.100.245.60 - WinSCP root@10 100.245.60 C:\EC Database Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owner ----- Size Changed Rights admin.xml 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-x root blip.xml 3,532 B 25/10/2013 09:57:38 narr------ root blue 1,931 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr------ root config.xml 2 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Narr-f-r root device1021158.xml 1,058 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Narr------ root device1080122.xml 76,833 B 24/10/2013 17:31:43 Narr-f-r root device1080123.xml 97,452 B 24/10/2013 17:36:20 Narr-f-r root device1094.xml 97,714 B 24/10/2013 17:34:19 Narr-f-r root device1111999.xml 616 KB 24/10/2013 17:32:48 Narr-f-r root device11211568.xml 133 KB 24/10/2013 17:22:49 Narr-f-r root device120772.xml 78,262 B 24/10/2013 17:39:56 Narr-f-r root device2000694.xml 133 KB 24/10/2013 17:23:04 Narr-f-r root device2000695.xml 62,609 B 24/10/2013 17:41:23 Narr-f-r root device200702.xml 62,609 B 24/10/2013 17:41:23 Narr-f-r root device200710.xml 61,126 B 24/10/2013 17:35:34 Narr-f-r root device200714.xml 61,116 B 24/10/2013 17:24:34 Narr-f-r root 200715.xml 61,365 B 24/10/2013 17:36:30 Narr-f-r root 2001333.xml 66,522 B 24/10/2013 17:36:35 Narr-f-r root 2001337.xml 61,344 B 24/10/2013 17:36:35 Narr-f-r root device2001384.xml 60,952 B 24/10/2013 17:31:22 Narr-f-r root device2009.xml 76,825 B 24/10/2013 17:29:56 Narr-f-r root device2009X.xml 78,322 B 24/10/2013 17:39:56 Narr-f-r root device2009XZ.xml 80,507 B 24/10/2013 17:39:56 Narr-f-r root device2009XJ.xml 76,663 B 24/10/2013 17:27:46 Narr-f-r root device2019XJ.xml 64,329 B 24/10/2013 17:26:40 Narr-f-r root device2019YJ.xml 77,068 B 24/10/2013 17:39:56 Narr-f-r root device2020XJ.xml 64,104 B 24/10/2013 17:38:20 Narr-f-r root Output.Config.xml 1.22 KB 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-s root recgal.xml 6,401 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-s root Source.Config.xml 34,445 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-s root sourceConfigID.xml 1,114 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-s root sourceConfigLJ.xml 939 B 25/10/2013 09:56:05 narr-x-s root toArchivesgdbm 1.28 KB 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Narr------ root User Edid.Config.xml 4,765 B 24/10/2013 17:27:44 Narr-f-r root User.Output.Config.xml 1.12 B 24/10/2013 17:26:31 Narr-f-r root User.Source.Config.xml 1.12 B 24/10/2013 17:26:31 Narr-f-r root

Figure 169. WinSCP Default Folders

  1. In the right pane, browse to the /drdb/var/lib/extron/matrix.hli folder (see figure 170).
  2. Copy the following files to the user documents folder (EC Database in the example below) in the left pane:

graph.gdbm

layout.gdbm

hli - root@10.100.245.80 - WinSCP Local Mark Files Commands Session Options Remote Help Synchronize Queue Transfer Settings Default root@192.188.254.250 New Session C:\Local Disk Upload Edit Properties C:\EC Database /drbd/var/lib/extron/matrix/hli Name Ext Size Type Changed Parent directory 21/10/2013 12:59:46 Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owner graph.gdbm 25,940 B 21/10/2013 13:45:55 RWX7-xx root layout.gdbm 13,783 B 21/10/2013 13:45:55 RWX7-xx root 0 B of 0 B in 0 of 0 39,723 B of 39,723 B in 2 of 2 SFTP-3 0:08:23

Figure 170. Copy Graph Files to PC User Folder

This completes the EC files backup.

Unpair the Controller Cluster

Before starting this procedure, go to www.extron.com/download and download the latest version of the VNM Enterprise Controller firmware. Note the file location you store it to.

The examples for this update procedure for the dual (redundant) VNM Enterprise Controllers use the following IP addresses:

Primary Redundant: 192.168.254.254

Secondary Redundant: 192.168.254.253

Cluster: 192.168.254.250

Copy your current IP addresses and substitute them in the appropriate update instructions.

See Configuring Dual Enterprise Controllers as the System Controller on page 165 for information on changing the IP address of the controllers, and Accessing the Web-based User Interface on page 11 for information on how to login.

  1. Using a web browser, navigate to the web-based user interface by entering the Cluster IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller pair.

  2. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 171, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Cluster Status Active Cluster: secondary controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: paired Device Mode: redundant, secondary Configuration Cluster IP Address: 192.168.254.250 Test Switch an Powerup Switch IP Address: none Crossover Subset: 192.168.253.0 Migrate Cancel Pair Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 171. Configuration Page — Cluster Controller

  1. Click the Cluster link (②).

  2. Click Unpair (③).

Update the Redundant Secondary Controller

  1. When Unpair is complete, use a new browser window or tab to log on to the redundant secondary controller, in this example 192.168.254.253.
  2. Select the Configuration tab (see figure 172, ①).

Extron Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Row Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Enterprise Controller Software Upgrade Package: select Browse... Status: Details: Logged on admin switcher logout Upgrade Cancel Changes

Figure 172. Configuration Page — Redundant Secondary Controller

  1. Click the Upgrade link (②).
  2. Click Browse (③). Use the file browser to navigate to the firmware file location. Select the file and click Open. The selected file location is now in the Package: field.
  3. Click Upgrade, ( 4).

Update the Primary Controller

  1. When the redundant controller upgrade completes, in a new browser window or tab, enter the IP address of the Primary VNM Enterprise Controller, in this example 192.168.254.254.
  2. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 173, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Cluster properties Cluster Node test Enterprise Controller Software Upgrade Package: select Browse... Status: Details: Upgrade Cancel Changes

Figure 173. Configuration Page — Primary Controller Configuration Page

  1. Click the Upgrade link in the left panel (see figure 173, ② on the previous page).
  2. Click Browse (3), and use the file browser to navigate to the firmware file location. Select the file and click Open.
  3. Click Upgrade, ( 4 ).

Pair the Controllers

  1. When the primary controller upgrade completes, click the Configuration tab (if the tab is not open).

The Configuration page opens (see figure 174, ①).

Extron Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Preset Manager Format Editor System Info Cluster Status Active Cluster: none controller: Crossover status: connected Cluster: unpaired Device Mode: redundant, primary Configuration Cluster P Address: 192.168.254.250 Test Switch on Powerup: Switch P Address: none Crossover Subnet: 192.168.253.0 Migrate Unpair Pair Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 174. Configuration Page — Primary Controller Pairing

  1. Click the Cluster link (②).
  2. Click Pair (③).
  3. Click Apply Changes ( 4 ).

Note the Cluster IP Address, in this example: 192.168.254.250.

Restore the Device Configuration and Presets Files

When the pairing process is complete, the device and presets files can be restored.

  1. Reconnect WinSCP to the Enterprise Controller Cluster IP. Open WinSCP and create a connection with the following parameters (see figure 175):

File Protocol = SFTP

Host Name = The Cluster IP address of the

upgraded Enterprise Controller system

(192.168.254.250).

Port Number = 22

User Name = root

Password = Extron2010

WinSCP Login New Site Session File protocol: SFTP Host name: 192.168.254.250 Port number: 22 User name: root Password: ************ Save As... Advanced... Tools Manage Login Close Help

Figure 175. WinSCP Login Screen

  1. When configuration is completed, click Login.

WinSCP connects to the Enterprise Controller Cluster and opens the following dialog:
root - root@192.168.254.250 - WinSCP Local Mark Files Commands Session Options Remote Help Synchronize Queue - Transfer Settings Default root@192.168.254.250 New Session My documents root Find Files Updated File Properties CAI users\AI Documents Name Ext Size Type Changed - Parent directory 24/09/2013 14:05:56 Downloaded Radio File folder 20/05/2013 14:43:04 EA Games File folder 29/06/2012 13:17:59 Fox File folder 19/03/2012 17:07:17 My Digital Editions File folder 11/09/2013 14:25:56 My Media File folder 04/04/2012 21:16:43 My Music File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 My Pictures File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 My Videos File folder 19/01/2011 17:30:14 PDF ePub DRM Ramo... File folder 24/08/2013 09:43:06 Scanned Documents File folder 18/03/2012 17:07:16 SnowFox DVD & Vide... File folder 23/04/2011 19:24:24 Software Bique File folder 11/12/2011 17:01:38 SolarWinds File folder 25/06/2013 09:16:49 BombHunters978000... 1,773 B ACSM File 25/08/2012 10:22:42 BurningLand978000... 1,809 B ACSM File 13/07/2012 13:22:56 Danie97814070$2847... 1,772 B ACSM File 18/02/2012 11:28:54 desktop.ini 402 B Configuration sett... 24/09/2013 14:05:56 First Pass V6 Code.ctp 131 KB CTP File 12/01/2012 12:59:30 GayPalm Remore Tcs... 4L984 B CTP File 05/03/2012 13:20:26 HarryPotterandtheCh... 1,785 B ACSM File 20/06/2012 13:03:47 HarryPotterandtheGo... 1,782 B ACSM File 20/06/2012 13:03:38 root Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owners - armacs.d 21/10/2013 15:33:18 RWX-x-x root - gnupg 11/10/2013 15:47:29 RWX-x-x root - python-cggs 11/10/2013 15:47:29 RWX-x-x root - ash 11/10/2013 15:47:29 RWX-x-x root - ash1 11/10/2013 15:47:33 RWX-x-x root - ash2 11/10/2013 15:47:33 RWX-x-x root scripts 11/10/2013 15:47:33 RWX-x-x root -bash_history 14,380 B 11/10/2013 15:56:21 RWx-x-x root -bash_logout 24 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 RWx-x-x root -bash_profile 191 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 RWx-x-x root -boshrc 175 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 RWx-x-x root -cshrc 100 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 RWx-x-x root -history 11 B 03/08/2010 15:02:45 RWx-x-x root -jeshut 51 B 14/07/2010 15:30:25 RWx-x-x root -sqirc_history 2 B 13/05/2010 18:23:34 RWx-x-x root -tcairc 125 B 13/07/2006 01:06:42 RWx-x-x root -mbox 3,875 B 18/10/2010 20:01:22 RWx-x-x root BambHunter97800... 1,773 B ACSM File 25/08/2012 10:22:42 BurningLand97800... 1,809 B ACSM File 13/07/2012 13:25:56 Danie97814070$2847... 1,772 B ACSM File 18/02/2012 11:28:54 desktop.ini 402 B Configuration sett... 24/09/2013 14:05:56 First Pass V6 Code.ctp 131 KB CTP File 16/03/2012 13:29:38 GayPalm Remore Tcs... 4L984 B CTP File 4.5.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.

Figure 176. WinSCP Browser

The left pane defaults to the connected PC user documents folder. The right pane defaults to the Enterprise Controller cluster root directory.

  1. In the left pane, navigate to the folder containing the previously saved XML files (see figure 177).

  2. In the right pane, navigate to the server location:

- /drdb/etc/vncontroller

  1. From the the left pane, copy the following files to the server location (see figure 177).

• devicexxxxxx.xml (all .xml files that begin with "device")

- User.Edid.Config.xml

- User.Output.Config.xml

- User.Source.Config.xml

Device Files 24-10-2013 - root@192.168.254.250 - WinSCP C:\LOC Database Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owner devic:0101158.xml 78,366 B XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:080122.xml 100,610 B XML File 25/10/2013 09:57:38 Piran-er root devic:080123.xml 100,877 B XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:104.xml 836 KB XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:1111999.xml 137 KB XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:1211569.xml 80,842 B XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:22072.xml 137 KB XML File 25/10/2013 09:56:05 Piran-er root devic:200094.xml 64,696 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:31:43 Piran-er root devic:200695.xml 64,696 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:38:20 Piran-er root devic:200702.xml 64,696 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:34:19 Piran-er root devic:200710.xml 63,178 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:32:48 Piran-er root devic:200714.xml 63,168 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:32:49 Piran-er root devic:200715.xml 63,423 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:39:30 Piran-er root devic:2001338.xml 68,706 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:38:04 Piran-er root devic:2001337.xml 63,402 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:41:23 Piran-er root devic:2001364.xml 62,999 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:41:23 Piran-er root devic:20098.xml 79,356 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:41:23 Piran-er root devic:20098Z.xml 80,892 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:45:34 Piran-er root devic:20098ZZ.xml 83,130 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:44:34 Piran-er root devic:20098ZXVI.xml 79,191 B XML File 25/10/2013 17:46:39 Piran-er root devic:20193 ZXVI devic:278197.xml devic:278206.xml graph.gdbm layout.gdbm User.Edis.Config.xml User.Output.Config.xml User.Source.Config.xml Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/ Subtotal=/control/

Figure 177. Copy Files to Enterprise Controller

  1. After the files are copied, set the file permissions on the copied files to "rw-r--r--".

a. In the right pane, select (highlight) all of the copied files.
b. the selected files and choose Properties from the drop-down list. The following dialog opens.

device10101010.xml, .. Properties Common Checksum 27 files Location: /drbd/etc/incontroller Size: 2,461 KB (2,520, 111 B) Group: Owner: root [0] Permissions: Owner R W X Set UID Group R W X Set GID Others R W X Sticky bit Optel: 0644 OK Cancel Help

Figure 178. Change File Properties

c. In the Permissions panel, enter 0644 in the Octal: field.
d. Click OK to close the dialog.

  1. In the right pane, browse to the following folder (see figure 179):

/drdb/var.lib/extron/matrix.hli.

EC Database - root@192.168.254.250 - WinSCP Local Mark Files Commands Session Options Remote Help Synchronize Queue Transfer Settings Default root@192.168.254.250 C:\Local Disk New Session C:\EC Database /drbd/var/lib/extron/matrix/hli Name Ext Size Type Changed ... device2001010.xml Parent directory 24/10/2013 10:15:28 device2001158.xml XML Document 16/10/2013 09:39:46 device200121.xml XML Document 16/10/2013 09:36:51 device200121.xml 100,864 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:28:26 device200122.xml 100,624 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:39:46 device200124.xml 640 KB XML Document 16/10/2013 09:28:26 device2111999.xml 143 KB XML Document 16/10/2013 09:39:46 device2111568.xml 80,898 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:39:46 device22072.xml 137 KB XML Document 16/10/2013 09:28:26 device2000694.xml 64,711 B XML Document 16/10/2013 10:07:03 device2000695.xml 64,724 B XML Document 16/10/2013 10:07:04 device2000702.xml 64,714 B XML Document 16/10/2013 10:07:04 device2000718.xml 64,955 B XML Document 16/10/2013 10:03:04 device2000714.xml 69,830 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:49:30 device2000715.xml 68,836 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:28:26 device2001333.xml 63,420 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:24:40 device2001337.xml 69,180 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:45:69 device2001354.xml 64,694 B XML Document 16/10/2013 10:07:04 device20009.xml 79,948 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:24:40 device20023.xml 79,226 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:36:30 device20032.xml 79,363 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:40:22 device20098.xml 81,556 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:28:26 device270193.xml 66,464 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:35:33 device270197.xml 79,376 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:29:46 device27229X.xml 66,291 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:37:46 graph.gdbm layout.gdbm 32,243 B GDBM File 23/10/2013 User.Eldd.Config.xml 4,882 B XML Document 16/10/2013 09:24:29 Name Ext Size Changed Rights Owner ... 24/18/2013 10:48:45 next-se-# root graph.gdbm 14,994 B 24/18/2013 10:48:45 next-se-# root layout.gdbm 12,288 B 24/18/2013 10:48:45 next-se-# root

Figure 179. Copy Graph and Layout Files to Enterprise Controller

  1. In the left pane, copy the following files to the right pane (see figure 179 on the previous page):

  2. graph.gdbm

  3. layout.gdbm

  4. After copying the files, in the right pane, select, then graph.gdbm, and set the file permissions to "rw-rw-rw-" (0666), (see step 6 on the previous page).

  5. Click OK to close the dialog.

  6. In the right pane, select, then layout.gdbm and set the file permissions to "rwxr--r--" (∅744), (see step 6 on the previous page).
  7. Click OK to close the dialog.
  8. Close or exit the WinSCP application.

This completes the EC files restore and the firmware upgrade.

Remove power from both Enterprise Controllers.

Reapply power. When the system boots, the new firmware is installed and the system returns to its previous operational state.

VN-Matrix Product Variants

The VNM Enterprise Controller is used with other products in the VN-Matrix range. The preceding sections of this user guide deal specifically with the configuration of the VNM Enterprise Controller with examples based on VN-Matrix systems that use VN-Matrix devices.

This section of the user guide provides information on the configuration and control of the other VN-Matrix Enterprise Controller variants and their operation with the VNM Enterprise Controller.

The following topics are covered in this section:

• VNM Enterprise Controller with CompactFlash Overview
• Installing and Configuring the CompactFlash Replacement Card

VNM Enterprise Controller with CompactFlash Overview

The VNM Enterprise Controller is available with an installed CompactFlash (CF) card. This card replaces the internal hard drive of the VNM Enterprise Controller. The CompactFlash VNM Enterprise Controller operates in the same way as the hard drive VNM Enterprise Controller and provides a removable operating system drive for secure operation in critical applications. The CompactFlash card is installed on the front panel of the VNM Enterprise Controller where the CD/DVD drive is located.

The CompactFlash card can be replaced, if necessary (see Installing and Configuring the CompactFlash Replacement Card below for information).

Installing and Configuring the CompactFlash Replacement Card

This section details the basic information needed to replace and configure an existing VNM Enterprise Controller CompactFlash card.

The replacement CF card is pre-configured with the following settings.

IP address: 192.168.254.254

Username: admin

Password:

Obtain the Configuration Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller

Before replacing the VNM Enterprise Controller CF card, use the following steps to collect information about the current system configuration. The collected information should be copied and pasted into a text program (for example, Notepad).

ATTENTION:

  • The licensing information must be written accurately. Copying incorrect data to the replacement CF card results in a non-functional unit.
  • L'information concernant l'octroi de licences doit être écrit avec précision. Le fait de copier des données incorrectes sur la carte CF de remplacement donne lieu à une unité non fonctionnelle.

  • Ensure the VNM Enterprise Controller has a CF card installed.

  • Power on the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  • Configure the network settings of a control PC so that it is compatible with the VN-Matrix network. Connect the control PC to the VN-Matrix network.
  • Open a web browser on the control PC and type in the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller in the address bar (the default address is http://192.168.254.254). The login page opens (see figure 180).

Extron Electronics Matrix Enterprise Controller

Username: Password: Login

Figure 180. VNM Enterprise Controller Login Page

  1. Enter the appropriate username and password.

NOTE: The default username is admin. By default, no password is required. These entries are case sensitive.

  1. Click Login or press . The Devices page opens (see About the Devices Page on page 36).

  2. From the Devices page, click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration page opens (see figure 181, ①).

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Logged on admin switcher logout Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration Protocol: multicast Multicast Address default Scheme: Clean Switch: Controllers: 102.168.254.254 102.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 181. Configuration Page

  1. Click the System Config link (②).

  2. In the Controllers field click on the IP address of this VNM Enterprise Controller (③).

  3. Click License (4).

The Controller License Management dialog opens.

Controller License Management Options: E1,M10 Checksum: 34W0Y-W4G2X-KC3VY-VTXB0-YX28X Serial Number: 27 Update License

  1. Copy the values from the Options, Checksum, and Serial Number fields.

ATTENTION:

NOTE: The replacement CF card must be programmed with the correct operating system and VNM Enterprise Controller application files. Only use CF cards supplied by Extron.

  1. Power down the VNM Enterprise Controller and remove the front cover plate from the CF drive (see Front Panel Features on page 7).
  2. Eject the CF card from the CF drive and insert the replacement CF card.
  3. Replace the CF drive front cover plate.

Configure the Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller

After the CF card is replaced, the VNM Enterprise Controller is returned to its default configuration settings and must be configured using the settings obtained in Obtain the Configuration Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller on page 195.

Use the following procedures to configure the new CF card.

Set the serial number

  1. Connect a mouse, keyboard, and monitor to the VNM Enterprise Controller (see Rear Panel Features on page 9).
  2. Power on the VNM Enterprise Controller.
  3. When fully booted up, log into the VNM Enterprise Controller.

NOTE: The default username is root. The default password is Extron2010. These entries are case sensitive.

  1. At the prompt [root@singleton \~]#

- Type cd scripts

- Press

  1. At the prompt [root@singleton scripts]#

- Type ./set_serial.sh xxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the serial number of the VNM Enterprise Controller saved in step 11 of Obtain the Configuration Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller on page 195.

- Press A script runs, entering the serial number into the VNM Enterprise Controller.

  1. At the prompt [root@singleton \~]#

- Type reboot

- Press

The VNM Enterprise Controller reboots.

License configuration

  1. After the VNM Enterprise Controller has rebooted, configure the network settings of a control PC so that it is compatible with the VN-Matrix network. Connect the control PC to the VN-Matrix network.

NOTE: The control PC must use an IP address within 192.168.254.2 to 192.168.254.253 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

  1. Open a web browser on the control PC and type the IP address of the VNM Enterprise Controller in the address bar (the default address is http://192.168.254.254). The login page opens in the browser.

  2. Enter the default username and password.

NOTE: The default username is admin. By default, no password is required. These entries are case sensitive.

  1. Click Login or press .

The Devices page opens.

  1. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 182, ①).

The Configuration page opens.

Extron. Electronics Alarms Configuration Devices Format Editor System Info Device Properties Network Password Role Time Upgrade Version System Properties System config Configuration Protocol: multicast Multicast Address default Scheme: Clean Switch: Controllers: 192.168.254.254 192.168.0.27 192.168.0.28 192.168.0.29 Add Delete License Apply Changes Cancel Changes

Figure 182. Configuration Page

  1. Click the System Config link (②).

  2. In the Controllers field, click the Add button (③).

The Peer Controller Address dialog box opens.

  1. Enter the IP address of this VNM Enterprise Controller and click OK.

  2. Click Apply Changes (4) to save the settings.

Peer Controller Address Enter the address of a peer controller 192.168.254.254 Ok Cancel

  1. In the Controllers field (5), select the IP address of this VNM Enterprise Controller.

  2. Click License (6).

The Controller License Management dialog box opens (see figure 183).

  1. Enter the information previously saved (see Obtain the Configuration Settings of the VNM Enterprise Controller on page 195) into the Options, Checksum, and Serial Number fields and click Update License.

Controller License Management Options: Checksum: Serial Number: Update License

Figure 183. Controller License Management Dialog

ATTENTION:

NOTE: After clicking Update License, there is no feedback provided to show that the license information has been accepted.

  1. To check the license information, restart the VNM Enterprise Controller. Reconnect to the VNM Enterprise Controller by opening a web browser on the control PC and view the license information in the Controller License Management dialog box.

NOTE: The information in the Controller License Management dialog box takes several seconds to appear after the VNM Enterprise Controller has rebooted. - If the information does not appear, close the dialog box, wait for ten seconds and retry. - If the information is still not present, enter the serial number and license data again.

The VNM Enterprise Controller can now be configured for operation with the VN-Matrix system (see Advanced Controller Configuration on page 19).

Browser Configuration

This section provides information on configuring the following web browsers:

  • Microsoft ^ Internet Explorer ^ (version 7 or above)
  • Mozilla Firefox (version 1.3 or above)

Microsoft Internet Explorer (version 7 or above)

  1. Open Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options dialog opens (see figure 184).

Internet Options General Secure Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone. Medium High - Blocks third-party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy - Blocks third-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your explicit consent - Blocks first-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Import... Advanced... Default Web Sites To override cookie handling for individual Web sites, click the Edit button. Edit... OK Cancel Apply

Figure 184. Internet Options

  1. To enable cookies, select the Privacy tab (①) and (if required) adjust the slider control (②) to set the required security level. VN-Matrix systems operate correctly using security that does not exceed the Medium High setting.

NOTE: Setting the security slider to block all cookies prevents the VN-Matrix web interface from operating.

TIP: If a high security level is required, click on the Edit button (③) and allow the VN-Matrix web interface to use cookies (see figure 185 on the next page).

Per Site Privacy Actions Manage Sites You can specify which Web sites are always or never allowed to use cookies, regardless of their privacy policy. Type the exact address of the Web site you want to manage, and then click Allow or Block. To remove a site from the list of managed sites, select the name of the Web site and click the Remove button. Address of Web site: Block Allow Managed Web sites: Domain Setting 192.1680.17 Always Allow Remove Remove All OK

Figure 185. Per Site Internet Options

  1. To enable JavaScript, select the Security tab (see figure 186, ①).

Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced 1 1 Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings. Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven't placed in other zones Sites... Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings. - To change the settings, click Custom Level. - To use the recommended settings, click Default Level. 2 Custom Level... Default Level OK Cancel Apply

Figure 186. Security Options

  1. Click Custom Level (②).

The Security Settings dialog box opens (see figure 187).

  1. Scroll down to the Scripting setting and under Active scripting, select Enable (1).

Security Settings Settings: Scripting Active scripting Disable Enable Prompt Allow paste operations via script Disable Enable Prompt Scripting of Java applets Disable Enable Prompt User Authentication Reset custom settings Reset to: Medium Reset OK Cancel

Figure 187. Custom Level Security Options

  1. Click OK (②) on both dialog boxes to save the new settings and close the dialogs.

Mozilla Firefox (version 1.3 or above)

  1. Open Mozilla Firefox and select Edit > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens (see figure 188).
  2. To enable cookies, go to the Privacy & Security category and choose Cookies (see figure 188, ①).

Preferences Category Heber Applicet... Smart Browsing Internet Search Tabbed Browsing Downloads Composer Mail & Newsgroups Privacy & Security Cookies Images Popup Windows Forms Passwords Master Passwords... SSL Certificates Validation ChatZila Advanced Offline & Disk Space Cookies Cookies are small pieces of information that some web sites ask to store on (and later retrieve from) your computer. Disable cookies Enable cookies for the originating web site only Enable all cookies Disable cookies in Mail & Newsgroups Ask me before storing a cookie Limit maximum lifetime of cookies to: current session 90 days Manage Stored Cookies OK Cancel Help

Figure 188. Cookie Preferences

  1. Ensure that either the Enable all cookies or Enable cookies for the originating web site only (2) option is selected.

  2. To enable JavaScript, go to the Advanced category and choose Scripts & Plugins (see figure 189, ①).

Preferences Category Tabbed Browsing Downloads Composer Mail & Newsgroups Privacy & Security Cookies Images Popup Windows Forms Passwords Master Passwo ... SSL Certificates Validation ChatZilla Advanced Scripts & Plugins Keyboard Navi... Cache Proxies HTTP Networking Scripts & Plugins Enable JavaScript for Navigator Mail & Newsgroups Allow scripts to: Move or resize existing windows Raise or lower windows Hide the status bar Change status bar text Change images Create or change cookies Read cookies Enable Plugins for Mail & Newsgroups OK Cancel Help

Figure 189. Scripts and Plugins Preferences

  1. Ensure that the Enable JavaScript for Navigator (②) option is selected.

  2. Click OK (③) to close the dialog box and save the settings.

Reference Information

This section provides information about:

  • Default Factory Settings
    • VN-Matrix System Port Usage
  • Mounting
    • HLI Command Overview
    • HLI Command Examples
  • General Commands
  • Preset Commands

Default Factory Settings

Network settings (ETH0) IP address192.168.254.254
Subnet mask
Gateway address

VN-Matrix System Port Usage

The VN-Matrix system uses a variety of network port numbers for streaming and inter-communication functions. Just as the universal "telnet" function typically uses TCP port number 23, VN-Matrix systems use specific port numbers for operation.

The table on the following page lists the port numbers used by the VN-Matrix series products. The port numbers are, in most cases, for the sender. Port numbers used for receiving are less important in regards to security.

When configuring a network, make sure it allows traffic on the ports required for your given application. The ports highlighted in yellow accommodate most simple applications.

Port Transport Usage
69 UDP TFTP Server, for firmware upgrades.
80 TCP HTTP data for communication between the web browser and the Enterprise Controller. Value is user definable; the default is 80.
554 TCP Real-time streaming protocol (RTSP) server.
5432 UDP Enterprise Controller outgoing and incoming control messages used on the device acting as controller to communicate with other VN-Matrix devices. Value is user definable; the default is 5432.
5555 TCP Old XML interface and old VN-Matrix recorder software application. No longer used.
9998 TCP Telnet Command and Line Interface (CLI) messages to the controller used for sending text-based control commands.
9999 TCP Deprecated: Old remote control server, replaced by CLI (port 9998).
23 TCP Telnet (can be disabled).
161 UDP Simple network management protocol (SNMP) used for alarm access.
199 TCP Simple network management protocol (SNMP) used for alarm access.
4002 TCP Source stream information, used to telnet to a VN-Matrix decoder to view information about the source it is decoding.
5002 TCP Serial port bidirectional protocol (not data channel streaming).
6666 TCP Keyboard and mouse forwarding.
7777 UDP Upgrade daemon, local access only.
8000-8098 (even)UDP RTP unicast or RTP multicast audio, video, whiteboard, and data streams used as the port number of the destination (receiver). The controller selects a port number, starting at 8000.
8001-8099 (odd)UDP RTCP channel for audio, video, whiteboard, and data streams used as the port number of the destination (receiver). Grouped with the even-numbered stream (8000 with 8001, 8002 with 8003, and so on).
8000 TCP Video streams, used as the port number of the source (sender).
8100 TCP Audio streams, used as the port number of the source (sender).
8200 TCP Whiteboard streams, used as the port number of the source (sender).
8201 TCP Data streams, used as the port number of the source (sender).
9000 TCP HSI interface when using ThorDebug.
9001 UDP VN-Matrix outgoing and incoming control messages. Communicates with port 5432 (or the user defined port number) on the Enterprise Controller.
9002 UDP Default port for collecting UDP traffic for data transport. Value is user-definable.
9996 TCP HLI server port.
9997 TCP Annotation server port.

Mounting

Rack Installation

This section provides information on installing the controller into a rack cabinet. Rack installation requires the use of the optional rack mount kit.

There are a variety of rack cabinets on the market, which may mean the assembly procedure will differ slightly. If necessary, refer to the instructions that came with the rack cabinet to complete the rack installation.

UL Guidelines for Rack Mounting

The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines are relevant to the safe installation of these products in a rack:

  1. Elevated operating ambient temperature — If the unit is installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient temperature. Therefore, install the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (TMA: +122 °F, +50 °C) specified by Extron.
  2. Reduced air flow — Install the equipment in the rack so that the equipment gets adequate air flow for safe operation.
  3. Mechanical loading — Mount the equipment in the rack so that uneven mechanical loading does not create a hazardous condition.
  4. Circuit overloading — Connect the equipment to the supply circuit and consider the effect that circuit overloading might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Consider the equipment nameplate ratings when addressing this concern.
  5. Reliable earthing (grounding) — Maintain reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment. Pay particular attention to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (such as the use of power strips).

Basic Rack Mounting

The VNM Enterprise Controller comes with two rack mounting brackets, located on each side at the front of the chassis. To mount the controller, screw these brackets directly to the front of the rack using two screws for each bracket (see figure 190).

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Basic Rack Mounting - 1

natural_image Isometric technical diagram of a mechanical lifting or mounting structure with vertical supports and a central frame (no text or symbols)

Figure 190. Basic Rack Installation

Rack Mounting Using Rack Rails

The supplied rack mount kit includes two rack rail assemblies. Each of these assemblies consist of three sections: an inner fixed rail that secures to the controller frame (see figure 191, A) an outer rack rail that secures directly to the rack (B), and two rail brackets (C) that also attach to the rack.

Outer rail (B) Inner rail (A) Rail brackets (C)

Figure 191. Identifying the Sections of the Rack Rails

To install the controller into a rack, follow the steps below.

  1. Remove the inner rail (A) by pulling it out as far as possible. A locking tab prevents the rail from pulling all the way out, and makes a clicking noise when the rail is fully extended. Depress the locking tab to pull the inner rail completely out. Do this for both assemblies (one for each side).

NOTE: Each rail has a locking tab serving two functions. The first is to lock the controller in place when installed and pushed fully into the rack. Secondly, the tabs lock the controller in place when fully extended from the rack to prevent pulling the controller completely out of the rack.

  1. Align each inner rail (A) to the screw holes located on the left and right side of the controller. Secure the rails to the sides of the controller frame (see figure 192).

NOTE: The two inner rail assemblies are left and right specific.

Inner Rail (Ω) Inner Rail (Ω)

Figure 192. Installing the Rails onto the Controller Frame

  1. Determine where the controller is located within the rack (see Mounting on page 206).

  2. Position the front and rear rail brackets at the desired location in the rack (see figure 193). Screw the rail brackets securely to the rack. Attach the remaining rail brackets to the other side of the rack, making sure both sets are at the same height.

NOTE: The smaller rail bracket is positioned at the front of the rack and the larger rail bracket is positioned at the back of the rack.

Rail Brackets (c) FRONT DE

Figure 193. Install Rail Brackets (©)

  1. Secure the outer rails to the rail brackets (see figure 194).

NOTE: The two outer rails are left and right specific.

Outer rail (B) Rail brackets (C)

Figure 194. Installing the Outer Rail (B) to the Rail Brackets (C)

  1. Line up the inner rails on the controller with the outer rails on the rack. Gently slide the controller into the outer rails of the rack (see figure 195). Depress the locking tabs, if necessary, when sliding the controller into the outer rails.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - Rack Mounting Using Rack Rails - 5

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a vertical storage or lifting platform with metal racks and a front panel, no text or symbols present.

Figure 195. Installing the Controller into a Rack

  1. Connect the necessary devices to the controller (see Front Panel Features on page 7 and Rear Panel Features on page 9).

  2. When the controller is pushed completely into the rack, the locking tabs make a clicking sound. If necessary, secure the front mounting brackets (located on each side at the front of the chassis) to the rack to keep the controller in a fixed position.

HLI Command Overview

The format of an HLI command is shown below.

Command Structure

command argument1 argument2 [optional argument1] [optional argument2]...

NOTE: The number of arguments, both required and optional, depends on the command.

Each command has a defined structure. The HLI command must begin the string but additional commands can follow that include arguments, parameters, and other variables. Each command ends with an (CRLF) command ( ).

In the commands and examples that follow, HLI commands are represented in fixed fonts. Identifiers, variables, arguments, and parameters are in slanted fonts.

NOTES:

  • Text inside brackets [example text] represent optional command arguments. Do not include the brackets when entering the command.
  • A response is returned each time an HLI command is properly sent. The text depends on the type of command. If the command is formatted correctly and accepted, the reply is "okay" unless otherwise stated.

Devices can be identified in one of three ways:

  • IP Address – The IP address of the target device.
  • Device Name – The name of the device as assigned by the user.
  • Device ID – A unique number identifying the target device.

NOTE: The device ID is found on the product sticker located on the device, or in the Device List of the Enterprise Controller. The ID numbers used in the following examples have been simplified for the HLI command structure examples and do not represent actual device IDs.

HLI Command Examples

The HLI command examples that follow refer to a VN-Matrix system consisting of the devices shown in figure 196. The devices are connected using their Ethernet ports with corresponding device ID, IP address, and device names.

Extron VNM Enterprise Controller - HLI Command Examples - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Browser Based Control PC"] --> B["VNM 200 or 225 Series Codec (Source)"]
    A --> C["VNM Enterprise Controller"]
    A --> D["VNM 200 or 225 Series Codec (Display)"]
    A --> E["VNM 200 or 225 Series Codec (Display)"]
    A --> F["VNM 300 Series Codec"]
    A --> G["VNS 104"]
    A --> H["VNR 100"]
    A --> I["VNM Matrix Recorder"]
    B --> J["Device ID: 20001"]
    B --> K["IP Address: 192.168.0.21"]
    B --> L["Device Name: 200_Device1"]
    C --> M["Device ID: 20002"]
    C --> N["IP Address: 192.168.0.22"]
    C --> O["Device Name: 200_Device2"]
    D --> P["Device ID: 30001"]
    D --> Q["IP Address: 192.168.0.31"]
    D --> R["Device Name: 300_Device1"]
    E --> S["Device ID: 30002"]
    E --> T["IP Address: 192.168.0.32"]
    E --> U["Device Name: 300_Device2"]
    F --> V["Device ID: 30003"]
    F --> W["IP Address: 192.168.0.23"]
    F --> X["Device Name: 200_Device3"]
    G --> Y["Device ID: 40001"]
    G --> Z["IP Address: 192.168.0.41"]
    G --> AA["Device Name: 104_Device1"]
    H --> AB["Device ID: 50001"]
    H --> AC["IP Address: 192.168.0.51"]
    H --> AD["Device Name: 5Ch_Device1"]

Figure 196. Basic Application Diagram for HLI Command Control

Not shown: VNM 250.

General Commands

General commands are structured using both fixed commands and variables. In the following pages, fixed commands are in command fonts that identify the HLI commands. Variables that represent the device identifier, argument, or parameter values are in italic fonts.

analogOutputEnable

The analogOutputEnable command enables or disables audio for devices running the VNS 104 software decoder. The command is sent to window 4, the VNS 104 audio channel.

NOTE: This command uses zero-based window numbering. Channel numbers 0 to 3 refer to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right positions respectively. Channel number 4 selects the audio channel.

Command line structure — analogOutputEnable

set device identifier swdecoder window 4 analogOutputEnable enablemode←

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
identifierDevice ID, IP address or Device name
enablemode enableor disableMutes or unmutes the audio.

For the following examples:

VNS 104: Device name = 104_Device1, Device ID = 40001, IP address = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Enable (unmute) audio on a VNS 104 using device name.

set device 104_Device1 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputEnable enable←

Example 2 - Disable (mute) audio on a VNS 104 using device ID

set device 40001 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputEnable disable

analogOutputMute

The analogueOutputMute command mutes or un-mutes the audio channel for devices running the VNS 104 software decoder. The command is sent to window 4, the VNS 104 audio channel.

NOTE: This command uses zero-based window numbering. Channel numbers 0 to 3 refer to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right positions respectively. Channel number 4 selects the audio channel.

Command line structure

set device identifier swdecoder window 4 analogOutputMute mutemode←

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
identifierDevice ID, IP address or Device name
mutemodenormal or mutemutes or unmutes the audio.

For the following examples:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Mute the audio on a VNS 104 using the device name.

set device 104_Device1 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputMute mute

Example 2 - Unmute audio on a VNS 104 using the device ID.

set device 40001 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputMute normal

analogOutputSetLevel

The analogueOutputSetLevel command sets the level of the audio channel on VNS 104 devices. The command is sent to window 4, the VNS 104 audio channel.

NOTE: This command uses zero-based window numbering. Channel numbers 0 to 3 refer to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right positions respectively. Channel number 4 selects the audio channel.

Command line structure

set device identifier swdecoder window 4 analogOutputSetLevel level

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
identifierDevice ID, IP address, or device name
level integer between -70 and 12

For the following examples:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Set the audio level on a VNS 104 to a value of +6 using the device name. set device 104_Device1 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputSetLevel 6

Example 2 - Set the audio level on a VNS 104 to a value of -36 using a device ID: set device 40001 swdecoder window 4 analogOutputSetLevel -36

connect

The connect command switches streams from a source device to a destination device. This command manages the individual parameters required to configure a VN-Matrix stream, including the provisioning of the VN-Matrix devices, to their required state.

Command line structure

connect source:n destination:n [optional parameters]

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
source:nDevice ID, IP address, or Device name followed by an optional channel number :n
destinationDevice ID, IP address, or Device name followed by an optional channel number :n

Additional stream types (audio, data, whiteboard) can be specified as well as the network transport protocol (TCP, UDP or multicast) using optional parameters. Unless otherwise specified, the current global values as defined in the System Controller are used.

The channel designator :n provides support for channel-based devices such as the VN Recorder and VNS 104.

If either the source or destination devices are a VNM Recorder or VNR 100, the connect command is also used to select or create a directory for recording or to load an existing directory for playback.

If the command and parameters are correctly entered and accepted by the controller the return is: "okay"

Additional optional parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Arguments Description
source 50001:1The serial number (ID) of the source device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
192.168.0.51:1The IP address of the source device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
VN_Recorder:1The user-defined name of the source device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
noneClears all connections to this source
destination 40001:1The serial number (ID) of the display device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
The IP address of the display device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
The user-defined name of the display device followed by the channel number (if applicable)
none
streams aAudio (excluding VNM 3xx series devices)
a2Program and return audio (VNM 250 only)
nANC (VNM 3xx series audio)
vVideo
wWhiteboard (specially licensed feature)
dData (specially licensed feature)
rRow FEC (VNM 3xx only)
cColumn FEC (VNM 3xx only)
Example: streams=n,v,dANC, video and data
program_audio_source25002The serial number (ID) of the device (VNE 250 only)
192.168.0.252The IP address of the device (VNE 250 only)
250_Encoder_2The user-defined name of the device (VNE 250 only)
transportunicastUDP point to point connection
tcpTCP connection using IP address of source and destination devices
multicastMulticast - addresses managed by Enterprise Controller settings
Example: transport=unicastUnicast mode
namename=dir1Example:name=dir1:Matrix1Specifies directory name "dir1" for recordingSpecifies directory name "dir1" with filename "Matrix1" for recording
directory directory=dir1Specifies directory name "dir1" for playback
filenamefilename=Matrix1Specifies filename "Matrix1" for playback
timestamptimestamp="duplicate1"Specifies a user-defined text string appended to a new directory if the directory name exists. For example, a duplicate Matrix1 directory becomes Matrix_1-duplicate1. If the timestamp parameter is not included, duplicate directories are automatically appended with the Controller date and time in the form YYYY-MM-DD-hh-mm-ss.Example:Matrix_1-2013-01-19-12-19-24

VNM 200/225 Device Examples

For the VNM 200/225 device examples:

2xx Device1: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

2xx Device2: Name = 200_Device2, ID = 20002, IP = 192.168.0.22

Example 1 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using the device IDs.

connect 20001 20002 

Example 2 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using the device names.

connect 200_Device1 200_Device2 

Example 3 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using the IP addresses.

connect 192.168.0.21 192.168.0.22 

Example 4 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using a combination of device ID and IP address.

connect 20001 192.168.0.22 

Example 5 - Connect Device1 to Device2 with audio, video, and data streams.

connect 20001 20002 streams=a,v,d 

Example 6 - Connect Device1 to Device2 in multicast mode, with audio, video, and data streams.

connect 20001 20002 transport=multicast streams=a,v,d 

Example 7 - Break connections to Device1 (where Device1 is a source).

connect 20001 none ← 

Example 8 - Break connections to Device2 (where Device2 is a display).

connect none 20002 

VNM 250 Device Examples

For the VNM 250 device examples:

VNE 250 Encoder1: Name = 250_Encoder1, ID = 25001, IP = 192.168.0.251

VNE 250 Encoder2: Name = 250_Encoder2, ID = 25002, IP = 192.168.0.252

VND 250 Decoder1: Name = 250_Decoder1, ID = 25003, IP = 192.168.0.253

Example 1 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 using the device IDs.

connect 25001 25003 

Example 2 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 using the device names.

connect 250_Encoder1 250_Decoder1 

Example 3 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 using the device IP addresses.

connect 192.168.0.251 192.168.0.253 

Example 4 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 using a combination of device ID and IP address.

connect 25001 192.168.0.253 

Example 5 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 with audio, video, and data streams.

connect 25001 25003 streams=a,v,d 

Example 6 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 in multicast mode, with audio, video, and data streams.

connect 25001 25003 transport=multicast streams=v,d 

Example 7 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 with breakaway audio from Encoder2. connect 25001 25003 streams=v, a program_audio_source=25002

Example 8 - Connect Encoder1 to Decoder1 with program and return audio (Decoder1 back to Encoder1). connect 25001 25003 streams=v, a2

Example 9 - Break connections to Encoder1. connect 25001 none ←

Example 10 - Break connections to Decoder1. connect none 25003

VNM 3xx Devices

For the VNM 3xx device examples:

3xx Device1: Name = 300_Device1, ID = 30001, IP = 192.168.0.31

3xx Device2: Name = 300_Device2, ID = 30002, IP = 192.168.0.32

Example 1 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using device ID. connect 30001 30002

Example 2 - Connect Device1 to Device2 using device names. connect 300_Device1 300_Device2

Example 3 - Connecting Device1 to Device2 using IP addresses. connect 192.168.0.31 192.168.0.32

Example 4 - Connecting Device1 to Device2 using a combination of device ID and IP address. connect 30001 192.168.0.32

Example 5 - Connect Device1 to Device2 with audio, video, FEC row, and FEC column streams. connect 30001 30002 streams=n, v, r, c

Example 6 - Connect Device1 to Device2 in multicast mode, with video, FEC row, and FEC column streams. connect 30001 30002 transport=multicast streams=v,r,c

Example 7 - Break connections to Device1 (where Device1 is a source). connect 30001 none ←

Example 8 - Break connections to Device2 (where Device2 is a display). connect none 30002

VNS 104 Devices

For the VNS 104 device examples:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

VNM 2xx: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

Example 1 - Connect VNM 2xx to VNS 104 top left quadrant using device IDs. connect 20001 40001:0

Example 2 - Connecting VNM 2xx to VNS 104 top left quadrant using device names. connect 200_Device1 104_Device1:0

Example 3 - Connect VNM 2xx to VNS 104 top left quadrant using IP addresses. connect 192.168.0.21 192.168.0.41:0

Example 4 - Connect VNM 2xx to VNS 104 using a combination of device ID and IP address. connect 20001 192.168.0.41:0

Example 5 - Connect VNM 2xx to VNS 104 bottom right quadrant. connect 20001 40001:3

Example 6 - Connect VNM 2xx video and audio only to VNS 104 bottom right quadrant. connect 20001 40001:3 streams=v, a ←

Example 7 - Connect VNM 2xx video and audio to VNS 104 bottom right quadrant in multicast mode. connect 20001 40001:3 streams=v, a transport=multicast

Example 8 - Break connection of the VNS 104 bottom left quadrant. connect none 40001:2

VNR 100 Devices

For the VNR 100 device examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100 Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM 2xx: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

Example 1 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) to VNR 100 (recorder) specifying a recording directory "dir1". connect 20001 10001 name=dir1

Example 2 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) to VNR 100 (recorder) specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix". connect 20001 10001 name=dir1:matrix

Example 3 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) to VNR 100 (recorder) with video, audio, and data streams and specify a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix". connect 20001 10001 streams=a,v,d name=dir1:matrix

Example 4 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) audio, video, and data streams to VNR 100 (recorder) specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix" and a custom duplicate directory suffix of "duplicate1". connect 20001 10001 streams=a,v,d name=dir1:matrix timestamp="duplicate1"

Example 5 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) video, audio, and data streams to VNR 100 (recorder) in multicast mode specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix". connect 20001 10001 transport=multicast streams=a,v,d name=dir1:matrix

Example 6 - Connect VNR 100 (player) to VNM 2xx (display) specifying a filename "recording1" located in directory "dir1". connect 10001 20001 directory=dir1 filename=recording1

Example 7 - Connect VNR 100 (player) video and audio streams to VNM 2xx (display) in unicast mode specifying a filename "recording1" located in directory "dir1". connect 10001 20001 transport=unicast streams=v,a directory=dir1 filename=recording1

Example 8 - Break connections to the VNR 100 (recorder). connect none 10001

VNM Recorder (5 Channel) Devices

For the VNM Recorder device examples:

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

VNM 2xx: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

Example 1 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) to VNM Recorder channel 2 specifying a recording directory "dir1".

connect 20001 50001:2 name=dir1 

Example 2 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) to VNM Recorder channel 2 specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix"

connect 20001 50001:2 name=dir1:matrix 

Example 3 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) video, audio, and data streams to VNR 100 (recorder) specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix".

connect 20001 10001 streams=a,v,d name=dir1:matrix 

Example 4 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) video, audio, and data streams to VNM Recorder channel 2 specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix" and a custom duplicate directory suffix of "duplicate1".

connect 20001 50001:2 streams=a,v,d name=dir1:matrix timestamp=duplicate1 

Example 5 - Connect VNM 2xx (source) video, audio, and data streams to VNM Recorder channel 2 in multicast mode specifying a recording directory "dir1" with a filename of "matrix".

connect 20001 50001:2 transport=multicast streams=a,v,d
name=dir1:matrix 

Example 6 - Connect VNM-Recorder (player) channel 3 to VNM 2xx (display) specifying a filename "rec1" located in directory "dir1".

connect 50001:3 20001 directory=dir1 filename=rec1 

Example 7 - Connect VNM-Recorder (player) channel 3 video and audio streams to VNM 2xx (display) in unicast mode with a filename "rec1" located in directory "dir1".

connect 50001:3 20001 transport=unicast streams=v,a directory=dir1 filename=rec1 

Example 8 - Break connections to VNM-Recorder channel 2.

connect none 50001:2 

createdisplay

The createdisplay command sets a VN-Matrix Codec device to display mode (decoder). It disconnects existing connections before changing the device mode.

Command line structure

createdisplay device

device: Device name, device ID, or IP address.

For the following examples:

VNM 2xx: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

VNM 3xx: Name = 300_Device2, ID = 30001, IP = 192.168.0.31

Example 1 - Set a VNM 2xx device to display mode using the IP address. createdisplay 192.168.0.21

Example 2 - Set a VNM 2xx device to display mode using the device name. createdisplay 200_Device1

Example 3 - Set a VNM 3xx device to display mode using the device ID. createdisplay 30001

createsource

The createsource command sets a VN-Matrix Codec device to source mode (encoder). It disconnects existing connections before changing the device mode.

Command line structure

createsource device

device: Device name, device ID, or IP address.

For the following examples:

VNM 2xx: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

VNM 3xx: Name = 300_Device2, ID = 30001, IP = 192.168.0.31

Example 1 - Set a VNM 2xx device to source mode using the IP address. createsource 192.168.0.21

Example 2 - Set a VNM 2xx device to source mode using the device name. createsource 200_Device1

Example 3 - Set a VNM 3xx device to source mode using the device ID. createsource 30001

currentTime

The currentTime command returns the current system time of the VN-Matrix controller. It can be obtained from any active VN-Matrix device on the system excluding the VN-Matrix Enterprise Controller. The currentTime value is the reference point when setting future event start times (see play).

Command line structure

get device identifier currentTime 

identifier: Device name, device ID, or IP address of VN-Matrix device (not the EC).

Return attributes:

currentTime: hh:mm:ss:uuuuuu

For the following examples:

2xx Device1: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21 

Example 1 - Getting the VN-Matrix controller system time using the IP address as identifier.

get device 192.168.0.21 currentTime 

Returns: "11:53:02.174478"

Example 2 - Getting the VN-Matrix controller system time using device name as identifier.

get device 200_Device1 currentTime 

Returns: "11:53:02.174478"

deleteddevice

The deleted device command removes unused devices from the VN-Matrix system. Attempting to remove a device currently in use results in a fail code.

Command line structure

deleted device device 

device: Device name, device ID, or IP address.

For the following examples:

2xx Device1: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21 
2xx Device2: Name = 200_Device2, ID = 20002, IP = 192.168.0.22 

Example 1 - Delete an unused 2xx device from the system.

deleteddevice 20001 

Example 2 - Attempting to delete a 2xx device with active connections.

deleteddevice 20002 

Returns: "fail: code=13, object in use"

disconnectall

The disconnectall command breaks all connections to all devices on the VN-Matrix controller.

Command line structure

disconnectall 

Example 1 - Break all connections to all devices on a VN-Matrix controller.

disconnectall 

getalarmlogs

The getalarmlogs command returns a list and details of alarms present on the VN-Matrix system.

Command line structure
getalarmlogs

Returned attributes for this command are:

Attribute ValueDescription
severitycritical, warning, none A summary of the severity of the alarm.
alarm_idnnnExample: 232The associated ID number of the alarm.
controllerIP address: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnExample: 192.168.0.254The IP address of the controller on which the alarm has been flagged.
device_typeText stringExample: VNM RecorderThe type of device the alarm has been raised.
raisetimeText string, dateExample: Wed, 06 Feb 201309:56:15 GMTThe time and date when the alarm condition was raised.
typeText stringExample: 22 - Bad DeviceThe type code and description of the raised alarm.
serialnnnnnExample: 50001The serial number (ID) of the device where the alarm has been raised.
nameText stringExample: 5ch_Device1The name of the device where the alarm has been raised.

Example 1 - Return a list of current alarms on the system.

getalarmlogs

Returns: [{"severity":"Critical","alarm_id":232,"controller":"192.168.0.254","device_type":"VNM Recorder","raisetime":"Wed,06Feb 2013 09:56:15 GMT","type":"22-Bad Device","serial":50001,"name":"5ch_Device1"}]

getcontrollers

The getcontrollers command returns a list of controller IP addresses associated with the VN-Matrix system.

Command line structure
getcontrollers

Example 1 - Return a list of controller IP addresses on the VN-Matrix system.

getcontrollers

Returns: ["192.168.0.254"]

getdevices

The getdevices command returns attributes and values for all devices connected to the VN-Matrix System Controller. Optional parameters can limit the attributes that are returned or can filter which devices return attributes.

Command line structure
getdevices keys where order_by

Available parameters and arguments for this command:

Parameter Argument Description
keysAttribute or Attribute1, Attribute2Example: keys="name,localp0"Any attribute from the getdevices attribute table. Comma separated list of desired attributes.
whereAttribute Any attribute from the getdevices attribute table.
= Equals
<> Does not equal
like ‘so%’ Starts with string ‘so’
like ‘%urce’ Ends with string ‘urce’
like ‘%our%’ Contains string ‘our’
and Logical and
or Logical or
Example: where="type='source'" Example: where="type='source' and source_status='Active'"
order_byAttribute:Any attribute from the getdevices attribute table.
ASC Sort in ascending order.
DESC Sort in descending order.
Example: order_by="localp0 ASC"

Attributes for the command parameter argument (all are returned by default):

Attribute ValueDescription
controllerIpnnn.nnn.nnn.nnnExample: 192.168.0.254IP address of the controller for this device.
curverver(major.minor.build)Example: ver5.2.0Current firmware version of the device.
device_idSerial number: channelExample: 50001:2The unique serial number of the device,followed by the channel number if applicable(VNM Recorder and VNS 104).
device_typeText stringExample: VNC 200 DVI-ADHardware type associated with the device.
dstIpnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn :nnnnExample: 192.168.0.23:8000Stream destination IP address and port number.
localIp0nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnExample: 192.168.0.51IP address of Ethernet port 0 on the device.
modeenable/disable/standbyExample: enableThe current operating mode of the device.
nameName: channelExample: 5ch_Device1:2The user-defined name of the device followed bythe channel number if applicable (VNM Recorderand VNS104).
source_deviceSerial number: channel or noneExample: 50001:2The device ID of the video source associatedwith this device, if applicable.
source_modeText stringExample: 1280 x 720 60pThe current video mode of the device.
source_statusactive/unplugged/nullExample: activeIndicates status of the video input of a source device. Null in the case of a display device.
srcIpnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn :nnnnExample: 192.168.0.23:8000Stream source IP address and port number.
statusactive/no deviceExample: activeIndicates a device is present (active) or unreachable (no device) on the system.
typesource/display/recorder/swdecodernoneExample: swdecoderCurrent device type configuration. Where a codec device has yet to be provisioned as a source or display, ‘none’ is returned.
userParam1Text stringExample: Group1User text field.
userParam2Text stringExample: Group2User text field.
userParam3Text stringExample: Group3User text field.

For the following examples:

VNM 200 (Source): Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

VNM 200 (Source): Name = 200_Device2, ID = 20002, IP = 192.168.0.22

VNM 200 (Display): Name = 200_Device3, ID = 20003, IP = 192.168.0.23

VNM 200 (Display): Name = 200_Device4, ID = 20004, IP = 192.168.0.24

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - List all device names.

getdevices keys=name

Returns: ["200_Device1", "200_Device2", "200_Device3", "200_Device4", "104_Device1", "104_Device1:1", "104_Device1:2", "104_Device1:3", "104_Device1:4"]

Example 2 - List all device names and firmware versions.

getdevices keys=name,curver

Returns: [{"name":"200_Device1","curver":"ver3.11.0"},{"name":"200_Device2","curver":"ver3.11.0"},{"name":"200_Device3","curver":"ver3.11.0"},{"name":"200_Device4","curver":"ver3.11.0"},{"name":"104_Device1","curver":"ver1.0.0"},{"name":"104_Device1:1","curver":"ver1.0.0"},{"name":"104_Device1:2","curver":"ver1.0.0"},{"name":"104_Device1:3","curver":"ver1.0.0"},{"name":"104_Device1:4","curver":"ver1.0.0"}]

Example 3 - List by name all VNM 200 devices that are provisioned as displays.

getdevices keys=name where="device_type='VNC 200 DVI-AD' and type='display'"

Returns: ["200_Device3", "200_Device4"]

getDeviceLayout (VNS 104 Only)

The getDeviceLayout command determines whether video streams are currently displayed in quad-split mode or single window full screen mode on a specific device.

Command line structure
getDeviceLayout device

device: Device name, device ID, or IP address

For the following example:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Determine the current layout of a VNS 104 device using the IP address.

getDeviceLayout 192.168.0.41

Returns: QuadSplit

getFilesInFolder

The getFilesInFolder command returns a formatted list of files in a specified recorder path.

Command line structure
getFilesInFolder device path type

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device 50001The serial number (ID) of the recorder device.
192.168.0.51The IP address of the recorder device.
VN_RecorderThe user-defined name of the recorder device.
pathStringExample: /folder1The path from which the walk command is processed.
typev Video
a Audio
w Whiteboard
d Data
NOTE: Specifies the type of files to return if they exist. If no type is specified, all files are returned.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Return a list of recorded files in a directory named 'folder3' of a VNR 100.

getFilesInFolder 10001 path=/folder3

Returns: ["File3_20001.0.0_r0_s0.rec", "File3_20001.A0.0_r1_s0.rec")]

Example 2 - Return a list of audio files in a directory named 'folder3' of a VNM Recorder.

getFilesInFolder path=/folder3 type=a

Returns: [[ "File3_20001.A0.0_r1_s0.rec"]]

getFolderTree

The getFolderTree command returns a formatted list of folders in a specified recorder path.

Command line structure
getFolderTree device path levels

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device 50001The device ID of the recorder.
192.168.0.51The IP address of the recorder.
VN_RecorderThe user-defined name of the recorder.
pathStringExample: /folder1The path from which the walk command is processed.
levels1 to 10 Level of folder depth to which the walk function searches. If a level number is not specified, the maximum of 10 is selected.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Return a list of folders from the root recording directory of a VNR 100.

getFolderTree 10001 path=/ levels=1

Returns: [["/",["folder1","folder2","folder3"]]]

Example 2 - Return a list of the folders in two levels of directories from the root of a VNM Recorder.

getFolderTree 50001 path=/ levels=2

Returns: [["/",["folderA","folderB","folderC"]],["

folderA",[]],["/folderB,[]],["/folderC",[]]]

Stat

The Stat command returns attributes for the selected recording.

Command line structure
stat device 'recording name' path

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device 50001The device ID of the recorder.
192.168.0.51The IP address of the recorder.
VN_RecorderThe user-defined name of the recorder.
recording name'test_file_1.rec'The file name of the recording. This can be found using the 'getFilesInFolder' command.
pathStringExample: /folder1The path from which the stat command is processed.

For the following example:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

Example 1 - Return the attributes of the recording 'Test_file_1.rec' from folder /tstfolder1 on a VNR 100.
stat 10001 'Test_file_1.rec' /tstfolder1
Returns: {"startTimeUs":626652,"lengthUs":406367, "isdst":0,"tag":"", "length":238,"prefix": "device2000715.videoPort0.2000715.0.0", "ftype": "recording", "startTime":55040,"date":"06-09-13", "path":"/Tstfolder1/Test_file_1.rec"} 

mkdir

The mkdir command creates a new directory on a recorder device.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

mkdir device path

device: Device ID, IP address or name.

path: Path and name of new directory.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

Example 1 - Create a new directory named "dir1" in the root folder of a VNR 100 device.

mkdir 10001 /dir1

Example 2 - Create a subdirectory named "sub1" within the existing1 directory of a VNR 100 device.

mkdir 192.168.0.11 /existing1/sub1

pause (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)

The pause command freezes playback of the specified player and channel number. All associated streams (video, audio, data, whiteboard) are paused when the command is issued.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

pause source:n

source: Device ID, IP address or name of the VNM Recorder or VNR 100.

:n : Channel number (if not specified, defaults to channel 1).

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Pause playback of a VNR 100 using the IP address.

pause 192.168.0.11

Example 2 - Pause playback of a VNR 100 using the device name.

pause 100_Device1

Example 3 - Pause playback on channel 2 of a VNM Recorder using the device ID.

pause 50001:2

play (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)

The play command starts playback of the specified player and channel number. All associated streams (video, audio, data, whiteboard) start when the command is issued. A playat time can be included to start playback at a pre-defined system time in the future, enabling the synchronization of multiple channels. In addition, an offset time can specify a start point other than the beginning of the recording.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

play source:n playat offset

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
sourceDevice ID, IP address, or name of the device.
:nChannel number Defaults to channel 1 if not otherwise specified.
playathh:mm:ss.uuuuuExample: 13:23:25.123456Future time based on the system controller clock.Setting the same playat time across multiple devices and channels allows scalable playback synchronization.
offsetnnn (seconds)Example: 126Allows playback from a position other than the start of the recording.For example, specifying a value of 126 starts playback 2 minutes and 6 seconds into the recording.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Start playback on a VNR 100 device using the IP address.

play 192.168.0.11 

Example 2 - Start playback on a VNR 100 device using the device name.

play 100_Device1 

Example 3 - Start playback on a VNR 100 device 3 minutes into the recorded file.

play 100_Device1 offset=180 

Example 4 - Start playback at a system time of 15:12:22 on a VNR 100 device 3 minutes into the recorded file.

play 100_Device1 playat=15:12:22.123456 offset=180 

Example 5 - Start playback on channel 2 of a VNM Recorder using device ID.

play 50001:2 

Example 6 - Start playback at a system time of 15:12:22 on channel 2 of a VNM Recorder.

play 50001:2 playat=15:12:22.123456 

record (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)

The record command starts recording on the specified recorder and channel number.

Command line structure

record source:n

source: Device name, device ID, or IP address of the VNM Recorder or VNR 100.

:n Channel number (defaults to channel 1 if not specified).

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Start recording on a VNR 100 device using the IP address.

record 192.168.0.11 

Example 2 - Start recording on a VNR 100 device using the device name.

record 100_Device1 

Example 3 - Start recording on channel 2 of a VNM Recorder device using the device ID.

record 50001:2 

rmdir

The rmdir command deletes empty directories on a recorder device.

Command line structure

rmdir device path

device: Device ID, IP address or name.

path: Path and name of the directory to delete.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

Example 1 - Delete directory "dir1" in the root folder using the device ID.

rmdir 10001 /dir1 

Example 2 - Delete subdirectory "sub1" within the "dir1" directory using the IP address.

rmdir 192.168.0.11 /dir1/sub1 

setDeviceLayout (VNS 104 only)

The setDeviceLayout command determines whether video streams are displayed in quad-split mode or full screen mode. This command uses one-based window numbering. VNS 104 channel numbers 1 to 4 refer to top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right positions respectively.

NOTE: Connections to all four decode windows are maintained in the background when a specific channel is set to full screen mode, in order to ensure smooth switching between layout modes.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

setDeviceLayout device:n layout

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device:n 40001:1or192.168.0.41:1or104_Device1:1The serial number (ID), IP address, or device name of the VNS 104 device followed by the decode window number, 1-4
layout QuadSplititorFullscreenQuad split layoutFull screen layout

For the following examples:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Set the top-right window of a VNS 104 device to full screen using the IP address.

setDeviceLayout 192.168.0.41:2 Fullscreen 

Example 2 - Set the bottom-left window of a VNS 104 device to full screen using the device name.

setDeviceLayout 104_Device1:3 Fullscreen 

Example 3 - Return the VNS 104 device to quad split mode using the device ID.

setDeviceLayout 40001:1 QuadSplit 

scaleMode

The scaleMode command sets the type of scaling applied to VNS 104 decoder windows.

NOTE: This command uses zero-based window numbering. Channel numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3 refer to top-left, top-right, bottom-left, and bottom-right positions respectively. Channel number 4 refers to the audio channel.

Command line structure

set device identifier swdecoder window n scaleMode mode

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
identifierDevice name, device ID, or IP address
n:Window number 0, 1, 2, or 3
modefill, follow, or unity

For the following examples:

VNS 104: Name = 104_Device1, ID = 40001, IP = 192.168.0.41

Example 1 - Set scaling on a VNS 104 top-left quadrant to fill using the device ID. set device 40001 swdecoder window ∅ scaleMode fill ←

Example 2 - Set scaling on a VNS 104 top-right quadrant to follow using the device name. set device 104_Device1 swdecoder window 1 scaleMode follow

Example 3 - Set scaling on a VNS 104 bottom-right quadrant to unity using the IP address. set device 192.168.0.41 swdecoder window 3 scaleMode unity

stop (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)

The stop command stops playback of a file on the specified player and channel number. All associated streams are also stopped when the command is issued.

Command line structure

stop source:n

source: Device name, device ID, or IP address of the VNM Recorder or VNR 100.

:n Channel number (defaults to channel 1 if not specified).

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Stop playback on a VNR 100 device using the IP address. stop 192.168.0.11

Example 2 - Stop playback on a VNR 100 device using device name. stop 100_Device1

Example 3 - Stop playback on channel 2 of a VNM Recorder device using the device ID. stop 50001:2

userParam [1, 2 or 3]

The userParam1, userParam2 and userParam3 attributes can be set to hold a user-defined character string. This enables effective filtering and searching when using commands such as getdevices.

Command line structure for setting userParam values

set device identifier userParam1 string
set device identifier userParam2 string
set device identifier userParam3 string 

Command line structure for getting userParam values

get device identifier userParam1
get device identifier userParam2
get device identifier userParam3 

identifier: Device name, device ID, or IP address of VN-Matrix device.

string: Text or character string.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 200_Device1, ID = 20001, IP = 192.168.0.21

Example 1 - Set userParam1 to hold the string "group1" using the IP address. set device 192.168.0.21 userParam1 group1 ←

Example 2 - Set userParam3 to hold the string "group3" using the device name. set device 200_Device1 userParam3 group3 ←

Example 3 - Get userParam3 (example 2) from device ID 20001. get device 20001 userParam3 ← Returns: "group3"

walk

The walk command returns a formatted list of folders and files in a specified recorder path.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):
walk device path type levels

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device 50001192.168.0.51VN_RecorderThe serial number (ID) of the recorder.The IP address of the recorder.The user-defined name of the recorder.
path StringExample: /folder1The path from which the walk command is processed.
type vVideo
aAudio
wWhiteboard
dData
Specifies the type of files to return if they exist. If not specified, all files are returned.
levels 1 to10Level of folder depth the walk function searches.If a level number is not specified, the maximum of 10 is applied.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Return the contents of only the root recording directory on a VNR 100.

$$ \text { walk } 1 0 0 0 1 \text { path } = / \text { levels } = 1 \leftarrow $$

$$ \text { Returns: } [ [" /", [" \text { folder1 }"," \text { folder2 }"," \text { folder3 }" ], [ ] ] $$

Example 2 - Return the contents of two levels of directories from the root on a VNM Recorder.

$$ \text { walk 50001 path } = / \text { levels } = 2 \leftarrow $$

$$ \text { Returns: } [ [" /", [" \text { folderA }," \text { folderB }," \text { folderC } ] ], $$

$$ [ ] ], [ ^ {\prime \prime} / f o l d e r A ^ {\prime \prime}, [ ], [ ] ], [ ^ {\prime \prime} / f o l d e r B, [ ], [ ] ], [ ^ {\prime \prime} / f o l d e r C ^ {\prime \prime}, $$

$$ [ ], [ ^ {\prime \prime} F i l e C _ {2 0 0 0 1}. \emptyset . \emptyset_ {r 0} s \emptyset . r e c", ^ {\prime \prime} F i l e C _ {2 0 0 0 1}. A \emptyset . \emptyset_ {r 1} s \emptyset . r e c" ] ] $$

Example 3 - Return only the audio files from the directory named folder3 on a VNR 100.

$$ \text { walk } 1 0 0 0 1 \text { path = /folder3 type = a levels = 1 } $$

$$ \text { Returns: } [ [" / \text { folder3" }, [ ], [" \text { File3_20001.A0.0_r1_s0.rec" } ] ] ] $$

delete (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 devices only)

The delete command deletes recordings on a recodring device.

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
device 50001192.168.0.51VN_RecorderThe serial number (ID) of the recorder.The IP address of the recorder.The user-defined name of the recorder.
path StringThe path of the recording to be deleted.

For the following examples:

VNR 100: Name = 100_Device1, ID = 10001, IP = 192.168.0.11

VNM Recorder: Name = 5ch_Device1, ID = 50001, IP = 192.168.0.51

Example 1 - Delete the root folder and all recorded content from a folder on a VNR 100.

delete 10001 /Delete_Test

Returns: okay

Example 2 - Delete the recording from a folder on a VNR 100.

delete 100 Device1 /Device Test/

Delete_Test_Record_2001346.0.0_r0_s0.rec

Returns: okay

Example 3 - Delete the root folder and all recorded content from a folder on a VNM Recorder.

delete 192.168.0.51 /Delete_Test

Returns: okay

Example 4 - Delete the recording made on Channel 2 from a folder on a VNM Recorder.

delete 5ch_Device1 /Delete_Test/

Delete_Test_Record_2001346.0.0_r6_s0.rec

Returns: okay

NOTE: When deleting a single file, the full file name must be specified. The full file name can be found by using the getFilesInFolder command (see page 225).

Preset Commands

Preset commands are structured using both fixed commands and variables. In the following pages, fixed commands are in command fonts that identify the HLI commands, and variables that represent the device, argument, or parameter value are in slanted fonts.

presetadvance

The presetadvance command advances or reverses the player in a preset by a single frame. The command is issued each time a single frame advance or reverse is required. The players in the preset must be in pause (playspeed: ) before the command is issued. See presetplay and pause.

NOTE: This command only applies to video channels. To step both video and data synchronously, use the presetstep command.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

presetadvance name direction

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
namestringExample: preset1The name of the stored preset.
directionAny positive or negative integerExample: 1 or -1A positive integer is a single forward frame step. A negative integer is a single reverse frame step.

Example 1 - Stepping the players in the preset named "preset1" by 1 frame in a forward direction.

presetadvance preset1 1

Example 2 - Stepping the players in the preset named "preset1" by 1 frame in a reverse direction.

presetadvance preset1 -1

Example 3 - Stepping the players in the preset named "preset1" by 2 frames in a reverse direction.

presetadvance preset1 -1

presetadvance preset1 -1

Example 4 - Stepping the currently running players in "preset1" by 1 frame in a reverse direction.

presetplay preset1 ∅ ←

presetadvance preset1 -1

presetcopy

The presetcopy command makes a copy of an existing preset and assigns it a new name.

Command line structure (required parameters in bold):

presetcopy name newname

name: Name of the stored preset.

newname: New preset name.

Example 1 - Make a copy of "preset1" named "preset2".

presetcopy preset1 preset2

presetdelete

The presetdelete command deletes the specified preset from memory.

Command line structure
presetdelete name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Delete a preset named preset1.

presetdelete preset1

presetget

The presetget command returns the connection status of all devices within a specified preset. Devices are listed by connection in the returned JSON string, depending on their assigned function.

Command line structure
presetget name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Returned attributes for this command are:

Attribute ValueDescription
deviceDevice IDExample: 20001The device ID within the preset.
onlaunchProvision, Play, or Launch The launchch status of the device within the preset.
directoryExample: /dir1/ The directory usedby a device for recording or playback.
filenameExample: file1 The filename used bythe device for recording or playback.
timesyncYes or No Time Sync ( playback only ).
starthh:mm:ssExample: 01:30:23The start offset time ( playback only ).
stophh:mm:ssExample: 02:31:25The stop offset time ( playback only, not applicable to VNR 100 chase-play mode).
tagExample: tag1 The tag name (recording only ).
streamsa, v, w, d, r, cExample: a,v,dThe streams provisioned for playback or recording.
modefill, follow, or unity The scale mode of a VNS 104 decoder window.
audio_level-36 to +6 The audio level of a VNS
mute_audioyes or no The mute status of a VNS104.

Example 1 - List connection attributes of a preset named "preset1".

presetget preset1

Returns: {"connections": [{"source":{"device":"20001"},

"sinks":[{"device":"20001"}]}], "name":"preset1"}

presetgetlist

The presetgetlist command returns a list of all currently stored presets on a system.

Command line structure
presetgetlist

Example 1 - Return a list of all the presets on a system.

presetgetlist

Returns: ["Preset1", "Preset2", "Preset3", "Preset4"]

presetgetplayerstatus (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 only)

The presetgetplayerstatus command returns a list of playback status properties associated with a specified preset.

Command line structure

presetgetplayerstatus name device

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
namestringExample: preset1The name of the stored preset.
deviceDevice serial numberExample: 50001The ID of a specific player device within the preset.This optional parameter can be used for filtering or search.

Returned attributes for this command are:

Attribute ValueDescription
playstates_playstatePLAYSTOPPAUSEFile is currently playing.Playback is stopped.Playback is paused.
position_timecodehh:mm:ss:ffExample: 01:23:22:00The current playback position within the recorded file in the format hh:mm:ss:ff.NOTE: Frames are always 00.
ts_position_timecode
filenameStringExample: file1_20001.0.0_r0_s0.recName of the recorded file currently loaded for playback.
directoryStringExample: /dir1Name of the directory containing the currently loaded playback file.
duration_timecodehh:mm:ss:ffExample: 02:23:22:00The total duration of the recorded file in the format: hh:mm:ss:ff.NOTE: Frames are always 00.
ts_duration_timecode
durationnnnn (seconds)Example: 8602The total duration of the recorded file in seconds.
ts_duration
positionnnnn (seconds)Example: 5002The current playback position within the recorded file in seconds.
ts_position
speed-10.0 to 10.0Example: 2.3The current playback speed (a value of 0 indicates the content is paused).
ts_speed
device_idserial number: channelExample: 50001:2The device ID and channel number of the player device.
NOTE: Attributes with a ts_prefix refer to the synchronized playback status of a preset where Time Sync mode is enabled.

Example 1 - Return the playback properties of all player devices within a preset named "preset1".

presetgetplayerstatus preset1 
Returns: [{"playstate":"PLAY","position_timecode":"01:23:22:00","filename":"File1_20001.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory":"/dir1","duration_timecode":"02:23:22:00","duration":8602,"position":5002,"speed":2.3,"device_id":"100_Device1"},{"playstate":"PLAY","position_timecode":"01:23:22:00","filename":"File2_20002.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory":"/dir2","duration_timecode":"02:23:22:00","duration":8602,"position":5002,"speed":2.3,"device_id":"100_Device2"},{"ts_playstate":"PLAY","ts_duration_timecode":"02:23:22:00","ts_speed":2.3,"ts_position":5002,"ts_position_timecode":"01:23:22:00","device_id":"preset","ts_duration":8602}] 

Example 2 - Return the playback properties of device ID 10002 within a preset named "preset1".

presetgetplayerstatus preset1 device=10002 
Returns: [{"playstate":"PLAY","position_timecode":"01:23:22:00","filename":"File2_20002.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory":"/dir2","duration_timecode":"02:23:22:00","duration":"8602","position":"5002","speed":"2.3","device_id":"100_Device2"}] 

presetgetrecorderstatus (VNM Recorder and VNR 100 only)

The presetgetrecorderstatus command returns a list of recording status properties associated with a specified preset.

Command line structure
presetgetrecorderstatus name device

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
namestringExample: preset1The name of the stored preset.
deviceDevice serial numberExample: 50001The ID of a specific recorder device within the preset. This optional parameter can be used for filtering or search.

Returned attributes for this command are:

Attribute ValueDescription
recordstate enableableRecording is currently in progress.Recording is stopped.
disable
duration 0-99999Example: 5002The current length (or total length if the recording has completed) of the recorded file in seconds.
Mbytes 0-99999Example: 5002The current size (or total size if the recording has finished) of the recorded file in megabytes.
filenameStringExample:file1_20001.0.0_r0_s0.recName of the recording file.
directoryStringExample: /dir1Name of the recording directory.
device_idserial number: channelExample: 50001:2The device ID and channel number of the recorder device.

Example 1 - Return the recording properties of all recorder devices in "preset1".

presetgetrecorderstatus preset1

Returns: [{"Mbytes":"1564","filename":"File1_20001.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory":"/dir1","duration":"8602","recordstate":"disable","device_id":"10001:1"},{"Mbytes":"1564","filename":"File2_20002.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory":"/dir2","duration":"8602","recordstate":"disable","device_id":"10002:1"}] 

Example 2 - Return the recording properties of device ID 10002 within a preset named "preset1".

presetgetplayerstatus preset1 device=10002

Returns: [{"Mbytes":"1564","filename":"File2_20002.0.0_r0_s0.rec","directory:/dir2","duration":"8602","recordstate":"disable","device_id":"10002:1"}] 

presetlaunch

The preset launch command calls a previously stored preset and creates all associated connections between source and sink devices. If the preset includes recorder devices (VNM Recorder or VNR 100), directories and filenames are created (if they do not exist). If the preset includes player devices (VNM Recorder or VNR 100), associated files and offset times are provisioned ready for playback. In addition, players or recorders start to playback or record if the on launch status within the preset is set to play or record respectively (see presetset).

Command line structure

presetlaunch name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Launch preset1.

presetlaunch preset1

presetload

The presetload command calls a previously stored preset and creates all of the associated connections between source and sink devices. If the preset includes recorder devices (VNM Recorder or VNR 100), directories and filenames are created (if they do not already exist).

If the preset includes player devices (VNM Recorder or VNR 100), associated folders, files and offset times are provisioned ready for playback. Optional parameters allow certain preset attributes to be changed and loaded on a one-time basis.

NOTE: Optional parameters allow certain preset attributes to be changed and loaded on a one-time basis. The changes do not overwrite the original preset.

When a VNR 100 is present in the preset, both the media and filename parameters MUST be set for the command to complete.

Command line structure
presetload name parameters

name: Name of the stored preset.

parameters: Optional parameters.

Available parameters and arguments for this command:

Parameter Argument Description
mediadirectoryExample: media=/dir1The directory for recording or playback.
filename filenameExample: filename=file1The name of a file present in the specified media folder.
tagstringExample: tag='session1'A description (tag) associated with a recording.
starthh:mm:ssExample: start=00:01:33The start offset associated with playback.
stophh:mm:ssExample: stop=00:02:50The stop offset associated with playback.

Example 1 - Load a preset named "preset1". presetload preset1

Example 2 - Load a preset named "preset1", specifying directory 'dir1'. presetload preset1 media=/dir1←

Example 3 - Load a preset named "preset1", specifying directory 'dir1' and a filename 'test'. presetload preset1 media=/dir1 filename=test

Example 4 - Load a preset named "preset1", specifying directory 'dir1', and start and stop offsets. presetload preset1 media=/dir1 start=00:01:33 stop=00:02:50

presetplay

The presetplay command controls the playback speed of all currently playing player devices (VNM Recorder and VNR 100) within a preset. If presetplay is called while the players in a preset are paused, playback is resumed at the specified speed.

NOTE: presetplay cannot be used to start players currently stopped. The presetplayerstart command is used in this instance.

Command line structure

presetplay name speed

Available parameters and arguments for this command:

Parameter Argument Description
namestringExample: preset1The name of the stored preset.
speed -10.0 to 10.0Playback speed where -10.0 to 10.0 is a multiple of 1x play speed (negative values are reverse playback).

Example 1 - Setting the players in preset1 to play at x1.5 speed forward.

presetplay preset1 1.5

Example 2 - Setting the players in preset1 to play at x2.3 speed in reverse.

presetplay preset1 -2.3

Example 3 - Setting the players in preset1 to play at x0.0 speed (pause).

presetplay preset1 ∅ ←

presetplayerpause

The presetplayerpause command pauses playback on all active players in a specified preset.

Command line structure

presetplayerpause name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Pause all active playback in "preset1".

presetplayerpause preset1

presetplayerstart

The presetplayerstart command activates playback on all provisioned players in a specified preset. The optional keepoffset parameter determines whether a start and stop offset (specified in the preset) is applied.

Command line structure

presetplayerstart name keepoffset

name: Name of the stored preset.

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
keepoffset yes or noExample: keepoffset=yesApplies start, stop, or both offsets specified in a preset.

Example 1 - Start all players in "preset1".

presetplayerstart preset1

Example 2 - Start all players in "preset1" while maintaining all offsets.

presetplayerstart preset1 keepoffset=yes

presetplayerstop

The presetplayerstop command stops playback on all active players in a specified preset.

Command line structure

presetplayerstop name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Stop all active playback in a preset named "preset1".

presetplayerstop preset1

presetrecstart

The presetrecstart command activates recording on all provisioned recorders in a specified preset.

Command line structure

presetrecstart name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Start all recorders in the preset named "preset1".

presetrecstart preset1

presetrecstop

The presetrecstop command stops all active recordings on all recorders in a specified preset.

Command line structure

presetrecstop name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Stop all active recordings in a preset named "preset1".

presetrecstop preset1

presetrename

The presetrename command renames the specified preset to a new name.

Command line structure

presetrename name newname

name: Name of the stored preset.

newname: New preset name.

Example 1 - Rename "preset1" to "preset2".

presetrename preset1 preset2

presetset

The preset command creates and stores a new preset with a specified name and attributes using a JSON string (see HLI Responses on page 178).

Command line structure

presetset name {JSON}

name: The name of the preset (A-Z,a-z,0-9,dash [-], and underscore [ _ ]).

{JSON}: The JSON string containing details of sources, displays, and attributes.

presetstep

The presetstep command advances or reverses the players in a preset by approximately 250 milliseconds, referred to as a step. The command is issued each time a single step advance or reverse is required. The players in the preset must be paused before this command can be issued. See presetplay, presetplayerpause and pause.

NOTE: This command applies to video, data, and whiteboard channels.

Command line structure

presetstep name direction

Available parameters and arguments for this command are:

Parameter Argument Description
namestringExample: preset1The name of the stored preset.
direction Any positive or negative integer.Example: -1 or 1A positive integer is a single step forward, a negative integer is a single reverse step.

Example 1 - Step the players in the preset named "preset1" by one step in a forward direction.

presetstep preset1 1

Example 2 - Step the players in the preset named "preset1" by one step in a reverse direction.

presetstep preset1 -1

Example 3 - Step the players in the preset named "preset1" by two steps in a reverse direction.

presetstep preset1 -1 ←
Returns: "okay"
presetstep preset1 -1 ←
Returns: "okay" 

Example 4 - Stepping the currently running players in "preset1" by one frame in a reverse direction.

presetplay preset1 ∅ ←
Returns: "okay" 
presetstep preset1 -1
Returns: "okay" 

presetseek

The presetseek command allows the user to seek a specific point in the files of the currently playing recorders in a preset.

NOTE: Playback automatically continues from the specified time. No extra play commands are required to continue the playback.

Command line structure

presetseek name time

name: Name of the stored preset.

time: Time value in hh:mm:ss:dd (must be within the maximum time of the file)

Example 1 - Search all channels of all recorders in the preset named "preset1" to 00:03:30:00.

presetseek preset1 00:03:30:00←
Returns: "okay" 

presetunlaunch

The presetunlaunch command breaks all connections to and from devices associated with a specific preset.

NOTE: The command does not stop file playback on associated player devices (VNM Recorder or VNR 100).

Command line structure

presetunlaunch name

name: Name of the stored preset.

Example 1 - Break all connections specific to "preset1".

presetunlaunch preset1

Extron Warranty

Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:

USA, Canada, South America, and Central America:

Extron Electronics

1230 South Lewis Street

Anaheim, CA 92805

U.S.A.

Japan:

Extron Electronics, Japan

Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho

Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082

Japan

Europe and Africa:

Extron Europe

Hanzeboulevard 10

3825 PH Amersfoort

The Netherlands

China:

Extron China

686 Ronghua Road

Songjiang District

Shanghai 201611

China

Asia:

Extron Asia Pte Ltd

135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01

PM Industrial Bldg.

Singapore 368363

Singapore

Middle East:

Extron Middle East

Dubai Airport Free Zone

F13, PO Box 293666

United Arab Emirates, Dubai

This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not authorized by Extron.

NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.

USA: 714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876

Europe: 31.33.453.4040

Asia: 65.6383.4400

Japan: 81.3.3511.7655

Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.

Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been advised of such damage.

Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may not apply to you.

Extron Headquarters+1.800.633.9876 (Inside USA/Canada Only)Extron USA - West Extron USA - East+1.714.491.1500 +1.919.850.1000+1.714.491.1517 FAX +1.919.850.1001 FAXExtron Europe+800.3987.6673(Inside Europe Only)+31.33.453.4040+31.33.453.4050 FAXExtron Asia+65.6383.4400+65.6383.4864 FAXExtron Japan+81.3.3511.7656+81.3.3511.7656 FAXExtron China+86.21.3760.1568+86.21.3760.1566 FAXExtron Middle East+971.4.299.1800+971.4.299.1880 FAXExtron Korea+82.2.3444.1571+82.2.3444.1575 FAXExtron India1800.3070.3777(Inside India Only)+91.80.3055.3777+91.80.3055.3737 FAX
Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : Extron

Model : VNM Enterprise Controller

Category : Controller